JP6236508B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

A gaming machine capable of improving the fun of gaming is provided. An effect button that can be operated by a player, and an effect lever that can be operated by the player in addition to the effect button are provided so that the player is prompted to operate the effect button when operating the effect button. When the player is caused to operate the effect lever, an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect lever is executed. Then, when an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever is performed, the movable body is controlled to be operated more easily before the effect that prompts the operation is performed, compared to an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button. [Selection] Figure 110

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that produces an effect of suggesting a jackpot expectation degree on the condition that an operation means such as an operation button is operated at a predetermined timing. For example, in Patent Document 1, if there is an operation input through an operation button when there is an effect for prompting the player to operate the button, a game state such as a future big hit or an effect effect is displayed. An effect suggesting a change is made.

JP 2014-188056 A

  However, if the mere operation of the operation button as described above is an opportunity to execute an effect suggesting a jackpot expectation or a change in the game state, the effect of the effect may be poor, and in improving the fun of the game There was a need for further improvements.

  In view of the above background, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of gaming.

  In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first operating means that can be operated by a player, and a second operating means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operating means. And an effect control means for controlling an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means and an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, and a movable means that can move from the first position to the second position. And a movable control means capable of controlling the movement of the movable means from the first position to the second position, wherein the movable control means is an operation for prompting an operation of the second operation means by the effect control means. When the effect is controlled, the movable means is moved from the first position to the first position before the control by the effect control means is performed, compared to the case where the operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is controlled. It is easy to move to position 2 and is controlled. To.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can improve the interest of a game can be provided.

It is a front view of a gaming machine. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A) is a figure showing the jackpot determination table for 1st special symbols, (b) is a figure showing the jackpot determination table for 2nd special symbols. (A) is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for winning a big win, (b) is a diagram showing a special symbol determining table for winning a small winner, (c) is a special symbol determining table for losing FIG. (A) is a figure showing a jackpot game control table, (b) is a figure showing a big jackpot opening / closing control table for the first jackpot game, and (c) is a big jackpot opening / closing control table for the second jackpot game. (D) is a figure showing the 3rd big hit game big prize opening / closing control table. (A) is a figure showing a small hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing the big winning game opening / closing control table for a small hit game. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in a low probability game state and a non-time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation | variation pattern determination table in the 1-30th fluctuation | variation in a high probability game state and a time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation | variation pattern determination table in the 31st-74th fluctuation | variation in a high probability game state and a time-short game state. It is a figure showing the special symbol fluctuation | variation pattern determination table in the 75th-84th fluctuation | variation in a high probability game state and a time-short game state. (A) is a diagram representing a normal symbol hit determination table, (b) is a diagram representing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a regular variation pattern determination table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination table. (E) is a figure showing an auxiliary game control table, (f) is a figure showing a 2nd starting opening-and-closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol reserve storage area, (c) is a diagram of the normal symbol reserve storage area of the main RAM 101c The figure showing a structure is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of a normal symbol holding | maintenance storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the winning gate detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit game process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows to the middle of the command analysis process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the command analysis process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change effect pattern determination process in an effect control board. It is a flowchart showing a specific effect type determination process in the effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the effect input control process in an effect control board. It is a figure which shows an effect mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode B. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the variation production pattern determination table matched with production mode D. FIG. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode A. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the variation effect of effect mode A. FIG. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode B. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of effect mode B. FIG. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode C. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of effect mode C. FIG. It is a figure showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode D. It is a figure which shows the special effect information table which memorize | stores the setting content for every kind of each special effect which can be performed in the fluctuation effect of effect mode D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific production | presentation determination table for a low probability game state and a non-time-short game state. It is a figure which shows the specific production | presentation determination table for a high probability game state and a time-short game state. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for lose. It is a figure which shows the specific effect vibration speed determination table for big hits and small hits. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio | voice output determination table for losers. It is a figure which shows the specific effect audio | voice output determination table for big hits and small hits. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for lose. It is a figure which shows the specific effect image output determination table for big hits and small hits. It is a figure which shows the degree of jackpot expectation degree of a specific production. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of a change production. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the state of a normal effect button typically, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the state of the effect button at the time of a specific effect, (c) These are the figures for demonstrating typically the state in which the image output and the audio | voice output were performed at the time of specific production. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the display result stopped-displayed as a result of a variable display. It is a figure which shows the example 1 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example 2 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. (A) is a figure which shows the example 3 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus, (b) is a 1st game information display apparatus and a 2nd It is a figure which shows the example 4 of a display of the information displayed on a game information display apparatus and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the first half of the example 5 of the display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the second half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example 6 of a display of the information displayed on a 1st game information display apparatus, a 2nd game information display apparatus, and a 1st image display apparatus. FIG. 10 is a front view of the first game information display device. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the first game information display device. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first game information display device. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first game information display device in an exploded state. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a first game information display device. It is a front view of the board | substrate for 1st display. It is a rear view of the 1st display board | substrate. It is a rear view of a cover member. It is the schematic which shows the control structure concerning a 1st game information display apparatus. It is a front view of the periphery of the 1st game information display apparatus concerning a modification. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a coating | coated member and an identification means. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the 1st game information display apparatus which concerns on a modification. It is a front view of the 1st game information display device concerning a modification. It is a rear view of the 1st game information display device concerning a modification. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a first game information display device according to a modified example. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of a state in which a first game information display device according to a modification is disassembled. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 1st game information display apparatus concerning a modification. It is the schematic which shows the control structure concerning the 1st game information display apparatus which concerns on a modification. It is the schematic which shows the control structure concerning the 1st game information display apparatus which concerns on a modification. It is a perspective view from the front of the 2nd game information display device. It is a perspective view from the back of the 2nd game information display device. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 3rd specific example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 4th specific example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 5th example of allocation of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern, and a timing chart. It is an animation figure showing that a plurality of operation means can be operated. It is a figure which shows the 1st specific example which concerns on a state transition, and a figure which shows the 6th specific example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 2nd specific example which concerns on a state transition, and a figure which shows the 7th specific example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 3rd specific example which concerns on a state transition, and a figure which shows the 8th specific example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 4th specific example which concerns on a state transition, and a figure which shows the 9th specific example of distribution of the operation means which concerns on a fluctuation pattern and a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the 5th specific example which concerns on a state transition. It is a figure which shows the 6th specific example which concerns on a state transition. It is a figure which shows the 7th specific example which concerns on a state transition. It is a figure which shows the 8th specific example which concerns on a state transition.

Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention (also referred to as “this embodiment”) will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine Y is formed with a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down. And a game board 2.

  The game board mounting frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game store, and is detachably mounted.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame Y1 via a hinge mechanism portion H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably about the hinge mechanism portion H as a fulcrum. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door around the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the game area 2A and the front portion of the game board mounting frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the game area 2A in a state where the game board 2 is closed so as to be visible.

  A lock mechanism R that fixes the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided on the other end side of the glass door Y2. The fixing by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y <b> 2 is provided with a receiving tray 50 that stores a plurality of game balls and a firing operation device 3 that can perform an operation for firing the game balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a game ball launch device (not shown) that can launch a game ball toward the game area 2A. The game ball launcher is provided on the front surface of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the game ball launcher.

  The firing operation device 3 includes a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y2, and a launch handle 32 that is rotatably provided on the base 31. The game ball launcher launches a game ball with a strength (hereinafter referred to as “game ball launch strength”) according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32.

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a special winning opening 8, which will be described later, are arranged and a game ball is placed. A guidance member 29 </ b> D having a guidance path that can be guided to the second starting port 7 formed on the upper surface is provided.

  The decorative frame 29 </ b> A is fitted into the approximate center of the game board 2. An image display device 14 including a liquid crystal display is fitted inside the decorative frame 29A. Also, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided at the inner end of the decorative frame 29A.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. A game ball fired with a predetermined game ball launch strength rises between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enters the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and windmills are provided. A game ball that has entered the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and windmills.

  In the game area 2A, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning awards 11 are provided. Each general winning opening 11 is provided with a general winning opening detecting sensor 11a. When the general winning opening detecting sensor 11a detects a gaming ball, a predetermined number (for example, ten) of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. .

  A first winning gate 9 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. In addition, a second winning gate 10 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the lower right side of the decorative frame 29A in the game area 2A. The winning gates 9 and 10 are provided with winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a for detecting game balls. A normal symbol lottery is performed on condition that the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a detect a game ball. The normal symbol lottery will be described later.

  A first start port 6 is provided below the image display device 14 at the lower part of the game area 2A and is invariable and can always enter the ball. The first start port 6 is provided with a first start port detection sensor 6a for detecting a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball. The first special symbol lottery will be described later. When the first start port detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A variable second start port 7 is provided immediately below the first start port 6. The second start port 7 is controlled by the second start port control device 70 to either a basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning a prize or a special mode (open mode) of winning. The second start port 7 is also provided with a second start port detection sensor 7a for detecting a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed on condition that the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball. The second special symbol lottery will be described later. When the second start port detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The second start port control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  The normal movable piece 70A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the movable piece 70A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the second start port 7 is opened. It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a basic mode of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normal movable piece 70A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the second start port 7. The second start port 7 is controlled to a special mode that allows the ball to enter. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the ordinary movable piece 70 </ b> A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the second starting port 7 is opened, the normal movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the second starting port 7.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second start-up port control device 70 is that the normal symbol lottery described above is determined as the winning normal symbol.

  On the downstream side of the second winning gate 10, a variable large winning opening 8 is provided. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 to either a basic mode in which no winning is possible or a special mode in which a winning is possible. The big winning opening 8 is provided with a big winning opening detecting sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the big prize opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The special prize opening control device 80 includes a rotatable special movable piece 80A and a special prize opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit for rotating the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is composed of a rectangular door member. Normally, the special movable piece 80A stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A (except when a predetermined condition is satisfied), and the special winning opening 8 is closed. doing. The closing of the special prize opening 8 by the special movable piece 80 </ b> A constitutes the basic mode of the special prize opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is rotated forward about the rotation shaft formed at the lower end portion to open the special winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled to a special mode in which a ball can be entered. Opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. When the special winning piece 80A is opened, the special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A and can receive the flowing game ball and guide it to the special winning opening 8.

  The predetermined condition for the special winning opening control device 80 is the above-described first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as “special symbol lottery”). In other words, the jackpot special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is determined.

  On the surface of the game board 2, a first special symbol first display 60, a second special symbol first indicator 61, a normal symbol first indicator 62, a first special symbol hold first indicator 63, a second special symbol. A symbol reservation first display 64 and a normal symbol reservation first display 65 are provided. The display device provided with these is called a first game information display device 59. Further, on the surface of the game board 2, a first special symbol hold second display 83, a second special symbol hold second display 84, a normal symbol hold second display 85, a right-handed second display 87, a second One special symbol second indicator 88, a second special symbol second indicator 89, and a normal symbol second indicator 90 are provided. The display device provided with these is referred to as a second game information display device 79.

  The first special symbol first indicator 60 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 6, and the second special symbol first display. The device 61 is a variable display device that displays a result of the second special symbol lottery performed on condition that a game ball enters the second start port 7.

  In the first special symbol lottery, a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the first start port 6, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not. In the second special symbol lottery, whether a big hit determination random number value is acquired when a game ball enters the second starting port 7, and the acquired big hit determination random number value is a random value corresponding to “big hit” Determining whether or not.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol first display 60 displays the variation of the special symbol based on the lottery result, and the first special symbol representing the result of the first special symbol lottery. The symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 is a notification of the lottery result. The same applies to the second special symbol lottery and the second special symbol first display 61.

  For example, the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61 each include a plurality of LEDs. In the variable display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol first display 60 or second special symbol first display 61 blinks at a predetermined interval. In the special symbol stop display, a specific LED indicating the result of each special symbol lottery is lit.

  The normal symbol first display 62 is a variable display device that displays the result of the normal symbol lottery performed on condition that the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10. In the normal symbol lottery, a winning random number value is acquired when the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10, and it is determined whether or not the acquired winning random number value is a random value corresponding to “win”. This is the process to do.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol first display 62 displays a variation of the normal symbol based on the lottery result, and the normal symbol representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is stopped. That is, the normal symbol stop display on the normal symbol first display 62 is a notification of the lottery result.

  For example, the normal symbol first display 62 includes a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol first display 62 blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a normal symbol, specific LED showing the result of a normal symbol lottery lights.

  By the way, during the special symbol variation display or during the special game in which the special winning opening control device 80 is operated, even if a game ball enters the start ports 6 and 7, the special symbol variation display is immediately performed and the special symbol variation display is performed. The result of the symbol lottery is not notified. That is, the special symbol variation display may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as a fixed condition, an upper limit is set for the number of special symbols that can be suspended. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to “4” for each of the start ports 6 and 7. That is, it is possible to hold up to four rights to execute the special symbol variation display for each of the start ports 6 and 7.

  The first special symbol hold first display 63 has a hold number (U1: hereinafter referred to as “first special figure hold number”) of fluctuation display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure change display”). Is displayed. The second special symbol hold first display 64 is a holding number (U2: hereinafter referred to as “second special figure hold number”) of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure fluctuation display”). Is displayed. The first special symbol hold first indicator 63 and the second special symbol hold first indicator 64 each include, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and turn on a predetermined LED according to the number of holds.

  Similarly, for the variable symbol display (hereinafter referred to as “general variable display”), the upper limit reserved number is set to four, and the reserved number (G: hereinafter referred to as “general map reserved number”). ) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold first display 65. The normal symbol hold | maintenance 1st indicator 65 comprises several LED, for example, and lights predetermined LED according to the number of usual figure hold.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for executing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device is the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the effect lighting device 16, the first effect accessory device 1701, the second effect accessory device 1702, and the third effect use. It is comprised with the accessory apparatus 1703. FIG. An image display device 14, a first effect accessory device 1701, a second effect accessory device 1702, and a third effect accessory device 1703 are provided on the game board 2, and the audio output device 15 and the effect lighting device are provided. 16 is provided on the glass door Y2.

  The image display device 14 performs various effects by displaying various still images and moving images. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14, but other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The first effect accessory device 1701 includes a first decorative member 17A as a movable member. The second effect accessory device 1702 includes a second decorative member 17B as a movable member. The third effect accessory device 1703 includes a third decorative member 17C as a movable member. Each effect accessory device operates a decorative member as a movable member provided therein, and performs an effect by the operation. The audio output device 15 produces a sound effect by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. The effect lighting device 16 performs an effect by illumination by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp.

  As will be described later, the first decorative member 17A is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the first effect accessory device 1701 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. Accordingly, the first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” (original position) above the image display device 14 to “operation position 1-1” (the position of the center of the front surface of the image display device 14). Move to (position after movement). The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-2”, which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14, via “operation position 1-1”. To do. The first decorative member 17A moves from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” and then returns to “standby position 1”, or from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1”. After moving to “operation position 1-2” via “−1”, a movement operation is performed such as returning to “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1”.

  Similarly, the second decorative member 17B is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the second effect accessory device 1702 by the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the second decorative member 17B falls to the left from the “standby position 2” (original position), which is the right position of the image display device 14, with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum. 14 moves to “operation position 2” (position after movement), which is the position of the front surface. When the second decorative member 17B moves from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, the second decorative member 17B then stands on the right side with the lower side of the second decorative member 17B as a fulcrum, and reaches the “standby position 2” (original position). A moving operation such as returning is performed.

Similarly, the third decorative member 17C is driven by a solenoid, a motor, or the like included in the third effect accessory device 1703 under the drive control of the lamp CPU 104a based on the control of the sub CPU 102a. As a result, the third decorative member 17C falls to the right side from the “standby position 3” (original position), which is the position on the lower left side of the image display device 14, with the lower side of the third decorative member 17C as a fulcrum. It moves to “operation position 3” (position after movement) which is the position of the front surface of the device 14. When the third decorative member 17C moves from the “standby position 3” to the “operating position 3”, the third decorative member 17C then stands on the left side with the lower side of the third decorative member 17Cc as a fulcrum, and reaches the “standby position 3” (original position). An operation such as returning is possible.
Note that the first decorative member 17A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C are not limited to the shapes and operation modes described here.

  The saucer 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 that functions as an input device for performing operations related to various effects described later.

  The effect button device 18 includes an effect button 18A as operable “first operation means”, and an effect button operation detection switch 18a for detecting a pressing operation on the effect button 18A.

The effect button 18A includes a non-projecting state (FIG. 2 (a)) in which the effect button 18A is a normal operation position, and a protruding state (FIG. 2 (b)) that protrudes to an operation position above the non-projecting state. The state when the pressing operation is detected can be changed from the non-protruding state to a state of retreating downward (FIG. 2C).
In the non-projecting state, the effect button 18A is a state in which only the tip portion slightly protrudes upward from the surface around the tray 50.
Further, the effect button 18A is in a state of protruding several times (about 7 to 10 times) above the non-projecting state from the surface around the tray 50 in the protruding state.
In addition, the effect button 18A slightly retreats from the surface around the saucer 50 and enters a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. That is, the effect button device 18 has a structure in which the effect button 18A can be changed into a non-projecting state, a protruding state, and a pressed state in which a pressing operation is detected. When the production button 18A in the non-projecting state or the projecting state is pressed to enter the pressed state, the pressing operation is detected. When the pressing operation is subsequently released, the pressed state returns to the non-projecting state.

  The direction in which the effect button 18A moves between the position in the non-projecting state, the position in the protruding state, and the position where the pressing operation is detected (pressed position) is defined as the advancing / retreating direction of the effect button 18A.

  When the effect button 18A is in a state where a pressing operation is detected, the effect button operation detection switch 18a outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that a complete pressing operation of the effect button 18A has been detected to the lamp control board 104. To do.

  Further, when the production button 18A is in the projecting state, the projecting state detection switch 18a21 outputs a projecting state detection signal indicating that the projecting button 18A is held at the maximum projecting position (the projecting state position). Output to.

  The effect button 18A has a transparent member that can transmit light as a housing, and incorporates an LED (not shown). When this LED (not shown) emits light, the light passes through the effect button 18A to the outside, and the effect button 18A is illuminated.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 72, the effect button 18A can vibrate (reciprocate) from the non-projecting state in the vertical direction (reciprocating direction), and the vibration speeds are low speed vibration and high speed vibration. There are two stages. It is difficult for the player to visually determine whether or not the effect button 18A is oscillating, and the player can confirm the presence or absence of vibration by touching the effect button 18A. If the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A vibrates at a low speed, the vibration is transmitted to the player as "Poco ... Poko ...", and the player when the effect button 18A vibrates at a high speed. Touches the production button 18A, the vibration is transmitted to the player as “pocopocopocopoco”.

  Furthermore, the effect lever apparatus 19 which functions as an input device for performing the operation which concerns on the various effects mentioned later is provided in the left end part of the glass door Y2.

  The effect lever device 19 includes an effect lever 19A as an operable “second operation means”, and an operation detection switch 19a for detecting an operation of the effect lever 19A. The effect lever 19A has an operation rod that can be gripped by the player and is attached so that it can be tilted up and down, and the operation detection switch 19a detects a downward tilt operation of the effect lever 19A.

  In the present embodiment, a state in which an operation on the effect button 18A as the “first operation means” or the effect lever 19A as the “second operation means” is validated is referred to as an “operation valid state”. The sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute a predetermined effect by operating an operation means that enables the operation in the “operation effective state”. Examples of the “operation effective state” include an “operation effective state” which is a predetermined period set in advance, and an “operation effective state” when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The effect device performs various effects according to the progress (state) of the game. As an effect, for example, there is a special drawing lottery effect that is performed in response to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The special drawing lottery effect is performed in the image display device 14. In the special drawing lottery effect, a change display of the special effect symbol and a stop display of the special effect symbol are performed.

  The variation display of the special effect symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, and the special effect symbol varies for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner. The special effect symbol stop display is performed in response to the special symbol stop display (hereinafter, the special effect symbol change display and stop display are collectively referred to as “special effect symbol display”). In the special effect symbol stop display, the special effect symbol is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined manner indicating the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The special effect symbols are, for example, three rows of special decorative symbols Z1 to Z3 (for example, “1” to “9”) arranged in the left region, the central region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. Decorative design that represents numbers). In the variation display of the special effect design, the special decoration design in each column moves (variation display) from top to bottom as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of special effect symbols is not limited to this. In addition, during the variation display of the special effect symbol, various effect images such as a background image and an object image such as a character, a movie, and the like are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the special effect design stop display, the above-mentioned three rows of special decoration designs are stopped and displayed in the left region, the center region, and the right region of the display region 140 of the image display device 14 or the like. The arrangement of special decorative symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display area 140) when the special effect symbols are stopped and displayed represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  In addition to the special drawing lottery effect, a roulette effect that is triggered by a normal symbol lottery described later, a special game effect that is performed when a jackpot game is executed, and a special symbol variation display or special game is performed for a predetermined period. Various effects such as a demonstration effect performed in an internal standby state (so-called customer waiting state) are performed.

  Control means 100 for controlling the progress of the game is provided on the back surface of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2. The control means includes a main control board 101, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game information output terminal board 108, and the like.

(Internal structure of control means)
Next, the control means 100 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply board 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine Y, monitors a power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine Y, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, An interruption detection signal is output to the main control board 101. When the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 101a becomes operable, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 101a becomes inactive state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and for example, a battery may be used, and a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads out a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (quartz crystal units) and the like, performs arithmetic processing related to the game, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, a first starting port detection sensor 6a, a second starting port detection sensor 7a, a big winning port detection sensor 8a, and a first winning gate detection are detected via an input port (not shown). The sensor 9a, the second winning gate detection sensor 10a, and the general winning opening detection sensor 11a are connected. Each detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101 when detecting a game ball.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, via an output port (not shown), a second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the normal movable piece 70A of the second start port control device 70, and a prize winning port control. A special prize opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs a control signal for controlling each solenoid to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  Further, on the output side of the main control board 101, a first special symbol first indicator 60, a second special symbol first indicator 61, and a normal symbol first indicator 62 are provided via an output port (not shown). The first special symbol hold first display 63, the second special symbol hold first display 64, and the normal symbol hold first display 65 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs a display control signal for controlling each display device to each display device 60-69.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information relating to a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The game information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined game information based on the predetermined game information (external signal).

  The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102a, a sub ROM 102b, and a sub RAM 102c. The effect control board 102 is connected to the main control board 101 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing related to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  An effect button operation detection switch 18 a and an effect lever operation detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is pressed (pressed) and reaches the operation detection position, the effect button operation detection switch 18a outputs an effect button operation detection signal indicating that the effect button 18A has been pressed to the lamp control board 104. To do. The lamp control board 104 outputs an effect button operation detection signal input from the effect button operation detection switch 18 a to the effect control board 102.

  When the effect lever 19A is tilted, the effect lever operation detection switch 19a outputs an effect lever operation detection signal indicating that the effect lever 19A has been tilted to the lamp control board 104. The lamp control board 104 outputs the effect lever operation detection signal to the effect control board 102 when receiving the effect lever operation detection signal.

  The sub CPU 102a receives a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button operation detection signal output from the effect button device 18, an effect lever operation detection signal output from the effect lever device 19, and a timer (quartz crystal). Based on the input signal or the like, the program stored in the sub-ROM 102b is read and arithmetic processing is performed, and a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 based on the arithmetic processing. . The sub RAM 102c functions as a data work area when the sub CPU 102a performs arithmetic processing.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the game ball and payout control for paying out the game ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c. The payout control board 103 is connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication.

  A touch sensor 32a and a firing volume knob 32b are connected to the input side of the payout CPU 103a. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted in the firing handle 32. When a player, a clerk, or the like touches the launch handle 32, the touch sensor 32 a detects that a person has touched the launch handle 32 and transmits a launch handle detection signal to the payout control board 103. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The firing volume knob 32b rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32 and detects the rotation angle.

  The payout control board 103 is connected to the firing solenoid 41 via the power supply board 107 on the output side. The payout control board 103 permits energization of the firing solenoid 41 when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a.

  When the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 rotates and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear rotates. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32 detected by the firing volume knob 32 b is applied to the firing solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates according to the applied voltage. In this manner, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the launch solenoid 41 based on the information contained in the launch handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the launch volume knob 32b, and launches the game ball.

  In this embodiment, the reciprocating speed of the firing solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the launching device 4. Since one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid 41 makes one reciprocation, the number of game balls fired in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  Further, a payout drive unit 51 of the payout device 5 for paying out a predetermined number of game balls from a storage tank (not shown) to the player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 103. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the prize ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give a predetermined game ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 includes a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, an effect lighting device 16 and an effect accessory device 17 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a performs light emission control of the effect lighting device 16 and irradiation of light from the effect lighting device 16 based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as “effect control command”). Drive control for the motor for changing the direction is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a performs drive control on a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect accessory device 17 based on the effect control command. Further, the lamp CPU 104a causes the LED 1821d of the effect button device 18 and the drive control for the electric motor 18b to move the effect button 18A of the effect button device 18 between the normal operation position and the special operation position based on the effect control command. Perform light emission control.

  The effect button operation detection switch 18a and the effect lever operation detection switch 19a are connected to the input side of the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18 a and the effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19 a are input, the lamp control board 104 outputs the input detection signal to the effect control board 102. . That is, the lamp control board 104 relays the effect button operation detection signal and the effect lever operation detection signal between the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18, and the effect lever device 19.

  The image control board 105 generates at least a video signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14 and sound output to the sound output device 15. A sound generation unit 105C that generates and outputs the sound signal to the sound output device 15, and a control unit 105A that controls and controls the image generation unit 105B and the sound generation unit 105C.

  The overall control unit 105 </ b> A of the image control board 105 includes an overall CPU 105 </ b> Aa, an overall ROM 105 </ b> Ab, and an overall RAM 105 </ b> Ac for performing image display control by the image display device 14.

  The overall CPU 105Aa is connected to an overall ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the overall CPU 105Aa is read out. Upon receiving a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, the general CPU 105Aa issues an instruction for an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 on the image generation unit 105B based on the command, and also transmits to the sound generation unit 105C. A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general RAM 105Ac functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the general CPU 105Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general ROM 105Ab.

  The general ROM 105Ab is composed of a mask ROM, a control processing program for the general ROM 105Ab, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of a production pattern, animation scene information, and the like. Is remembered.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method. Various information such as a duty ratio that is a parameter of the luminance of the image display device 14 is included.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 105Ba that is an image processor, a CGROM 105Bb that stores image data, and a VRAM 105Bc that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. I have.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as a source of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the overall CPU 105Aa. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, a material image representing an individual image such as a background image such as a scene, a character, and a dialogue that constitutes a background of a decorative design image or a decorative design. It is data. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without being compressed. The CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to the VDP 105Ba. The VDP 105Ba divides the pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14 and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  4A and 4B are diagrams showing an example of the jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination constitutes a special symbol lottery and is to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 4A is a table (a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when a game ball enters the first start port 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4B is a table (a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol) that is referred to in the jackpot determination performed when the game ball enters the second start port 7.

  Each of the jackpot determination tables is a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “low probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to when the jackpot winning probability, which will be described later, is relatively low (set to a standard value). And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “high probability jackpot determination table”) that is referred to in a relatively high state (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, a jackpot determination value and a determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 6 or the second starting port 7 with the jackpot determination table, Either “winning” or “losing” is determined.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the jackpot game with the opening of the jackpot 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped and displayed. If the result of the big hit determination is “small win”, the small win game with the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed after the special symbol indicating the result is stopped. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, neither the jackpot game or the jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, in the variation effect as the special drawing lottery effect, as will be described later, a reach effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit. As a reach effect, for example, the above-mentioned special-figure decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in two areas of the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display area 140 of the image display device 14 during the variable display of the effect symbols. (A part of the production symbol performs a pseudo stop display), and if a predetermined special figure decoration symbol stops on a predetermined effective line in the remaining one region, it becomes an arrangement of special figure decoration symbols representing the winning of the jackpot There is a reach effect in which a state (so-called “reach state”) occurs. If the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the result of the jackpot determination is still “losing” even if this stunning specific state is reached.

  After the reach state occurs in the reach production, a specific production (so-called “super-reach production”) that increases the expectation of winning a big win may or may not be developed. Further, in the reach production, the reach state does not always occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a predetermined effect is performed to increase the player's expectation of winning the big hit without reaching a reach state. If the result of the jackpot determination is “big jackpot”, the reach effect is basically performed in most cases.

  Fig.5 (a)-FIG.5 (c) are figures which show an example of a special symbol determination table. The special symbol determination constitutes a special symbol lottery, and the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 based on the result of the jackpot determination. (Special symbol stop display mode) is to be determined.

  The special symbol determination table is largely divided according to the result of the jackpot determination (big hit, small hit and loss). That is, FIG. 5A is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “big hit”, and FIG. 5B is the case where the result of the jackpot determination is “small hit”. The table referred to in the special symbol determination, FIG. 5C, is a table referred to in the special symbol determination when the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

  Each of these tables is further divided according to the type of start opening (the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7) in which a game ball was entered as a trigger for the special symbol determination.

  Each special symbol determination table stores a special symbol determination value and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 6 or the second start port 7 is collated with the special symbol determination table to be stopped and displayed. A special symbol is determined. As special symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, special symbol stop symbol data and special effect symbol designating commands are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in the process on the main control board 101, and the special effect design designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the process on the effect control board 102. The special effect designating command is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the special symbol variable display (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S310).

  The special effect designating command is for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61) on which the special symbol related to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It consists of 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte DATA data for identifying special symbols to be stopped and displayed.

  For the special effect designating command, if the MODE data is “E3H”, it means that the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol first display 60, and if the MODE data is “E4H”, The special symbol stop display is performed on the second special symbol first display 61. The special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E3H” is referred to as “first special effect symbol designating command”, and the special effect symbol designating command with MODE data “E4H” is referred to as “second special effect symbol designating command”. "

  FIG. 6A is a diagram illustrating an example of the jackpot game control table used when the jackpot game is controlled.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As conditions for controlling the jackpot game, the opening time, which is the period from the start of the jackpot game until the first opening of the big prize opening 8, and the opening to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening Ending time, which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the jackpot game, and the ending An ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are related to the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the jackpot game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 6B to FIG. 6D are diagrams showing an example of the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the big hit game used when the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 is controlled. FIG. 6B is a table referred to in the first jackpot game constituting the jackpot game, and FIG. 6C is a table referred to in the second jackpot game constituting the jackpot game. ) Is a table referred to in the third jackpot game constituting the jackpot game.

  The big winning opening / closing control table for the big hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 during the big hit game. As conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, a special number is a round number (R) which is the number of the round game, and an opening number of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize opening control device 80) in each round game. The operation number (K) and the opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating an example of the small hit game control table used when controlling the small hit game.

  The small hit game control table stores conditions for controlling the small hit game. As conditions for controlling the small hit game, the opening time, which is a period from the start of the small hit game until the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening The opening designation command, the type of table used to control the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8, the ending time which is the period from the end of the last opening of the big prize opening 8 to the end of the small hit game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these small hit games are related to the type of the small hit, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, which control condition is used in the small hit game is selected based on the type of special symbol.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of a big prize opening / closing control table for a small hit game used when the opening / closing of the big prize opening 8 is controlled. The big winning opening / closing control table for the small hit game stores conditions for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 8 during the small hit game. The conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 8 are the round number (R), the special electric action number (K) that is the opening number of the big prize opening 8 (operation of the big prize opening control device 80), and the big prize. The opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the mouth 8 are set.

  FIG. 8A shows an example of a game condition data determination table that is referred to when determining game condition data. The game condition data is identification information that represents a game condition that is newly set (changed) after the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. The game condition data is associated with the jackpot winning probability at the time of the special symbol determination and the result of the special symbol determination (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, the game condition data determination table is divided according to the jackpot winning probability (low probability gaming state / high probability gaming state), and in each divided table, the type of special symbol (special diagram stop symbol data) and game Condition data is uniquely associated and stored.

  The game condition data is composed of 2-byte data. The upper byte of the game condition data represents a jackpot winning probability newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high probability (high probability gaming state) after the jackpot game, and if it is “00H”, the winning probability of the jackpot is low (low probability game). Status). On the other hand, the low-order byte of the game condition data represents the start opening prize ease that is newly set by the jackpot winning. If it is “01H”, the start port winning ease after the jackpot game is set to easy (short time gaming state), and if it is “00H”, the starting port winning ease is difficult after the jackpot game (non-short time gaming state). ).

  FIG. 8B shows an example of the game condition determination table. The game condition determination is to determine a game condition that is newly set when the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game end process). As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the start opening winning ease are set as the game conditions.

  The game condition determination table includes game condition data and each game condition, that is, ON / OFF of a flag indicating the game condition (high probability flag and time-short flag) and the number of times of special symbol variable display that can be executed according to the game condition. (Xa, Ja: hereinafter referred to as “executable number of times”) are uniquely associated and stored. The number of times that the special symbol display can be executed means the specified number of times of special symbol variable display according to the newly set game conditions. Note that the number of times that the special symbol display can be executed corresponds to the number of determinations for jackpot determination.

As described above, in the gaming machine Y, the main CPU 101a, when executing the jackpot game, is advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time-short game state) after the jackpot game ends. A specific gaming state (a high probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state) is set.
The main CPU 101a ends the specific gaming state when the number of jackpot determinations (the number of times that the special symbol display can be performed) reaches 84 times in this specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state). Yes. Thus, the gaming machine Y functions as a so-called “ST machine”.

(Special symbol variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 9 to FIG. 12 are diagrams showing examples of special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables that are referred to when determining a variation display mode of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation pattern”).

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special figure variation pattern in the low probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
FIG. 10 shows how to determine the special figure variation pattern when the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is 1st to 30th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 11 shows how to determine the special figure variation pattern when the special symbol variation number in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is the 31st to 74th times. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
FIG. 12 shows how to determine the special figure variation pattern when the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot is 75th to 84th. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred.
It should be noted that the special figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the special variation pattern in the high-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state when winning the third jackpot, or that is referenced when winning the small bonus Description of the special figure variation pattern determination table is omitted.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 25, the main CPU 101a refers to the game condition determination table (FIG. 8B) in the main ROM 101b and confirms the current gaming state determined by ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the short time flag. If the current gaming state is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol variation display is confirmed, and the special figure fluctuation is determined according to the gaming state or the gaming state and the number of fluctuations. Select the pattern determination table.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the current gaming state is a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state (normal state), the main CPU 101a refers to (selects) the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the special symbol variation number is 1 to 31 times, refer to the special diagram variation pattern determination table of FIG. To do.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the special symbol variation number is 31 to 74 times, refer to the special diagram variation pattern determination table in FIG. To do.

  Further, when the main CPU 101a determines that the current state is the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state and the special symbol variation number is 75 to 84 times, refer to the special diagram variation pattern determination table of FIG. To do.

  In addition, when the main CPU 101a is currently in the high probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, or when winning a small win, the main CPU 101a refers to a predetermined special figure variation pattern determination table (not shown).

  The special symbol variation pattern determination table includes special symbol stop symbol data reflecting the result of the special symbol determination and the type of the special symbol display device that operates in the special symbol display (the start port related to the special symbol display), and the special symbol The number of holds (U1 or U2), the reach determination value for determining presence / absence of reach, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern are stored.

  When the special figure stop symbol data is “10H” to “17H”, or “20H”, “21H” (big hit, small hit), the main CPU 101a determines that the game ball is the first start port 6 or the second start port. The special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number acquired in response to entering the ball 7 is compared with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the special figure stop data. To decide.

  Alternatively, when the special figure stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H” (losing), the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure pending number (U1 or U2) related to the special figure variation pattern determination process. . The main CPU 101a obtains a random number for reach determination, compares it with the reach determination value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure hold number (U1 or U2), or the special figure variation pattern of “unreach without reach”, Alternatively, it is determined whether it is a special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach with reach”.

  Although the maximum number of “4” may be stored as the special figure hold number, when determining whether the special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach without reach” or the special figure fluctuation pattern of “Leach with reach” is determined. Does not refer to “4” as the number of reserved balls.

  When the main CPU 101a determines “unreach without reach”, the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “unreach without reach”. Then, the special figure variation pattern is determined.

  When the main CPU 101a determines “losing with reach”, the acquired random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern is collated with the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value (0 to 255) distributed according to the “losing with reach”. Then, the special figure variation pattern is determined.

  The main CPU 101a determines the special symbol variation pattern by special symbol variation pattern determination (step S313-3) at the time of starting the variation display of the special symbol (during the special symbol memory determination process in step S300).

  The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the determination result of the jackpot determination and the time required for the special symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “special figure fluctuation time”). Note that the special symbol variation pattern includes a first special symbol variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol first indicator 60 and a second special symbol first indicator 61. It is distinguished from the second special figure variation pattern which is a variation display mode of the second special symbol to be displayed.

  The main CPU 101 a generates a special symbol variation pattern designation command based on the determined special symbol variation pattern, and transmits the command to the effect control board 102.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is allocated at a predetermined ratio set in advance in each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, the special figure fluctuation pattern has an expected degree of reliability (reliability) and a specific jackpot (for example, The degree of expectation (reliability) to be won is associated with the first jackpot and the second jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102a of the effect control board 102 determines the contents of the effect based on the special figure variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 101, as will be described later. In addition, in the rightmost column of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the variation effect effect type determined by the sub CPU 102 a is described in association with the special diagram variation pattern designation command as a reference. ing.

  Here, as the effect contents, here, “symbol variation” means that a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 14.

  In addition, “reach” is a variation mode that gives a player a sense of expectation of jackpot, such that a part of the combination of special performance symbols that inform the jackpot is temporarily stopped and other special effects symbols fluctuate. Means. For example, when the combination of special effect symbols of “777” is set as a combination of special effect symbols for notifying the jackpot, the two special effect symbols are temporarily stopped at “7”, and the remaining special effect symbols are displayed. It means an aspect in which the production symbol is changing. The “temporary stop” refers to an aspect in which the special effect symbol is changed to the player because the special effect symbol is slightly shaken or deformed.

  In the effect types of variation effects shown in FIG. 9, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” are “lost” as the determination result of the jackpot determination without being in the reach mode after a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. It is a fluctuating effect that informs. The “symbol variation 1” is a “shortening variation” performed in a very short special symbol variation time of 4 seconds. The “symbol variation 2” and “symbol variation 3” are variation effects performed with special symbol variation times of 8 seconds and 12 seconds, respectively.

  In addition, the “normal reach” shown in FIG. 9 stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. It is a fluctuating effect that performs a reach effect.

  Further, “normal reach → story reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a fluctuating effect that is executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot. This “normal reach → story reach” is a normal reach that stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol with the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation that variably displays a plurality of special effect symbols. After that, story reach is performed as a reach production with a higher expectation of jackpot than normal reach. This story reach suggests that the decision result of the jackpot judgment is the third jackpot or the jackpot by going on a journey to find the dog that disappeared in the following challenge reach, and finding the dog at the end It is a reach production consisting of a story of the contents.

  Further, “symbol variation 2 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is the third big hit or the small hit. This “symbol variation 2 → challenge reach” stops the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special performance symbol after the “symbol variation 2” with the same numerical value (for example, 7), and also in the above story reach The character that appears appears to challenge a treasure hunt game in which a target item is searched from a plurality of treasure chests, and the character wins the item, suggesting that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a third jackpot or a jackpot The content is challenged.

  Further, “symbol variation 3 → challenge reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variation effect in which the challenge reach is performed after “symbol variation 3”.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach” shown in FIG. 9 indicates that the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. This is a fluctuating effect in which a normal reach for stop display is performed, and then a super reach with a higher expectation for jackpot than the normal reach is performed.

  In addition, “normal reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 indicates that the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbol are the same numerical value (for example, 7) after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. This is a fluctuating effect in which normal reach for stop display is performed, and then special reach with a higher expectation for jackpot than the above-described super reach is performed.

  In addition, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” shown in FIG. 9 is a variable effect in which a special reach is performed after a normal reach is performed after a normal reach is performed after a symbol change in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. is there.

As shown in FIG. 9, the special figure variation pattern designation command determined in the case of the first jackpot whose stop symbol data is “10H” is “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH” as can be seen from the special figure variation pattern determination values. ”And“ E6H0CH ”, the selection ratio increases. Similarly, the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command determined in the case of the second jackpot whose stop symbol data is “11H” is “E6H0DH”, “E6H0EH”, “E6H0FH” as can be seen from the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value. ", The selection ratio increases.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9, the special figure variation pattern designation command determined when the stop symbol data is “18H” is “E6H09H”, “E6H08H” as can be seen from the special figure variation pattern determination values. ”And“ E6H07H ”, the selection ratio decreases.

  As shown in FIG. 9, when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH” as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → super reach” of “variation presentation pattern A034” to “variation presentation pattern A037”. And “E6H0BH” is received as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “Normal reach → Special reach” of “Change effect pattern A038” to “Change effect pattern A041” is changed. When “E6H0CH” is received as the variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, “normal reach → super reach → special reach” of “variation presentation pattern A042” to “variation presentation pattern A045” is determined. Decided to run To.

Later, variation effects of “variation effect pattern A034”, “variation effect pattern A038”, and “variation effect pattern A042” will be described as variation effects of effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
When the expectation degree for the big hit of “variation effect pattern A034”, “variation effect pattern A038”, and “variation effect pattern A042” is described, as can be seen from the selection ratio of “E6H0AH”, “E6H0BH”, and “E6H0CH” described above. “Variation effect pattern A034” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0AH”, “Fluctuation effect of“ normal reach → special reach ”executed when the sub CPU 102a receives“ E6H0BH ” As the “pattern A038” and “variable effect pattern A042” of “normal reach → super reach” executed when the sub CPU 102a receives “E6H0CH”, it can be said that the degree of expectation for the jackpot increases.

  Further, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 10 selected in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state have special diagram variation times of 2 seconds, 6 seconds, and 10 seconds, respectively. These special symbol variation times are represented by “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. 9 selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, respectively. The special figure fluctuation time for execution is shorter than 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds. In addition, the selection ratio of the “special pattern variation pattern 30” for executing the “symbol variation 1” with the shortest special symbol variation time of 2 seconds is the special diagram variation time 4 shown in the variation pattern determination table of FIG. It is set higher than the selection ratio of “special pattern fluctuation pattern 00” for executing “symbol fluctuation 1” in seconds.

  In addition, “symbol variation → special character reach 1” to “symbol variation → special character reach 6” shown in FIG. 10 are special characters that appear only in mode B, which will be described later, after symbol variation in which a plurality of special effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner. This is a fluctuating production with special character reach. Details of this special character reach will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, in the effect types of variation effects shown in FIG. 11, “symbol variation 1” to “symbol variation 3” are variation effects in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed, and the variation effects corresponding to the special diagram variation time. The production time is different.

  In addition, “symbol variation → attack reach 1” to “symbol variation → attack reach 6” shown in FIG. 11 is an attack reach in which different characters attack each other after the symbol variation in which a plurality of special performance symbols are variably displayed. It is a fluctuating effect to perform. Details of this attack reach will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Further, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 does not have a special figure fluctuation pattern for executing an extremely short fluctuation effect such as a special figure fluctuation time of 2 seconds or 6 seconds. As shown in FIG. 12, "Janken production (losing 1)" to "Janken production (losing 6)", "Janken production (win 1)" to "Janken production (win 3)", "Janken production (Aiko 1)" ”To“ Janken production (Aiko 3) ”, after changing the symbol to display a plurality of special effect symbols, the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) of the special effect symbols are stopped and displayed with the same numerical value (for example, 7). This is a fluctuating effect in which a “jenken effect” is performed, in which two characters (a friend character and an opponent character) perform a junk.

“Janken production (losing 1)” to “Janken production (losing 6)” are fluctuating productions that are executed when the jackpot determination result is a loss. Further, “Janken production (win 1)” to “Janken production (win 3)” are fluctuating productions executed when the first jackpot or the second jackpot is determined as the determination result of the jackpot determination. “Janken production (Aiko 1)” to “Janken production (Aiko 3)” are fluctuating production executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is “third big hit” or “small hit”.
Details of this “Janken production” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71.

  A start opening prize designation command and a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The start opening winning designation command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the first pre-determination or the second pre-determination. The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponds to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure fluctuation pattern determination.

  The special symbol variation pattern designation command identifies a special symbol display device (the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61) on which the special symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination is performed. 1 byte of MODE data and 1 byte of DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern. Regarding the special figure variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “E6H”, it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol first display 60, and if the MODE data is “E7H”. The second special symbol first display 61 indicates that the special symbol is changed and displayed.

  The special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is “E6H” is called “first special figure fluctuation pattern designation command”, and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command whose MODE data is “E7H” is “second”. This is called a “special pattern variation pattern designation command”.

  The start opening winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the type of the start opening and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure variation pattern. Regarding the start opening prize designation command, if the MODE data is “E1H”, it indicates that a game ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is “E2H”, the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that a game ball has entered. It should be noted that the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E1H” is “first start opening prize designation command”, and the start opening prize designation command with MODE data “E2H” is “second start opening prize designation command”. "

  FIG. 13A to FIG. 13F show an example of a table used when controlling a normal symbol game based on winning to the first winning gate 9 or the second winning gate 10.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit determination table. The hit determination is to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that involves opening the second start port 7. As will be described later, the winning determination is performed based on a winning determination random number acquired based on the passing of the winning gates 9 and 10 of the game ball.

  The hit determination table is divided according to the start opening winning easiness. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table referred to in the non-short-time gaming state and a hit determination table referred to in the time-short gaming state.

  In each hit determination table, the hit determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. By collating the acquired hit determination random number with the hit determination table, either “win” or “lost” is determined. When “winning” is won, an auxiliary game with the opening of the second start port 7 is executed.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of the normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol determination is to determine a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62. The normal symbol determination table is divided according to the result of winning determination (winning and losing).

  Each normal symbol determination table stores a normal symbol determination value and a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed in a uniquely associated manner. As will be described later, the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined by comparing the normal symbol determination random number acquired when the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal symbol determination table. As the normal symbol identification information to be stopped and displayed, the normal symbol stop symbol data and the normal effect symbol designation command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control board 101, and the normal effect symbol designating command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  FIG. 13C determines a variation pattern of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation pattern”) associated with a time required to display a variation of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as a “normal diagram variation time”). It is a figure which shows the common figure fluctuation pattern determination table for this. The common figure variation pattern determination table is composed of a common figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the non-short-time gaming state and a common figure variation pattern determination table that is referred to in the short-time gaming state.

  In each table, a common pattern variation pattern determination value and one or a plurality of common map variation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the normal variation pattern is determined by comparing the random number for determining the normal variation pattern acquired when the game ball passes the winning gates 9 and 10 with the normal variation variation determination table. The

  A command change pattern designation command is set corresponding to the command map change pattern. It is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the normal pattern variation pattern is determined. When the production control board 102 receives the normal symbol variation pattern designation command, the normal symbol variation display is started from now on, and the determination result of the normal symbol determination relating to the variation display of the ordinary symbol is recognized. it can.

  The usual pattern change pattern designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the gaming state related to the current start opening winning ease, and 1-byte DATA data for identifying the usual figure change pattern. Yes. With respect to the usual variation pattern designation command, if the MODE data is “D6H”, it represents a non-short-time gaming state, and if the MODE data is “D7H”, it represents a time-short gaming state.

  FIG. 13D is a diagram illustrating an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table. This table stores data (auxiliary game reference data) that is referred to when performing an auxiliary game. As shown in FIG. 13 (d), in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current start opening winning ease and the normal stop symbol data is associated with the auxiliary game reference data. That is, the auxiliary game reference data includes information regarding the start opening winning easiness state and the result of the normal symbol determination when the normal symbol determination is performed.

  FIG. 13E is a diagram illustrating an example of an auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game.

  The auxiliary game control table stores conditions for controlling the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the auxiliary game, an opening time, which is a period from when the auxiliary game is started to when the second opening 7 is first opened, and transmission to the effect control board 102 at the start of the opening. Opening designation command, type of table used to control opening / closing of the second starting port 7, ending time, which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second starting port 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, And the ending designation | designated command transmitted to the production | presentation control board 102 at the time of ending start is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with auxiliary game reference data.

  FIG. 13F is a diagram illustrating an example of a second start port opening / closing control table for auxiliary games used when controlling the opening / closing of the second start port 7. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start port 7 during the auxiliary game are stored in the second start port opening / closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 7, a general electric operation number (D) which is an opening number (operation of the second starting port control device 70) number of the second starting port 7 in the auxiliary game, 2 Opening time and closing time (operation time, non-operation time) of the start port 7 are set.

(Explanation of special game types)
Here, the special game will be described. In the present embodiment, the special game involving the opening of the big winning opening 8 (the operation of the big winning opening control device 80) is “big hit game” and “small hit” which are executed when “big hit” is won. It is composed of “small hit game” that is executed when winning. The jackpot game is divided into a “first jackpot game”, a “second jackpot game”, and a “third jackpot game” mainly depending on the opening / closing mode of the jackpot 8.

  In the jackpot game, a round game involving one or more opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times that the special winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of times of opening) and the total time that can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are set in advance. The reason that “can be opened” is that the number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, 9). Therefore, even if the grand prize winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times of opening, the big winning prize opening 8 may be closed and the round game may end. Even if the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the special winning opening 8 is closed and the round game may end. It should be noted that the maximum number of times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified for each jackpot game.

(Description of game conditions)
Next, game conditions that are conditions when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, jackpot winning probabilities and start port winning easiness are set as game conditions. As for the jackpot winning probability, the game progresses under the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, and the game ball progresses under the short-time gaming state or the non-short-time gaming state with respect to the ease of winning the game opening. To do. The initial (power-on) gaming conditions are set to a low probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, and this low probability gaming state and a non-time-short gaming state are referred to as a normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the low probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set to be disadvantageous to the player at 1/350. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state is that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low probability gaming state, that is, set to 1/80 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is in a high probability gaming state, winning a jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of winning jackpots per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous to the player. It can be said that it is a state.

  The non-time-saving gaming state is a state in which the start opening winning easiness is normal. Specifically, in the non-short-time gaming state, the time required for the normal symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as the normal figure change time) is set to 15 seconds, and is activated when “winning” is won in the hit determination. 2 The total operation time of the starting port control device 70 (opening time of the second starting port 7) is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning in the hit determination for the normal symbol is 1 / It is set to 50. Note that the “total opening time” is that the second starting port 7 may be opened multiple times per win, and a game ball can be won per win. This is because the number is limited, and when a game ball is won, it closes without waiting for the opening time.

  On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 7 per unit time (the operating time of the second starting port control device 70) is longer than in the non-short-time gaming state, and the second starting port 7 Is a gaming state that tends to be open. Due to the relatively high start opening prize ease, the number of times the second special symbol determination can be performed per unit time increases. Under the same jackpot winning probability, the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time inevitably increases the number of winning jackpots per unit time. It can be said that this is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the gaming state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the short-time gaming state, the normal variation time is set to 3.0 seconds, the total maximum opening time of the second start port 7 is set to 5.2 seconds, The probability of winning is set to 1/5. That is, all the components of the start opening winning ease are set to be more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving gaming state. In the short-time gaming state, the second start port 7 is opened twice via a 1.0 second closure (interval). However, there is no such closure, and it may be opened only once. Moreover, the closure may be provided a plurality of times.

  In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the start openings 6 and 7, three prize balls can be obtained, but the player fires the game ball by operating the appropriate launch handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player tends to decrease. However, in the short-time gaming state, since it is easier to enter the second starting port 7 than in the non-short-time gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of game balls possessed by the player, the short-time game state is set to be more advantageous for the player than the non-short-time game state.

  In this way, the jackpot game type (first to third jackpot games) and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game (low probability game state or high probability game state, non-short game state, by winning the jackpot Or a combination with the short-time gaming state). In view of this, the substantial jackpot type (the jackpot type based on the profits enjoyed by the player) includes the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game conditions newly set after the jackpot game ends ( It can be said that it is a combination with (gaming state). Therefore, hereinafter, apart from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game derived by the jackpot and the game conditions after the jackpot game, that is, based on the type of profit that the player enjoys The jackpot type can be classified.

  By winning the jackpot, the jackpot game with the number of rounds of 16R (round) is executed (first jackpot game), and then set to the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state is called "first jackpot" By winning, a jackpot game with a round number of 4R (round) ("second jackpot game") is executed, and then a jackpot that is set to a high-probability game state and a short-time game state is called "second jackpot" A jackpot game in which a jackpot game with a round number of 2R (round) ("third jackpot game") is executed and then set to a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state is referred to as a "third jackpot".

  If the jackpot is won, the normal game state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state are entered. On the other hand, even if winning a small win, the game conditions do not change. That is, the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is during the small hit game and after the small hit game.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads a startup program from the main ROM 101b and initializes each storage area of the main RAM 101c in response to power-on. The main CPU 101a transmits an initialization designation command indicating that this initialization processing has been performed to the effect control board 102 in step S700 described later.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the reach determination random number and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including an initial value random number for jackpot determination, an initial value random number for special symbol determination, an initial value random number for hit determination, and the like. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The following timer interrupt processing is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a to the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special game variable counter update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an open / close time update process for the special winning opening 8, and the like. And the time control process which updates the auxiliary | assistant game timer counter which performs the update process of the change time of a normal symbol, the update process of the stop time of a normal symbol, the update process of the opening / closing time of the 2nd start port 7, etc. is performed.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number including a jackpot determining random number, a special symbol determining random number, and a winning determining random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process for updating the jackpot determining initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the winning determination initial value random number.

  For updating various random numbers, the random number is updated by adding “1” to a random number counter provided for each type of random number. Various random numbers have a random number range. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. In the update of the random number, when the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is reset to “0” without adding “1”, and each random number value is newly updated from the initial random number at that time. Update to

  In step S200, the main CPU 101a performs input control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process for determining whether or not a new valid signal is transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a, the first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first display 61, the first special symbol hold first display 63, the second special symbol hold first display 64, Also, a special symbol special electric control process (special symbol system processing) for controlling the special winning a prize opening control device 80 (control of the special symbol system device) is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a controls the normal symbol first display 62, the normal symbol holding first indicator 65, and the second starting port control device 70 (control of the normal symbol system device). Control processing (normal symbol processing) is performed.

  The main CPU 101a loads the value of the general-purpose power transmission processing data in the normal-time normal power control processing (ordinary symbol system processing) and refers to the branch address from the loaded general-purpose power transmission processing data. If the processing data = 0, the normal symbol determination as to whether or not the auxiliary game is to be executed (the second start port 7 is opened) based on the general symbol determination information acquired based on the winning to the winning gates 9 and 10 is performed. Normal symbol memory determination processing including normal symbol normal power processing data = 1, if normal symbol first display 62 is fluctuating based on the normal symbol determination, normal symbol variation processing is performed, If the normal signal normal power processing data = 2, the normal symbol first display 62 is stopped when the normal symbol first display 62 is stopped. Auxiliary for opening / closing control (operation of the second starting port control device 70) Perform the technique processing.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the winning ball counters corresponding to the starting port (the first starting port 6 and the second starting port 7), the big winning port 8 and the general winning port 11 have exceeded “0”. If it exceeds “0”, a prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 103. When a prize ball signal is transmitted, an update process for subtracting “1” from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a, external signal output control data for outputting information related to the game as an external signal to an external device such as the game information display device 700, the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B, and the big prize opening / closing solenoid Drive control data for driving 80B (starting opening / closing solenoid driving data and winning prize opening / closing solenoid driving data), first special symbol first display 60, second special symbol first display 61 and first Display control data for displaying a predetermined symbol on the special symbol hold first display 63 or the second special symbol hold first display 64 (special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol hold display data, normal symbol Data creation processing of (hold display data) is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this process, first, a port output process for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and the drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, to turn on the LEDs of the first special symbol first indicator 60, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63, and the second special symbol hold second indicator 64. In addition, a display device output process for outputting a signal based on the display control data created in step S600 is performed. Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening 11. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the general winning opening detection sensor 11a, the main CPU 101a updates the general winning opening prize ball counter used for winning balls by adding predetermined data.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 8a has been inputted, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening 8. When the main CPU 101a has not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the special winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates it, and wins the big winning opening 8. The counter value of the round winning counter (C) for counting the played game balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a has been input, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 6. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the second start port 7. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the detection signals from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a are input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed the winning gate 10. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first start port detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the process ends. If there is a valid detection signal, the start opening prize counter is updated by adding “1” in step S232, and the first start opening entering the main RAM 101c is updated. The first start port winning flag is turned ON in the flag storage area.

  In step S233, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter for counting the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not less than 4, the main CPU 101a terminates the processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4, the first special figure hold in step S234. The counter value of the number counter is updated by adding “1”. In step S234, the main CPU 101a updates the first special symbol hold number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol hold first display 63 to display the special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S235, the main CPU 101a receives the special determination information including the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random number counter as the first special information. Store in the symbol hold storage area.

  The first special symbol reserved storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a performs the first preliminary determination based on the game ball entering the first start port 6. Here, the first preliminary determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the first prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage area, The first special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the first special figure fluctuation pattern as the first pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (S313).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the first special figure variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the second start port detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second start port detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process.

  In step S242, the main CPU 101a updates the start opening prize ball counter by adding “1”, updates the second start opening entrance ball regulation counter by adding “1”, and also updates the second start opening of the main RAM 101c. The second starting entrance ball flag is turned ON in the winning flag storage area. The second starting entrance counting rule counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting entrance 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the second starting port 7 for a single auxiliary game is limited.

  In step S243, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol reservation number counter for counting the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second special figure reservation number (U2) is smaller than 4, the process proceeds to step S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special figure pending number counter and updates it. In step S244, the main CPU 101a updates the second special symbol hold number (U2) displayed on the second special symbol hold first display 64 to display special symbol hold display data indicating the hold number. It is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S245, the main CPU 101a receives the special determination information including the random number values indicated by the jackpot determination random number counter, the special symbol determination random number counter, the reach determination random number counter, and the special pattern variation pattern determination random number counter as the second special information. Store in the symbol hold storage area.

  Note that the second special symbol storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14A), and various random numbers are numbered in a storage unit in which random numbers are not stored. The data are stored in order starting from the smallest storage unit. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14B).

  And main CPU101a performs the 2nd prior determination based on the entrance into the 2nd starting port 7 in step S246. Here, the second prior determination will be described.

  Specifically, in the second prior determination, based on the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage area, A second special figure variation pattern is determined. That is, the main CPU 101a determines the second special figure fluctuation pattern as the second pre-determination before performing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313).

  In step S247, the main CPU 101a sets the second start opening winning designation command corresponding to the second special figure variation pattern determined in the second pre-determination in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. .

  Next, the winning gate detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensors 9a and 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is a valid detection signal, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S252.

  In step S252, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter for counting the number of normal symbol holdings (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S253.

  In step S 253, the main CPU 101 a adds “1” to the counter value (G) of the usual figure holding number counter and updates it. Further, in step S253, the main CPU 101a updates the normal symbol hold number (G) displayed on the normal symbol hold first display 65 in order to update the normal symbol hold display data indicating the hold number in the main RAM 101c. Set to area.

  In step S254, the main CPU 101a stores the random numbers indicated by the hit determination random number counter, the normal symbol determination random number counter, and the normal variation pattern determination random number counter in the normal symbol holding storage area, and performs the winning gate detection signal input process. Exit.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 14C), and various random numbers are stored in a storage unit having a small number among storage units in which no random number is stored. It is memorized in order. Each storage unit is divided into regions for each stored random number (see FIG. 14D).

  Next, the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special electricity processing data is loaded, and the branch address is referred to from the special figure special electric treatment data loaded in step S302. If special figure special electric treatment data = 0, the special symbol memory determination process (step S310). If the special symbol special power processing data = 1, the processing shifts to the special symbol variation processing (step S320). If the special symbol special power processing data = 2, the processing shifts to the special symbol stop processing (step S330). If special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process shifts to jackpot game processing (step S340), and if special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process moves to small hit game processing (step S350). If data = 5, the process goes to the jackpot game end process (step S360). Details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the special symbol memory determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is in progress, the main CPU 101a ends the process. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol variation display is not in progress, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S310-2.

  In step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special figure holding number (U2) is 1 or more. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4. If it is determined that the second special figure hold number (U2) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-3. Move processing.

  In step S310-3, the main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the second special symbol hold count counter by subtracting “1”, and in step S310-6, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted. Processing is performed, and each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the data stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. The data stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol common storage area (the 0th storage unit) common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The data stored in the 0 storage unit is deleted. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more. If the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special figure hold number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S310-5.

  The main CPU 101a updates the counter value of the first special symbol reservation number counter by subtracting “1” in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. I do.

  For example, data stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the data stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol holding storage area is shifted to the special symbol storage area (the 0th storage unit), and the data stored in the 0th storage unit is erased. Is done. Thereby, the jackpot determination random number value, the special symbol determination random number value, the reach determination random number, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted. Furthermore, the stop symbol data and game condition data used in the previous game are also erased from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the 1st special figure reservation number (U1) or the 2nd special figure reservation number (U2) with the data shift process (the suspension digestion process) in step S310-6, specifically, Sets the first and second special symbol hold display data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of the start port related to the data. The hold display data includes information on the type of the special symbol hold display device and information on the special symbol hold number (U1 or U2).

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol reserved storage area is shifted in priority to the first special symbol reserved storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-6. The first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted in the order of entering, or the first special symbol reserved storage area is shifted with priority over the second special symbol reserved storage area. You may let them.

  In Step S310-4, when it is determined that the first special symbol hold number (U1) is not 1 or more, the processing is shifted to the customer waiting state setting processing in Step S319-1 to Step S319-3. First, in step S319-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. When the demonstration determination flag “01H” is set in the demonstration determination flag storage area, the special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and when the demonstration determination flag “01H” is not set in the demonstration determination flag storage area. The process moves to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the demo determination flag “01H” in the demo determination flag storage area so that the demo designation command is not set many times in step S319-3 described later.

  In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a demonstration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol memory determination process.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes jackpot determination processing based on the data shifted in step S310-6 and newly stored in the 0th storage unit.

  Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the jackpot determination process is performed based on a game ball entering the first start port 6.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is the first start port 6, the first special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-2. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101a determines that it is not the first start port 6 (is the second start port 7) in step S311-1, the second special symbol jackpot determination table is selected in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, the fact that the flag is turned on in the high-probability flag storage area means that the current jackpot winning probability is a high-probability gaming state.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects “from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3”. The “first high probability jackpot determination table” or the “second high probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the “first low probability” is further selected from the table selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. “Big jackpot determination table” or “Second low probability jackpot determination table” is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a shifts the jackpot determination random number in the 0th storage unit after being shifted in step S310-6 to the “high probability jackpot selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6”. It is compared with the “decision table” or the “low-probability jackpot determination table” to determine whether it is “big jackpot”, “small jackpot”, or “losing”, and the jackpot determination process ends.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process.

Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “jackpot”. If it is determined that the game is a “hit”, the main CPU 101a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a jackpot in step S312-3. The process is moved to 2.

  In step S312-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is “small jackpot”. If it is determined that the “small hit” is determined, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-4. If the main CPU 101a does not determine “small hit”, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S312-5.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (the first start port 6 or the second start port 7), and the above step. The special symbol determination random number value shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for winning the jackpot (FIG. 5 (a)). The special symbol to be determined is determined.

  In step S312-4, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the process based on the flag turned on in the start port prize flag storage area (first start port 6), and is shifted in step S310-6. The special symbol for determining the small hit special symbol by comparing the random number for determining the special symbol in the 0th storage unit with the special symbol determination value in the special symbol determination table for winning a small bonus (FIG. 5B). Make a decision.

  In step S312-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the start port related to the processing based on the flag turned on in the start port winning flag storage area (first start port 6 or second start port 7), and the above step. The special symbol determination random number value shifted in S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit is compared with the special symbol determination value of the special symbol determination table for loss (FIG. 5B) to determine the special symbol for loss. Perform special symbol determination.

  In step S312-6, a special effect symbol designating command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in steps S312-3, S312-4, and S312-5, and the determined special effect symbol designating command is effected. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  Next, in step S312-7, the main CPU 101a determines stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol stop” based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-3, step S312-4, and step S312-5. In other words, the special symbol type is determined, and the determined special symbol stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  As will be described later, when the special figure change pattern is determined in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process of FIG. When determining “special symbol” or the like, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game process of FIG. 28 or the small hit game process of FIG.

  In step S312-8, the main CPU 101a compares the special figure stop symbol data with the game condition data determination table, sets the game condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a confirms the high probability flag storage area, and selects a game condition data determination table corresponding to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special condition stop symbol data is collated with the selected game condition data determination table to determine the game condition data and store it in the game condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  When the special symbol determination process is completed as described above, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 22, and performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination, and the result of the reach determination, the time required for the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol variation time”) and A special-figure variation pattern including information related to an effect type or the like of a variation effect described later is determined.

Next, the special figure variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to ON / OFF of the high probability flag and ON / OFF of the short time flag in the game condition determination table of FIG. Gaming state or low-probability gaming state, short-time gaming state or non-short-time gaming state).

  In step S313-2, if the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S313-3, and other than the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. If it is a gaming state, the process proceeds to step S313-4.

  In step S313-3, in the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main CPU 101a changes the number of times of the variation display of the special symbol to be started (from 1 to 30 times, from 31 times to 74 times, from 75 times to 84 times). Confirm).

  In step S313-4, the main CPU 101a determines that the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 or the gaming state confirmed in step S313-1 is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state (in step S313-2). YES), the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is selected according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation display confirmed in step S313-3.

  In step S313-5, the main CPU 101a confirms the special figure stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c.

  In addition, when the special symbol stop symbol data is “18H” or “28H”, that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is “losing”, the main CPU 101a further performs the special symbol related to the special symbol variation pattern determination process. Check the number of holds (U1 or U2). Then, the main CPU 101a acquires the reach determination random number, compares it with the reach determination random number value (0 to 99) corresponding to the confirmed special figure hold number (U1 or U2), and the special chart of “no reach loss”. It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern or a special figure fluctuation pattern of “losing with reach”.

  In step S313-6, the main CPU 101a performs special figure variation pattern determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a acquires a special figure variation pattern determination random number, and acquires the acquired special figure variation pattern determination random number and a determination value (0 to 255) stored in the special diagram variation pattern determination table. Collate and determine the special figure fluctuation pattern.

When the special CPU variation pattern is determined, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG. 22, and in step S310-7, a special graphic variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special graphic variation pattern is transmitted for production in the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.
The special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 102. Upon receiving this command, the production control board 102 recognizes that the special symbol fluctuation display starts, and finally designates the special figure fluctuation pattern designation. Based on the command, the variation effect pattern associated with the content of the variation effect is determined.

  In step S310-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the gaming condition at the start of the variable symbol display of the special symbol, and sets a gaming state designation command reflecting the state in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. .

  In step S310-9, the main CPU 101a sets the special figure change time (see FIGS. 9 to 12) associated with the special figure change pattern in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-10, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data for performing variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of the special symbol display device to be operated, the variation display mode, and the variation time.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets the flag “00H” in the demonstration determination flag storage area, that is, clears the demonstration determination flag storage area, and sets special figure special electric processing data = 1 in step S310-12. Then, the special symbol memory determination process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display in step S310-9 ends, in other words, whether or not the set special symbol variation time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the special symbol variation display does not end, the special symbol variation processing is terminated, and the next subroutine is executed.

  If the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in step S320-2, the main CPU 101a produces a special effect symbol stop designation command to notify the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated. Set in the transmission data storage area.

  In step S320-3, the main CPU 101a displays the special symbol set in step S312-13 to stop and display the special symbol on the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61. The special figure stop display data is set based on the stop symbol data. Thereby, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified to the player.

  In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the special symbol stop display (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S320-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the special figure special electricity processing data.

  In step S320-6, the main CPU 101a turns off the first starting port winning flag or the second starting port winning flag, and ends the special symbol variation process.

Next, the special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S330-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special symbol stop display ends, in other words, whether or not the special figure stop time set in the special game timer counter in step S320-4 has elapsed ( Special game timer counter = 0?). As a result, if the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display does not end, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol stop processing. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol stop display ends, the process proceeds to step S330-2. Move processing.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the hourly flag storage area. The fact that the flag is ON in the time-short flag storage area means that the current state is the time-short game state. If the flag is turned on in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the flag is turned off in the time reduction flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-3, the main CPU 101a calculates “1” from the counter value of the remaining number counter in the short time gaming state indicating the remaining number of times the special symbol change display according to the short time gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of short time gaming states”). The operation value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "is stored as the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the remaining time-saving gaming state count (J) = 0. If the remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-5. If the remaining time-short gaming state remaining number (J) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-6.

  In step S330-5, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the time reduction flag storage area. It should be noted that the fact that the short time gaming state remaining number (J) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times (Ja) in the short time gaming state. Means to end.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. The fact that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that the current state is a high probability gaming state. If the flag is ON in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7. If the flag is OFF in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a displays the counter value of the high-probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number of times of display of the special symbol variation display due to the high-probability gaming state (X: hereinafter referred to as “the remaining number of high-probability gaming states”). The operation value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from the value is stored as a new high probability gaming state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the process proceeds to step S330-9. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S330-10.

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a turns off the flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. Note that the high probability gaming state remaining count (X) is “0” means that the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state, and the special symbol based on the “high probability” state. This means that the fluctuation display of is finished.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming condition, and sets a gaming state designation command indicating the gaming state in the effect transmission data storage area.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol stop process is “jackpot”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). To do. If it is determined that the jackpot special symbol is determined, the process proceeds to step S330-14. If the jackpot special symbol is not determined, the process proceeds to step S330-12.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol stop process is “small hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the small hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 16 to 17). Here, when it is determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-17, and when it is not determined that the symbol is a small hit special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-13.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the special symbol special electric processing data, and shifts the processing to the special symbol memory determination processing shown in FIG.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special electricity processing data.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a resets the game condition flag storage area (time-short flag storage area and high-probability flag storage area), the remaining variation count counter for the high-probability gaming state, and the remaining variation count counter for the time-short gaming state. To do.

  In step S330-16, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special figure special electricity processing data, and moves the process to step S330-16.

Next, the jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently opening. The term “opening” as used herein refers to a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the current opening is being performed, the process proceeds to step S340-2. If it is determined that the current opening is not currently performed, the process proceeds to S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and if the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the set opening time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, the next subroutine is executed, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. .

  In step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, which jackpot is confirmed, a jackpot opening / closing control table corresponding to the jackpot type is selected and set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Specifically, the long winning game winning prize opening / closing control table or the short winning game winning prize opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in accordance with the special figure stop symbol data. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the value. Since the round game has not been executed at the time of step S340-3, the main CPU 101a stores “1” in the round game count storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special prize opening process. Specifically, “1” is added to the value stored in the special electric operation number storage area (special electric operation number (K)) and stored. The main CPU 101a sets the big prize opening / closing solenoid energization start data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c in order to energize the big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B and open the big prize opening 8. Here, the main CPU 101a refers to the special winning opening / closing control table determined in step S340-3, and based on the round number (R) and the special operation number (K), the opening time of the special winning opening 8 ( The operating time of the big prize opening control device 80) is set in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs a round designation command transmission determination process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area. This is because information indicating that the round game starts is transmitted to the effect control board 102. For example, at the time of the first release of the first round game per long game, “1” is set in the round game number storage area and “1” is set in the special operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the special operation number storage area, the big hit game process is terminated without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case where K = 1 means the start of a round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, an effect display is performed on the image display device 14 such as “ROUND1”.

  In step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here refers to the period from the end of all preset round games (after the final opening of the big winning opening 8 is completed) to the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, where it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not currently in progress, step S340-7 is performed. Move processing to.

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the big prize opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the big prize opening control device 80 is in operation. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is being opened, it determines in step S340-8 whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the big prize opening 8 is satisfied. To do. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, 9) in the round game, or the maximum open time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0) ) Is adopted. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S340-9. If it is determined that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the special winning opening closing process, the energization stop data of the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the opening / closing of the special winning opening determined in step S340-3 is performed. Referring to the control table, based on the current round number (R) and special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special electric operation number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9) ) Is terminated on the condition that it has been reached, it is determined whether or not such a condition is satisfied. If it is determined that one round game has been completed, the process proceeds to step S340-12. If it is determined that one round has not been completed, the jackpot game process is ended.

  In step S340-7, if the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning openings 8 and 9 are not open, the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-11 whether or not a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, if the closing time has not elapsed, the jackpot game process is terminated, and if the closing time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-4.

  In step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special electricity operation number storage area is cleared and the counter value of the round winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the value (round number (R)) stored in the round game number storage area is the number of round games executed in the jackpot game. When determining “Yes”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-15, and when determining “No”, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a adds "1" to the current round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area and stores the result.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  In step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special figure stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and an ending designation command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the effect transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time corresponding to the type of jackpot in the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S340-18 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that it is not, the jackpot game process is terminated as it is.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 5 to the special figure special electric processing data, and moves the processing to the jackpot game end process shown in FIG.

  Next, the small hit game processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently open. If it is determined that it is currently opening, the process proceeds to step S350-2. If it is determined that it is not currently opening, the process proceeds to S350-5.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter = 0, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, if the opening time has not elapsed, the small hit game process is terminated, and if the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S350-3.

  In step S350-3, the main CPU 101a performs a small hit game start process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a selects a big winning opening opening / closing control table corresponding to the type of the small hit based on the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the big winning opening opening / closing control table for the small hit game.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening opening process. In the big prize opening process, first, “1” is added to the value stored in the special operation number storage area (special operation number (K)) and stored. Then, energization start data of the special prize opening / closing solenoid 80B is set in order to open the special prize opening 8, and the current special electric operation is performed with reference to the special prize opening / closing control table determined in step S350-3. The opening time of the special winning opening 8 based on the number (K) is set in the special game timer counter, and the small hit game is ended.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is currently ending. Ending here means the period from the end of opening of the last big winning opening 8 to the end of the small hit game. Therefore, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-13 when it is determined that it is currently ending, and moves to step S350-6 when it is determined that it is not currently ending.

  In step S350-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is being opened. If the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is not open, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-10, and if the main CPU 101a determines that the big prize opening 8 is open, in step S350-7. Then, it is determined whether or not an “opening end condition” for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. As the “opening end condition”, the counter value (C) of the round winning counter has reached a specified number (for example, nine), or the opening time of one time of the big winning opening 8 has passed (special game timer counter = 0) is adopted. If the main CPU 101a determines that the “opening end condition” is satisfied, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-8, and if it determines that the “opening end condition” is not satisfied, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process. To do.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. In the big prize opening closing process, the energization stop data of the big prize opening / closing solenoid 80B is set to close the big prize opening 8, and the big prize opening / closing control table determined in step S350-3 is referred to. Based on the current special operation number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set in the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  In step S350-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the small hit game ending condition is satisfied. The small hit game ending condition is that the special winning action number (K) is set to the number of times the special winning opening 8 is set in advance, or the counter value (C) of the round winning counter is a specified number (for example, 9). It has been reached. When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S350-11. When the main CPU 101a determines that the small hit game end condition is not satisfied, the main hit game process. Exit.

  In step S350-11, the main CPU 101a sets “0” to the special operation number storage area and sets “0” to the counter value (C) of the round winning counter as the small hit game ending process. That is, the special operation number storage area and the round winning counter are cleared.

  In step S350-12, the main CPU 101a sets an ending designation command according to the type of small hits in the effect transmission data storage area based on the special figure stop symbol data, and the ending time according to the type of small hits. Is set in the special game timer counter.

  In step S350-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the closing time set in step S350-8 has elapsed. Note that the closing time is also determined by whether or not the special game timer counter = 0 as in the opening time. As a result, when the main CPU 101a determines that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the small hit game process, and when it determines that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a moves the process to step S350-4. .

  In step S350-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a proceeds to step S350-14 and passes the ending time. If it is determined that the game is not done, the small hit game process is terminated.

  In step S350-14, the main CPU 101a sets “0” in the special figure special electricity processing data.

Next, the jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG.
First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S360-2, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not to turn on the high probability flag in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-4. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is ON, in step S360-3, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. (01H) is turned ON, and the executable number (Ja) (100 times in this embodiment) is set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-4, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded game condition data against the game condition determination table, and determines whether or not the time flag is turned on in the time flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is not turned ON, the process proceeds to step S360-6. If the main CPU 101a determines that the time reduction flag is turned ON, the time reduction flag (01H) is set in the time reduction flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S360-5. At the same time, the number of executable times (Ja) (100 times in the present embodiment) is set in the time-saving gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S360-6, the main CPU 101a confirms the current game condition state, sets a game state designation command indicating the current game condition state in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S360-7 0 is set in the figure special electricity processing data, and the process proceeds to the special symbol memory determination process shown in FIG.

(Main processing by production control board)
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 102a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

  First, the main process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. When power is supplied from the power supply board 107 to the sub CPU 102a, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a, and the sub CPU 102a performs the following main processing.

  In step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs initialization processing. In this process, the sub CPU 102a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 102b and initializes the sub RAM 102c in which flags, commands, and the like are stored.

  In step S <b> 1002, the sub CPU 102 a performs a process of updating the effect random number used for controlling the effect including the random effect determination random number, the variable effect pattern determination random number, the effect mode determination random number, and the like.

  Note that a random number counter is provided in the sub-RAM 102c for each of various random numbers constituting the production random number. In the effect random number update process, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the production random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value determined for the random number. Then, in the update of the random number, when the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counter related to the production random number from being completely synchronized, different initial value random numbers are provided to the various production random numbers instead of making the maximum values of the various random number ranges different, When updating the random number, if the random value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value in the random number range, each random value may be newly updated from the initial random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing by production control board)
The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the effect control board 102.

  In this timer interrupt process, in step S1100, the sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 102a to the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing for updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs a command analysis process for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details of this command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the effect control board 102, the sub CPU 102a performs a reception interrupt process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, processing for analyzing the received command is performed in step S1300.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect input control process. Details of the effect input control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing by production control board)
A command analysis process performed by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command and determines whether the command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis processing. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a demo designation command, it moves the process to step S1303. If it determines that the command is not a demo designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a turns on the demonstration effect standby flag in the demonstration effect standby flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c as a pre-process for executing the demonstration effect, and waits for the demonstration effect to start (demo effect standby). Time) is set in the demonstration effect timer counter, and the command analysis process is terminated.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a start slot winning designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1305, and if it determines that the command is not a starting opening winning designation command, it moves the process to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a performs start opening prize designation command storage processing. The sub CPU 102a stores the start opening prize designation command in an effect information storage area (not shown) of the sub RAM 102c in the starting opening prize designation command storage process.

  The effect information storage area is provided for each type of start opening (first effect information storage area and second effect information storage area). The sub CPU 102a analyzes the received start opening winning designation command, confirms the type of the starting opening (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) related to the start opening winning designation command, and the type of the starting opening. Is stored in the effect information storage area corresponding to the.

  Each effect information storage area has the same configuration as the special symbol storage area of the main RAM 101c, and is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit for each type of the start ports 6 and 7. The start opening winning designation command is sequentially stored from the storage unit having the smallest number in the storage unit in which the starting opening winning designation command is not stored.

  Each storage unit stores a start opening prize designation command section that stores a starting opening prize designation command, and effect data for effects performed based on the start opening prize designation command stored in the starting opening prize designation command section. And an effect data storage unit.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1307, and if it determines that there is no gaming state designation command, it moves the process to step S1308.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a sets the data indicating the gaming state indicated by the received gaming state designation command in the gaming state storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the command analysis processing.

  In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect designating command, the process proceeds to step S1309. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect designating command, the process proceeds to step S1310.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a configures the special symbol lottery effect, and is performed when the special symbol stop display is being performed, and for performing the special effect symbol stop display indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. A special effect symbol pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. In the special effect design pattern determination process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the special effect design designation command and displays the special effect in the display area 140 of the image display device 14 based on the information included in the received special effect design designation command. An arrangement (combination) of decorative symbols arranged on a predetermined effective line in the stop display of symbols, that is, special effect symbols is determined.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1311. If it determines that there is no special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1312. .

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a constitutes a special symbol lottery effect, and is performed when the special symbol variation display is performed, and the variable effect suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery (the special effect symbol variation display). The variable effect pattern determination process for determining the variable effect pattern is performed, and the command analysis process is terminated. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1313 and step S1314. If the sub CPU 102a determines that there is no special effect symbol stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1315. Move processing.

  In step S1313, the sub CPU 102a sets a special effect symbol stop control command indicating that the special effect symbol is to be stopped and displayed in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The special effect symbol stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. Upon receiving the special effect symbol stop control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize that the variation effect ends, and terminate the variation effect and display the special effect symbol stop display. . Note that the end time of the production is not limited to this, and may be a specific timing related to a preset event on the production during the variation production.

  In S1313, the sub CPU 102a clears the data for presentation stored in the sub RAM 102c described later.

  In step S <b> 1314, the sub CPU 102 a performs an effect mode setting process for setting the effect mode in response to the end of the special symbol variation display, and ends the command analysis process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the effect mode is a variation effect classification mode (category) performed by an effect device such as the image display device 14 in response to a special symbol lottery (or a special symbol variable display). It is related to the state of the game condition and the like.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an opening designation command related to a special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1316, and if it determines that there is no special game opening designation command, it moves the process to step S1317.

  In step S1316, the sub CPU 102a performs a special game effect pattern determination process for determining a special game effect pattern that is an aspect of the special game effect that is an effect related to the special game, and ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, it moves the process to step S1318. If it determines that there is no round designation command, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1319.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern that is a mode of the round effect, and ends the command analysis process. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern based on the round designation command, sets round effect data indicating the determined round effect pattern in the round effect pattern storage area, and indicates the determined round effect pattern. The round effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is an ending designation command (special game ending designation command) related to the special game. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special game ending designation command, it moves the process to step S1320. If it determines that the command is not a special game ending designation command, the sub CPU 102a ends the command analysis process.

  In step S1320, the sub CPU 102a performs an ending effect pattern determination process for determining an ending effect pattern that is an aspect of the ending effect, and ends the command analysis process.

  Here, the variation effect pattern determination table used in the variation effect pattern determination process (FIG. 35) described later will be described. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the sub CPU 102a receives the special figure variation pattern designation command from the main control board 101, the sub CPU 102a enters the special mode variation pattern designation command and the effect mode set in the current gaming state. A process for determining a variation effect pattern is performed from the associated variation effect pattern determination table.

FIG. 40 shows a variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A stored in the sub ROM 102b and set in a low-probability gaming state and a non-short-time gaming state, which will be described later.
FIG. 41 shows a variation effect pattern determination table that is stored in the sub ROM 102b and that is associated with effect mode B that is set in a special probability variation number of 1 to 30 in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, which will be described later. Show.
FIG. 42 shows a variation effect pattern determination table that is stored in the sub ROM 102b and that is associated with the effect mode C that is set in a special probability variation number of 31 to 74 times in a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, which will be described later. Show.
FIG. 43 shows a variation effect pattern determination table that is stored in the sub ROM 102b and that is associated with the effect mode D that is set in the special probability variation number 75 to 84 in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state described later. Show.

  The variation effect pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 include special symbol determination results (decision results of jackpot determination), special diagram variation pattern designation commands from the main control board 101, and variations corresponding to the special diagram variation time. Based on the production time (s) of the production, the fluctuation production pattern determination value (0 to 99) for determining the fluctuation production pattern, the fluctuation production pattern determined according to the fluctuation production pattern judgment value, and the fluctuation production pattern The contents of the fluctuation effects and the presence / absence of execution (execution (◯), non-execution (×)) of each special effect in the fluctuation effects based on the fluctuation effect pattern are stored in association with each other.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode A)
In the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-temporary gaming state in FIG. 40, the player has a sense of expectation such as whether to win the first jackpot or the second jackpot. As a variation production pattern with different expectations for winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot, a variation production pattern that executes super reach after execution of normal reach, and a variation production pattern that executes special reach after execution of normal reach And a variable effect of executing super reach after executing normal reach and then executing special reach.
In addition, in order to give the player a sense of expectation whether or not to win the third big hit or the small win, a variation production pattern in which a story reach is executed after execution of a normal reach, and a variation production pattern in which a challenge reach is executed after execution of a normal reach And have.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A in FIG. 40, when the special symbol determination result is lost, “E6H00H” or “E7H00H” is determined as the special diagram variation pattern designation command. One of “variation effect pattern A001” to “variation effect pattern A003” is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A001” to “variation effect pattern A003” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 4 seconds (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-”). 3 ”), a fluctuating effect for informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when “E6H01H” or “E7H01H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, one of “variation presentation pattern A004” to “variation presentation pattern A006” is determined. Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A004” to “variation effect pattern A006” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time of 8 seconds (“symbol variation A2-1” to “symbol variation A2-3”). "), A fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  In addition, when “E6H02H” or “E7H02H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, one of “variation presentation pattern A007” to “variation presentation pattern A009”. Either is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A007” to “variation effect pattern A009” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable effect time of 12 seconds (“symbol variation A3-1” to “symbol variation A3-3”). ), A fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H03H” or “E7H03H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A010” to “variation presentation pattern A012” Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A010” to “variation effect pattern A012” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-3”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-3”) that stops and displays the two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) with the same numerical value, and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost Production.

  When “E6H07H” or “E7H07H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A022” to “variation presentation pattern A025” is determined. Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A022” to “variation effect pattern A025” display a variety of special effect symbols (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( ("Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H08H” or “E7H08H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A026” to “variation presentation pattern A029” is determined. Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A026” to “variation effect pattern A029” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) is performed to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then the expectation for jackpot is higher than normal reach and super reach. This is a fluctuating effect that performs special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When “E6H09H” or “E7H09H” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, any one of “variation presentation pattern A030” to “variation presentation pattern A033” Is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A030” to “variation effect pattern A033” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( Special Reach ("Special Reach A1-1" to "Special Reach A1-4") that has higher expectations for jackpots than Super Reach after "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") This is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, the variation variation pattern A034 to the variation variation pattern A037 are selected. Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A034” to “variation effect pattern A037” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") is a fluctuating effect that informs that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, one of “variation presentation pattern A038” to “variation presentation pattern A041” Either is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern A038” to “variation effect pattern A041” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) is performed to stop and display two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then the expectation for jackpot is higher than normal reach and super reach. This is a fluctuating effect that performs special reach ("special reach A1-1" to "special reach A1-4") and notifies that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  When “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” is determined as the special figure variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, one of “variation presentation pattern A042” to “variation presentation pattern A045” Either is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A042” to “variation effect pattern A045” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-4”). Normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-4”) that stops and displays two symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value, and then super-reach with a higher expectation for jackpots than normal reach ( Special Reach ("Special Reach A1-1" to "Special Reach A1-4") that has higher expectations for jackpots than Super Reach after "Super Reach A1-1" to "Super Reach A1-4") Is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When “E6H10H” or “E7H10H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, the variation variation pattern A058 to the variation variation pattern A060 is selected. Either is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern A058” to “variation effect pattern A060” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation A1-1” to “symbol variation A1-3”). Characters that appear in the challenge reach as described above after performing normal reach (“normal reach A1-1” to “normal reach A1-3”) that stops and displays the two symbols (left and right symbols) with the same numerical value. Going on a journey to find a domestic dog that disappeared, and finally finding a domestic dog, a story reach consisting of a story that suggests that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot ("story reach A1-1" ”To“ Story Reach A1-3 ”), and it is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot .

  As described above, the variation effects of “variation effect pattern A061” to “variation effect pattern A063” are a challenge to a treasure hunt game in which a character searches for a sword of a target item from a plurality of treasure boxes after “symbol variation 2”. Then, it is suggested that the character wins an item and that the result of the jackpot determination indicates that the result is a third jackpot or a jackpot ("challenge reach A1-1" to "challenge reach A1-3"). This is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  Fluctuation effects of “Variation effect pattern A064” to “Variation effect pattern A066” are obtained by challenging the treasure hunt game where the character searches for a cloak of a target item from a plurality of treasure boxes after “symbol variation 3”. Depending on the item to be played, a challenge reach ("Challenge Reach A2-1" to "Challenge Reach A2-3") is performed to suggest that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot. This is a fluctuating effect informing that the determination result is the third big hit or the small hit.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode A, the “variation effect pattern A001” to the “variation effect pattern A075” include “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, “development notice A”, “decision” as special effects. Information indicating execution (◯) and non-execution (×) of “effect A” is associated.

  Here, as will be described later, the “line notice” is a jackpot game by displaying on the image display device 14 an effect image in which a character described later speaks one of a plurality of lines having different expectations for the jackpot. Is a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as will be described later, any one of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serif Notice A5” of “Selif Notice A” is executed as “Selif Notice”.

  In addition, the “character notice”, as will be described later, notifies the possibility of executing the jackpot game by displaying any image of a plurality of characters having different expectations for the jackpot on the image display device 14. This is a notice effect that gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. In the effect mode A, as will be described later, any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” of “character notice A” is executed as “character notice”.

  As described later, “development notice” refers to the state of the effect button 18A (non-projecting state or protruding state) or the type of effect image displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. In addition to notifying the possibility of developing from the current performance to a higher next performance with a high expectation for the jackpot, the possibility of executing the jackpot game is notified, and the expectation that the judgment result of the jackpot is a jackpot It is a notice effect to give. In the production mode A, as will be described later, “Development Notice A1” or “Development Notice A2” of “Development Notice A” is executed as “Development Notice”.

  In addition, the “decision effect” is an effect for notifying the determination of a big hit, as will be described later. When the first big hit or the second big win is won, the first decorative member 17A is moved. In the case of losing, the first decoration member 17A is not operated. In effect mode A, as will be described later, “determined effect A1” or “determined effect A2” of “determined effect A” is executed as “determined effect”.

As shown in FIG. 40, for example, when the special symbol determination result is “fluctuation effect pattern A034”, execution of “Selif notice A”, “Character notice A”, and “Development notice A” (○), “Decisive effect” Information indicating non-execution (×) of “A” is associated.
When the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern A034” in step S1311-4 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, “subject notice A” and “character notice A” as special effects in step S1311-6. Confirm that “Development notice A” is executed.

The variable effect performed in the high-probability game state and the short-time game state, which is more likely to win the jackpot than the low-probability game state and the non-short-time game state, is a simple effect that does not overwhelm the notice effect.
In addition, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, a maximum of 84 variation effects are performed in a special mode variation number 1 to 30 times and a special diagram variation number 31 times so as not to be redundant. Different effects are performed in the effect mode C performed at 74 times and the effect mode D performed at 75 to 84 special figure fluctuations.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode B)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B of FIG. 41 is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state described above. This is a variation effect pattern of a variation effect that is executed once to 30 times.

  In such a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the player usually has a sense of expectation that it will be easy to win a jackpot. Therefore, in the production mode B, in order to give the player a sense of expectation that a big win will be won in a short period with a small number of special figure fluctuations, The production of the fluctuation is simpler than the production.

  In the effect mode B, when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the special figure fluctuation time is longer than that in the effect mode A so that the fluctuation effect of the next special figure fluctuation frequency is immediately executed at a high rate. Has a variation effect pattern of 2 seconds and a variation effect at a high rate. In addition, when the special effect design is changed to reach, only the “special character reach” is executed so that characters appearing only in the effect mode B fight each other.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B in FIG. 41, when “E6H30H” or “E7H30H” is determined as the special diagram variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. The “variation effect pattern B001” or “variation effect pattern B002” is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern B001” and “variation effect pattern B002” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 2 seconds (“symbol variation B1-1”, “symbol variation B1-”). 2 ”), a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H31H” or “E7H31H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variable rendering pattern B003” or “variable rendering pattern B004” is determined. The When “E6H32H” or “E7H32H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variable rendering pattern B005” or “variable rendering pattern B006” is determined. The

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B003” to “variation effect pattern B006” are displayed by variably displaying a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation B2-1”, “symbol variation B2-2”, “symbol variation B3-1”). ”,“ Symbol variation B3-2 ”), a variation effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H33H” or “E7H33H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variation effect pattern B007” or “variation effect pattern B008” is determined. Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H34H” or “E7H34H” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern B009” or “fluctuation presentation pattern B010” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H35H” or “ When "E7H35H" is determined, "Variation effect pattern B011" or "Variation effect pattern B012" is selected. When the special figure change pattern designation command "E6H36H" or "E7H36H" is determined, "Variation effect pattern" When “B013” or “Variation effect pattern B014” is determined and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H37H” or “E7H37H” is determined, “Variation effect pattern B015” or “Variation effect pattern B016” is changed to the special figure fluctuation. Pattern designation command “E6H38H Or when "E7H38H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern B017" or "variations demonstration pattern B018" is determined, respectively.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B007” to “variation effect pattern B018” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation B3-1”, “symbol variation B3-2”, “symbol variation B2-1”). ”,“ Symbol Variation B2-2 ”), and then a special character reach in which a special character appears (“ Special Character Reach B4-1 ”,“ Special Character Reach B4-2 ”,“ Special Character Reach B5-1 ”,“ Special Character Reach B5-2, Special Character Reach B6-1, Special Character Reach B6-2, Special Character Reach B1-1, Special Character Reach B1-2, Special Character Reach B2- 1 ”,“ Special Character Reach B2-2 ”,“ Special Character Reach B3-1 ”, and“ Special Character Reach B3-2 ”), and a variable performance that informs that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost It is.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot and “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern B019” or “variation effect pattern B020” is determined. The Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern B021” or “fluctuation presentation pattern B022” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH”. "Is determined," variation effect pattern B023 "or" variation effect pattern B024 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B019” to “variation effect pattern B024” are displayed by variably displaying a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation B3-1”, “symbol variation B3-2”). Special character reach ("Special Character Reach B1-1", "Special Character Reach B1-2", "Special Character Reach B2-1", "Special Character Reach B2-2", "Special Character Reach B3-1" , “Special Character Reach B3-2”), and a variation effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When the special symbol determination result is "E6H3FH" or "E7H3FH" is determined as JP diagram variation pattern designation command when the third jackpot, "variation demonstration pattern B031" or "variations demonstration pattern B032" is determined The Similarly, in the case of JP-view variation pattern specification command "E6H40H" or "E7H40H" is determined "variation demonstration pattern B033" or "variations demonstration pattern B034", JP diagram variation pattern specification command "E6H41H" or "E7H41H "Is determined," variation effect pattern B035 "or" variation effect pattern B036 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern B031” to “variation effect pattern B036” are displayed by variably displaying a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation B2-1”, “symbol variation B2-2”). Special Character Reach ("Special Character Reach B4-1", "Special Character Reach B4-2", "Special Character Reach B5-1", "Special Character Reach B5-2", "Special Character Reach B6-1" , “Special Character Reach B6-2”), and a variation effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

  In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode B, the “variation effect pattern B001” to the “variation effect pattern B042” are executed as a special effect of “development notice B” and “decision effect B” (◯), not executed ( X) is associated with the information.

For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuation effect pattern B019” is associated with information indicating that “development notice B” is executed (◯) and “decision effect B” is not executed (×).
If the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern B019” in step S1311-4 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, it confirms that “development notice B” is executed as a special effect in step S1311-6. To do.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode C)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C of FIG. 42 is a variation effect of the variation effect that is performed after 31 to 74 times of special figure variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. It is a pattern.

  In the effect mode C, there is a variable effect pattern of a variable effect that is executed when the big win is not won even in the special figure change frequency 1 to 30 times in the high probability game state and the short time game state. Therefore, a character that appears only in the production mode C as a variation production pattern having a reach production different from the “special character reach” of the production mode B in the special figure variation times 31 to 74 in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. Has a variation production pattern of “attack reach” in which an attack is made.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C of FIG. 42, when the special symbol determination result is lost, “E6H50H” or “E7H50H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command. The “variable effect pattern C001” or “variable effect pattern C002” is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C001” and “variation effect pattern C002” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variation effect time as short as 2 seconds (“symbol variation C1-1”, “symbol variation C1-”). 2 ”), a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  When “E6H51H” or “E7H51H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, “variable rendering pattern C003” or “variable rendering pattern C004” is determined. The When “E6H52H” or “E7H52H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, “variable rendering pattern C005” or “variable rendering pattern C006” is determined. The

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern C003” to “variation effect pattern C006” display a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”, “symbol variation C3-1”). ”,“ Symbol variation C3-2 ”), a variation effect informing that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  If “E6H53H” or “E7H53H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost, “variation effect pattern C007” or “variation effect pattern C008” is determined. Similarly, if the Japanese view variation pattern specification command "E6H54H" or "E7H54H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern C009" or "variations demonstration pattern C010" is, JP diagram variation pattern specification command "E6H55H" or " If the E7H55H "is determined, when" fluctuation demonstration pattern C011 "or" variations demonstration pattern C012 "is the Japanese diagram variation pattern specification command" E6H56H "or" E7H56H "is determined," fluctuation effect pattern C013 "or" variations demonstration pattern C014 ", if the Japanese view variation pattern specification command" E6H57H "or" E7H57H "is determined, the" fluctuation demonstration pattern C015 "or" variations demonstration pattern C016 ", Japanese view change Pattern designation command “E6H58H Or when "E7H58H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern C017" or "variations demonstration pattern C018" is determined, respectively.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C007” to “variation effect pattern C018” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”, “symbol variation C3-1”). ”,“ Symbol variation C3-2 ”), and then an attack reach (“ attack reach C4-1 ”,“ attack reach C4-2 ”,“ attack reach C5-1 ”), where a predetermined character attacks. “Attack reach C5-2”, “attack reach C6-1”, “attack reach C6-2”, “attack reach C1-1”, “attack reach C1-2”, “attack reach C2-1”, “attack Reach C2-2 ”,“ Attack reach C3-1 ”, and“ Attack reach C3-2 ”), and a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  When the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot and “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command, “variation effect pattern C019” or “variation effect pattern C020” is determined. The Similarly, when the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” is determined, the “fluctuation presentation pattern C021” or “fluctuation presentation pattern C022” is changed to the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH”. "Is determined," variation effect pattern C023 "or" variation effect pattern C024 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019” to “variation effect pattern C024” displays a plurality of special effect symbols in a variable manner (“symbol variation C3-1”, “symbol variation C3-2”), and then a predetermined character. Attack reach (“attack reach C1-1”, “attack reach C1-2”, “attack reach C2-1”, “attack reach C2-2”, “attack reach C3-1”, "Attack reach C3-2"), and it is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When the special symbol determination result is "E6H5FH" or "E7H5FH" is determined as JP diagram variation pattern designation command when the third jackpot, "variation demonstration pattern C031" or "variations demonstration pattern C032" is determined The Similarly, in the case of JP-view variation pattern specification command "E6H60H" or "E7H60H" is determined "variation demonstration pattern C033" or "variations demonstration pattern C034", JP diagram variation pattern specification command "E6H61H" or "E7H61H "Is determined," variation effect pattern C035 "or" variation effect pattern C036 "is respectively determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern C031” to “variation effect pattern C036” displays a plurality of special effect symbols (“symbol variation C2-1”, “symbol variation C2-2”), and then a predetermined character. Attack reach (“attack reach C4-1”, “attack C4-2”, “attack reach C5-1”, “attack reach C5-2”, “attack reach C6-1”, “ The attack effect C6-2 ") is performed to notify that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is a small hit, a variation effect similar to the case where the special symbol determination result is the third big hit is executed except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

In the variation effect pattern determination table of the effect mode C, the “variation effect pattern C001” to the “variation effect pattern C042” are executed (O) or non-executed as special effects as “advance notice C” and “decision effect C”. Information indicating (x) is associated.
For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuation effect pattern C019” is associated with information indicating the execution (◯) of “development notice C” and “determination effect C”.
When the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern C019” in step S1311-4 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, “development notice C” and “determination effect C” are provided as special effects in step S1311-6. Confirm that you want to execute.

(Variation effect pattern determination table associated with effect mode D)
The variation effect pattern included in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D in FIG. 43 is the variation effect of the variation effect that is performed after 75 to 84 times of the special figure variation number in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. It is a pattern.

  In the effect mode D, there is a change effect pattern of a change effect that is executed when the big win is not won even in the special figure change times 31 to 74 times in the high probability game state and the short time game state. Therefore, it appears only in the production mode D as a variation production pattern having a reach production different from the “attack reach” of the production mode C in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state in the special figure fluctuation frequency 31 to 74 times. The character that performs the janken has a variation effect pattern of “Janken production” with the content of performing the janken a predetermined number of times with the character that is the opponent of the janken. With such a variation effect of the janken effect, the player can be expected to win a big hit with the number of special figure fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state with a small remaining number of times.

  As shown in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D in FIG. 43, when “E6H70H” or “E7H70H” is determined as the special diagram variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is lost. the, one of the "fluctuation demonstration pattern D001" - "fluctuation demonstration pattern D003" is determined, when the "E6H71H" or "E7H71H" is determined, "variation demonstration pattern D004" - "change effect If any one of “pattern D006” is determined and “E6H72H” or “E7H72H” is determined, any one of “variable effect pattern D007” to “variable effect pattern D009” is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D001” to “variation effect pattern D009” are “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”, “symbol” which displays a plurality of special effect symbols. ”Difference D2-1” to “Symbol Variation D2-3” and “Symbol Variation D3-1” to “Symbol Variation D3-3”) This is a fluctuating effect in which an effect (contention character, opponent character) performs a single janken, an effect that the teammate character loses, and that the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  When “E6H73H” or “E7H73H” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is a loss, any one of “variable rendering pattern D010” to “variable rendering pattern D012” is determined. Is determined, and the special figure variation pattern designation command “E6H74H” or “E7H74H” is determined, any one of “variable effect pattern D013” to “variable effect pattern D015” is determined, and the special figure variation is determined. When the pattern designation command “E6H75H” or “E7H75H” is determined, any one of “variation effect pattern D016” to “variation effect pattern D018” is determined.

  The variation effect of “variation effect pattern D010” to “variation effect pattern D018” is a variation effect in which “Janken Reach” is executed after “symbol variation” and the determination result of the jackpot determination is lost.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D010” to “variation effect pattern D012” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , "rock-paper-scissors twice to win it !!" a notification to two character (friend of the character, the character of the opponent) wins the character of ally perform the first round eyes of rock-paper-scissors, then of "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( performs a rendition of content that ally of character loses in the second round eyes of rock-paper-scissors in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1" - "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-3"), change the determination result of the jackpot determination is to inform the user that is a loss Production.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D013” to “variation effect pattern D015” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D2-1” to “symbol variation D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken wins 3 times !!” and two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1" - "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-3") in the second round eyes of rock-paper-scissors wins character of ally in, make the production of content that ally of character is lose in the third round eyes of rock-paper-scissors, jackpot judgment This is a fluctuating effect that informs that the determination result is lost.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D016” to “variation effect pattern D018” are included in “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D3-1” to “symbol variation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , "rock-paper-scissors four times to win it !!" a notification to two character (friend of the character, the character of the opponent) wins the character of ally perform the first round eyes of rock-paper-scissors, then of "rock-paper-scissors reach" ( "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-1" - the second in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D3-3"), the third round eyes ally of character wins at rock-paper-scissors, make the production of content that in the fourth round eyes of rock-paper-scissors ally of character loses This is a fluctuating effect for notifying that the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D019” to “variation effect pattern D021” are included in “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Junken wins twice!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( performs a rendition of content that is also an ally of character to win in the second round eyes of rock-paper-scissors in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-1" - "rock-paper-scissors reach D1-3"), change the determination result of the jackpot determination is to inform the user that is a big hit Production.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D022” to “variation effect pattern D024” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D2-1” to “symbol variation D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken wins 3 times !!” and two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-1" - the second in the "rock-paper-scissors reach D2-3"), the production of content that ally of character will win in succession in the third round eyes of rock-paper-scissors, the determination result of the jackpot determination is in the jackpot This is a fluctuating effect to notify that there is.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D025” to “variation effect pattern D027” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D3-1” to “symbol variation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken 4 wins!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, and the ally's character wins, then the “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3") The second round to the fourth round of Janken will produce the content that the ally character wins continuously, and the jackpot determination result is a big hit It is a fluctuating effect that informs that it is.

  In the case where the special symbol determination result is the second jackpot, the same variation effect is executed as in the case where the special symbol determination result is the first jackpot, except that the numerical value of the special effect symbol that is stopped and displayed is different.

  When “E6H7CH” or “E7H7CH” is determined as the special symbol variation pattern designation command when the special symbol determination result is the third jackpot, the variation variation pattern D037 to the variation variation pattern D039 is selected. any is determined, any of the "fluctuation demonstration pattern D040" - "fluctuation demonstration pattern D042" in the case of JP-view variation pattern specification command "E6H7DH" or "E7H7DH" is determined is determined, special symbol When the variation pattern designation command “E6H7EH” or “E7H7EH” is determined, any one of “variation effect pattern D043” to “variation effect pattern D045” is determined.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D037” to “variation effect pattern D039” are “pattern variation” (“symbol variation D1-1” to “symbol variation D1-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Junken wins twice!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( (Janken Reach D1-1) to “Janken Reach D1-3”) This is a fluctuating effect informing that the result is a third big hit or a small hit.

  Fluctuation effects of “variation effect pattern D040” to “variation effect pattern D042” are included in “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D2-1” to “symbol variation D2-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken wins 3 times !!” and two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, the ally's character wins, and the subsequent “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D2-1" to "Janken Reach D2-3") The ally character wins in the second round of janken, and the ally character and the opponent's character in the third round of kenken are "Aiko" This is a fluctuating effect in which the effect of the content is performed and the fact that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot is informed.

  The variation effects of “variation effect pattern D043” to “variation effect pattern D045” are displayed during “symbol variation” (“symbol variation D3-1” to “symbol variation D3-3”) in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed. , “Janken 4 wins!” And two characters (a friend's character, opponent's character) perform the first round of the janken, and the ally's character wins, then the “Janken Reach” ( "Janken Reach D3-1" to "Janken Reach D3-3") The second and third rounds of janken win the teammates in succession. This is a fluctuating effect in which the effect of the content that becomes “Aiko” is performed and that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the third jackpot or the jackpot.

  When the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the same variation effect is executed as when the special symbol determination result is the third big hit.

“Variation effect pattern D001” to “Variation effect pattern D054” are associated with information on execution (O) of “development notice D”, “character notice D”, and “decision effect D” as special effects. Yes.
For example, the special symbol determination result “fluctuation effect pattern D019” is associated with information indicating execution of “development notice D” (◯) and execution of “decision effect D” (◯).
If the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern D019” in step S1311-4 of the later-described variation effect pattern determination process, “development notice D” and “character notice D” as special effects in step S1311-6. Then, it is confirmed that “decision effect D” is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 43, in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game, the effect mode B is executed in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 to 30 times. The execution ratio of the special effect is higher in the effect mode C in the effect mode C that is executed with the number of changes of 31 to 74 times than the change effect, and the number of changes is 35 to 84 than the change effect in the effect mode C. The execution ratio of the special effect is higher in the change effect of the effect mode D executed in a single time.

(Type of each special production)
44 and 45 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode A”. FIG. 44A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 44 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode A when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the execution ratio (%) of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” as “Serial notice A” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A5” is set, the execution ratio (%) of “Development notice A1” to “Development notice A6” as “Development notice A” is set, and “ The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” as “decided effect A” is set.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a special effect information table that stores the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect in effect mode A. FIG. 45A is a diagram showing a “line notice A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “line notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram showing a “character notice A information table” for storing the setting contents for each type of “character notice A” in effect mode A. FIG. 45C shows a “development advance notice A information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development advance notice A” in the production mode A. FIG. 45 (d) is a diagram showing a “determined effect A information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect A” in effect mode A.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 45 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b). It is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table.

  “Serif notice A1” is a display of an effect image of “Serif a1” “Ippin Senkinja!” On the image display device 14. In this “line notice A1”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X11 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed. The operation promotion notification that prompts the user is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation being performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, an effect image (“Character a1”, which will be described later, says “Ichigo Senkinja!” As “Serif a1” ( 62 (see (a-1-4) in FIG. 62) is displayed on the image display device 14, and the third decorative member 17C is moved from the “standby position 3” to the “operation position 3” as a movable member. Perform the corresponding performance.

  “Serif notice A2” is a display of an effect image of “Serif a2” “Is it possible to acquire one hundred cars?” On the image display device 14. In this “line notice A2”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means that is effective during the operation effective period, and during the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X11 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state. Then, based on the fact that the press button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect that “Character a1”, which will be described later, says “Is it possible to acquire one hundred cars” as “Serif a1”? A corresponding effect such as displaying an image (see (b-1-4) in FIG. 63) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  “Serif notice A3” is the same as “Serif notice A2”, except that the effect image of “Serif a3” “Is it possible to acquire both?” Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  “Selif notice A4” does not set an operation valid period, and at a predetermined timing, except for displaying an effect image of “Serif a4” on the image display device 14 “Do you get one?” The contents of the production are the same.

  “Selif notice A5” does not set an operation valid period, and at a predetermined timing, except for displaying an effect image of “Serif a5” on the image display device 14 “Do you earn money”? The contents of the production are the same.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44A and 44B, in the “line notice A1”, the execution rate of the “line notice A1” is the lowest in the case of a loss, and in the case of a big hit, the “line notice A1”. Is the highest execution rate. That is, the expectation level (reliability) for the jackpot of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” is highest in “Serif notice A1” and becomes lower as “Serif notice A2” to “Serif notice A5”. In “Selif Notice A”, the execution ratio of “Selif Notice A1” to “Selif Notice A5” is set.

  “Selif Notice A1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, and “Selif Notice A2” to “Serif Notice A2 in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. It consists of notice A5 ". In the production mode A where the jackpot probability is 1/350, the ratio of lost is considerably higher than the ratio of jackpot etc., and when this is a loss, an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is executed. The execution rate of “Serif Notice A2” to “Serif Notice A5” is higher than the execution rate of “Serif Notice A1” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the “Selif Notice” effect of the effect mode A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time game state, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is the operation that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the variation production of the production mode A, when the jackpot etc., the ratio of the “character notice A1” in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is high. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher in the jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A.

  “Character notice A1” is to display the effect image of “Character a2-1” on the image display device 14. In this “character notice A1”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period Y11 described later). Not. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image (see (a-2-4) in FIG. 62) of “character a2-1” described later is displayed on the image display device. 14 is executed.

  “Character notice A2” is to display the effect image of “Character a2-2” on the image display device 14. In this “character notice A2”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period, and the operation promotion notification is executed in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y11 described later). The effect button 18A remains in the non-projecting state. Then, an effect image of “Character a2-2” (see (b-2-4) in FIG. 63) described later is generated based on the single press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the image display device 14 is executed.

  “Character notice A3” is displayed in a manner other than “Character a2-2” (see (c-2-4) in FIG. 64) on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-2”. The content of the performance is the same as “Character notice A2”.

  “Character notice A4” does not set an operation valid period, and an effect image of “Character notice a2-4” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-2” at a predetermined timing. Except for the display, the content of the effect is the same as “Character notice A2”.

  “Character notice A5” does not set an operation valid period, and an effect image of “Character notice a2-5” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character a2-2” at a predetermined timing. Except for the display, the content of the effect is the same as “Character notice A2”.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44A and 44B, in “Character notice A”, the execution rate of “Character notice A1” is the lowest in the case of a loss, and “Character notice A1” in the case of a loss in the case of a big hit. Is the highest execution rate. That is, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A5” is highest in “Character notice A1” and decreases as “Character notice A2” to “Character notice A5”. , Execution ratios of “character notice A1” to “character notice A5” are set.

  “Character notice A” is based on “Character notice A1” for displaying the effect image of “Character a2-1” on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A, and on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A. “Character notice A2” to “Character notice A5” that display effect images of “Character a2-2” to “Character a2-5” on the image display device 14 are configured. When the ratio is higher than the big hit or the like, the ratio at which “character notice A2” to “character notice A5” in which the character image is displayed based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A is executed is the effect lever. It is higher than the rate at which “character notice A1” in which a character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of 19A is executed. Therefore, in the “character notice A” effect of the effect mode A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time game state, the proportion of the effect that the character image is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 18A is It is higher than the rate at which the effect that the character image is displayed based on the operation of 19A is executed. On the other hand, when it is a big hit or the like, the ratio of executing “character notice A1” in which the character image is displayed based on the tilting operation of the effect lever 19A is high, and based on the operation of the effect button 18A. The effect of displaying the character image based on the operation of the effect lever 19A has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect of displaying the character image.

  “Development notice A1” is to display the effect image of “effect a1” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice A1”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X12 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed. The operation promotion notification that prompts the user is executed. Then, an effect image of “effect a1” (see (a-3-4) in FIG. 62) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period. At the same time, a corresponding effect such as moving the second decorative member 17B as the movable member from “standby position 2” to “operation position 2” is executed.

  “Development notice A2” is to display the effect image of “effect a2” on the image display device 14. In this “development notice A2”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X12 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect image of “effect a2” is displayed on the image display device 14 and the second decorative member 17B as a movable member. A corresponding effect such as moving “standby position 2” to “operation position 2” is executed.

  “Development notice A3” is produced as “Development notice A1” except that the effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”, and the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

  “Development notice A4” is the same as “Development notice A2” except that the effect button 18A is set to the non-projecting state during the operation valid period.

  “Development notice A5” is produced as “Development notice A1” except that the effect image of “effect a2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a1”, and the movable member is not operated. The contents are the same.

  “Development notice A6” makes the effect button 18A in a non-projecting state during the operation effective period, displays an effect image of “effect a3” (not shown) on the image display device 14 instead of “effect a2,” and moves the movable member. The content of the production is the same as “Development notice A2” except that is not operated.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the “development notice A1” has the highest degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpots of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in “development notice A1”. The execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is set so as to become lower as it becomes “development notice A2” to “development notice A6”.

  “Development notice A1” “Development notice A1” “Development notice A3” “Development notice A5” in which the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, and operation promotion notification for instructing the operation of the production button 18A are executed. "Development notice A2", "Development notice A4", and "Development notice A6". In the production mode A where the jackpot probability is 1/350, the ratio of lost is considerably higher than the ratio of jackpot etc., and when this is a loss, an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is executed. “Development notice A1”, “Development notice A3”, “Development notice A5” are executed when the execution ratio of “Development notice A2”, “Development notice A4”, and “Development notice A6” is executed to prompt the operation of the effect lever 19A. Is higher than the execution rate. Therefore, in the “development notice” effect in the effect mode A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving game state, the rate at which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed is the operation that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which the promotion notification is executed. On the other hand, in the variation production of the production mode A, when the jackpot or the like, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is high, and the production that prompts the operation of the production button 18A. However, the direction that encourages the operation of the effect lever 19A has a higher expectation level (reliability).

  Also, in the tables of FIGS. 44A and 44B, in the variable production that develops from “super reach” to “special reach”, the production button 18A is projected at a high rate during the operation effective period. In the variable production that does not develop from “special reach”, the execution ratio of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is set so that the production button 18A is in a non-protruding state at a high rate during the operation valid period. ing.

  “Decision effect A1” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays the effect image of “flash” on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 63). ). In this “determined effect A1”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X22 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed. The operation promotion notification that prompts the user is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash a1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby position 1”. A corresponding effect such as moving to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  “Decision effect A2” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash a2” on the image display device 14 (see (b-3-3) in FIG. 63). ). In the “decided effect A2”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X22 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period, the effect image “flash” a2 is displayed on the image display device 14 and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), in “decided effect A”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” is “decided” than “decided effect A2”. The execution ratio of “decided effect A1” and “decided effect A2” is set so that “effect A1” is higher. That is, the “decision effect A1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

  The “decision effect A” is composed of “decision effect A1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed, and “decision effect A2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Is done. In the production mode A where the jackpot probability is 1/350, the ratio of lost is considerably higher than the ratio of jackpot etc., and when this is a loss, an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is executed. The execution ratio of “decided effect A2” is higher than the execution ratio of “decided effect A1” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Therefore, in the “decided effect” of the effect mode A that is the low-probability gaming state and the non-temporal gaming state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and the operation promotion that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is higher than the rate at which notification is executed. On the other hand, in the “decided effect” of the effect mode A, when the jackpot is given, the ratio of executing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is high, and the operation of the effect button 18A is prompted. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than the effect, and the expectation degree of jackpot (reliability) is higher.

46 and 47 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 40, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode B”. FIG. 46A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 46B shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode B when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 46A and 46B, the execution ratio (%) of “Development Notice B1” and “Development Notice B2” as “Development Notice B” is set, and “Decision Effect B” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect B1” and “decided effect B2” is set.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode B. FIG. 47A shows a “development notice B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice B” in the production mode B. FIG. 47B is a diagram showing a “determined effect B information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect B” in effect mode B.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 41, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 47 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b). It is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table.

  “Development notice B1” is for displaying the effect image of “effect b1” on the image display device 14. In this “development notice B1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X41 to be described later) for enabling an operation on the effect button 18A is set, and an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is set during the operation effective period. This is executed (see (d-2-1) in FIG. 66). Then, on the basis of the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect image of “effect b1” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 66) is displayed on the image display device 14. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the screen is executed.

  “Development notice B2” is for displaying the effect image of “effect b2” on the image display device 14. In the “development notice B2”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X41, which will be described later) that enables the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed during the operation effective period. This is executed (see (d-2-2) in FIG. 66). Then, an effect image of “effect b2” (see (d-2-3) in FIG. 66) is displayed on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 46A and 46B, in “Development Notice B”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Development Notice B1” and “Development Notice B2” is “Development Notice B2”. The execution ratio of “development notice B1” and “development notice B2” is set to be higher than “B1”.

  The “development notice B” is composed of “development notice B1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “development notice B2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. In the production mode B that is a high-probability gaming state in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02 and the short-time gaming state, the percentage of lost is considerably higher than the percentage of jackpot etc. The execution rate of “development effect B2” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of “development effect B1” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode B that is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time game state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is performed at the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. Is higher than the rate at which it is executed. On the other hand, in the “development notice” of the production mode B, when the jackpot is given, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is high, and the operation of the production lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

  “Decision effect B1” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash b1” on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-4) in FIG. 67). ). In the “determination effect B1”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X52 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed (see (e-3-2) in FIG. 63). Then, based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby position 1”. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  “Decision effect B2” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash b2” on the image display device 14 (see (e-3-4) in FIG. 67). ). In the “determination effect B2”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means that enables the operation during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X52 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed. The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed (see (e-3-3) in FIG. 67). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash b2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “ A corresponding effect such as moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 46A and 46B, in “decision effect B”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “decision effect B1” and “decision effect B2” is “determined” than “decision effect B1”. The execution ratio of “decision effect B1” and “decision effect B2” is set so that “effect B2” is higher. That is, the “decision effect B1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

  The “decision effect B” is composed of “decision effect B1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “decision effect B2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. In the production mode B that is a high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the execution rate of “decision production B2” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the operation that prompts the operation of the production button 18A. It is higher than the execution ratio of “decision effect B1” in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the “decided effect” of the effect mode B that is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is performed at a rate that the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is higher than the rate at which it is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like, in the “decided effect” of the effect mode B, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

48 and 49 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode C”. FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 48 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern in effect mode C when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, execution ratios (%) of “Development notice C1” and “Development notice C2” as “Development notice C” are set, and “Decision effect C” is set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect C1” and “decided effect C2” is set.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the changing effect of the effect mode C. 49A shows a “development notice C information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “development notice C” in the production mode C. FIG. FIG. 49B is a diagram showing a “determined effect C information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “determined effect C” in effect mode C.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 42, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 49 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. It is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table.

  “Development notice C1” is for displaying the effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 69) on the image display device 14. The “development notice C1” is to display the effect image of “effect c1” on the image display device 14. In this “development notice C1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X71 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect button 18A is set, and an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is set during the operation effective period. This is executed (see (g-2-1) in FIG. 69). Then, based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect image of “effect c1” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 69) is displayed on the image display device 14. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the screen is executed.

  The “development notice C2” is to display the effect image of “effect c2” on the image display device 14. In this “development notice C2”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X71 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed during the operation effective period. This is executed (see (g-2-2) in FIG. 68). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “effect c2” (see (g-2-3) in FIG. 69) is displayed on the image display device 14. The corresponding effect of the content such as is executed.

  48 (a) and 48 (b), in “Development Notice C”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Development Notice C1” and “Development Notice C2” is “Development Notice C2”. The execution ratio of “development notice C1” and “development notice C2” is set to be higher than “C1”.

  The “development notice C” is composed of “development notice C1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “development notice C2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. In the production mode C that is a high-probability gaming state in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02 and the short-time gaming state, the proportion of loss is considerably higher than the proportion of jackpot etc. The execution rate of “development effect C2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of “development effect C1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode C that is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is performed at a rate that the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is higher than the rate at which it is executed. On the other hand, in the “development notice” of the production mode C, when the jackpot is given, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is high, and the operation of the production lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

  “Decision effect C1” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 (see (g-3-4) in FIG. 69). ). In this “determined effect C1”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X72 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. The operation promotion notification for prompting is executed (see (g-3-2) in FIG. 69). Then, based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash c1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is displayed on the “standby position 1”. To the “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  “Decision effect C2” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash c2” on the image display device 14 (see (g-3-4) in FIG. 69). ). In the “decision effect C2”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X52 described later), The operation promotion notification for prompting is executed (see (g-3-3) in FIG. 69). Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash c2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “ A corresponding effect such as moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 48A and 48B, in “decision effect C”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “decision effect C1” and “decision effect C2” is “determined” than “decision effect C1”. The execution ratio of “decision effect C1” and “decision effect C2” is set so that “effect C2” is higher. That is, the “decision effect B1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

  The “decision effect C” is composed of “decision effect C1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “decision effect C2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. Then, in the production mode C that is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, when the game is lost, the execution rate of the “decision production C2” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the production button 18A. It is higher than the execution ratio of “decision effect C1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed. Therefore, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode C that is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is performed at a ratio that the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is higher than the rate at which it is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode C, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

50 and 51 are tables that are referred to when the sub CPU 102a determines a variation effect pattern by the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, and is stored in the sub ROM 102b.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of “effect mode D”. FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a special effect type determination table for determining the type of each special effect for each variation effect pattern of the effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”. FIG. 50 (b) shows each special effect for each variation effect pattern of effect mode D when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, “second jackpot”, “third jackpot” or “small jackpot”. It is a figure which shows the special production type determination table for determining the type of production.

  In the tables shown in FIGS. 50A and 50B, execution rates (%) of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” as “development notice D” are set. The execution ratio (%) of “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” is set.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a special effect information table stored in the sub ROM 102b for storing the setting contents for each type of special effect that can be executed in the variable effect of the effect mode D. FIG. 51A is a diagram showing an “development notice D information table” that stores setting contents for each type of “development notice D” in the rendering mode D. FIG. 51 (b) is a diagram showing a “determined effect D information table” that stores the setting contents for each type of “determined effect D” in effect mode D.

  When the sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern using the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 43, which of the special effect types set in the table of FIG. 51 is to be executed is shown in FIGS. It is determined by lottery based on the execution ratio shown in the table.

  The “development notice D1” displays an effect image of “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 71) on the image display device 14. In the “development notice D1”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X101 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect button 18A is set, and an operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is set during the operation effective period. Executed. Then, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “effect d1” on the image display device 14 is executed based on one press operation on the effect button 18A in the operation effective period.

  “Development notice D2” is for displaying the effect image of “effect d1” (see (j-3-3) in FIG. 71) on the image display device 14. In the “development notice D2”, an operation effective period (for example, an operation effective period X101 to be described later) for enabling the operation on the effect lever 19A is set, and an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed during the operation effective period. Executed. Then, based on the tilting operation being performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, a corresponding effect such as displaying the effect image of “effect d2” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, the “development notice D2” is the “development notice D2” and the “development notice D2” is the “development notice D2”. The execution ratio of “development notice D1” and “development notice D2” is set to be higher than “D1”.

  The “development notice D” is composed of “development notice D1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “development notice D2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. In the production mode D that is a high-probability gaming state in which the loss probability is 1 / 1.02 and in the short-time gaming state, the percentage of lost is considerably higher than the percentage that is a big hit, and is lost in the production mode D. In this case, the execution rate of the “development effect D2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed is higher than the execution rate of “development effect D1” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed. high. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode D in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is performed at a ratio that the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is higher than the rate at which it is executed. On the other hand, in the “development notice” in the production mode D, when the ratio is a big hit or the like that is lower than the loss, the rate at which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production button 18A is executed is high. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher in the jackpot expectation (reliability) than the effect of prompting the operation of the lever 19A.

  “Character notice D1” is to display the effect image of “Character d1” on the image display device 14. In this “character notice D1”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is effective during the operation effective period, and the operation promotion notification is executed in the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period Y101 described later). (See (j-4-1) in FIG. 71). Then, an effect image of “character d1” to be described later (see (j-4-3) in FIG. 71) is displayed on the basis of one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period. A corresponding effect such as displaying on the device 14 is executed.

  “Character notice D2” is the same as “Character notice D1” except that an effect image of “Character d2” (not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14 instead of “Character d1”.

  “Character notice D3” is to display the effect image of “Character d3” on the image display device 14. In this “character notice D3”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means for which the operation is valid during the operation valid period, and the operation promotion notification is executed during the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period Y101 described later). (See (j-4-1) in FIG. 71). Then, based on the fact that the tilting operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period, a corresponding effect such as displaying an effect image of “Character d3” on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, in “Development notice D”, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot of “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D3” is the highest in “Character notice D1”. The execution ratio of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is set to be lower as “character notice D2” and “character notice D3”.

  “Character notice D” includes “Character notice D1” and “Character notice D2” in which the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is executed, and “Character notice in advance” for the operation of the effect lever 19A. D3 ". In the production mode D that is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the execution rate of the “development production D3” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the operation that prompts the operation of the production button 18A. It is higher than the execution ratio of “Character notice D1” and “Character notice D2” for which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the “development effect” of the effect mode D in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is performed at a ratio that the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is higher than the rate at which it is executed. On the other hand, in the “development notice” of the effect mode D, when the jackpot is a big hit, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

  “Decision effect D1” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash d1” on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-6) in FIG. 71). ). In the “determination effect D1”, the effect button 18A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X102 described later), the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. The operation promotion notification for prompting the user is executed, and the state of the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state. Then, on the basis of the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period, the effect image of “flash d1” is displayed on the image display device 14 and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby”. A corresponding effect such as moving from “position 1” to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  “Decision effect D2” moves the first decorative member 17A as a movable member and displays an effect image of “flash d2” on the image display device 14 (see (j-4-6) in FIG. 71). ). In the “determination effect D2”, the effect lever 19A is selected as an operation means in which the operation is effective during the operation effective period. In the operation effective period (for example, the operation effective period X102 described later), the operation of the effect lever 19A is performed. The operation promotion notification that prompts the user is executed. Then, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period, an effect image of “flash d2” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is set to “standby position 1”. A corresponding effect such as moving to “operation position 1-2” is executed.

  In the tables of FIGS. 50A and 50B, in “decided effect D”, the expectation (reliability) for the big hits of “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” is “decided” than “decided effect D2”. The execution ratio of “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” is set so that “effect D1” is higher. That is, the “decision effect D1” is determined at a higher rate when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a win (first to third jackpots, a small hit) than when the determination result of the jackpot determination is a loss. The

  In the tables of FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), in the “decision effect D”, in the case of a loss, the “decision effect D2” is executed at a higher rate than the “decision effect D1”. In the case of, each execution ratio is set so that the “decided effect D1” is executed at a higher rate than the “decided effect D2”.

  The “decision effect D” is composed of “decision effect D1” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the effect button 18A is executed, and “decision effect D2” in which an operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the effect lever 19A is executed. Is done. In the production mode D that is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the execution rate of the “decision production D2” in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the production lever 19A is executed is the operation that prompts the operation of the production button 18A. It is higher than the execution rate of “decision effect D1” in which the promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the “decided effect” of the effect mode D that is the high-probability gaming state and the short-time game state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is performed at a ratio that the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. Is higher than the rate at which it is executed. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit or the like, in the “decision effect” of the effect mode C, the ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is high, and the operation of the effect lever 19A is urged. The effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect of the jackpot expectation (reliability).

  Note that the degree of expectation for jackpots is different for the “development notice” and the “decision effect” in the effect mode B, the effect mode C, and the effect mode D. That is, among the “development notice B1” executed in the effect mode B, the “development notice C1” executed in the effect mode C, and the “development notice D1” executed in the effect mode D, “development notice D1”. The jackpot expectation degree (reliability) is the highest, and the jackpot expectation degree becomes lower as “development notice C1” and “development notice B1”. Of the “decided effect B1” executed in the effect mode B, the “decided effect C1” executed in the effect mode C, and the “decided effect D1” executed in the effect mode D, “decided effect D1”. The jackpot expectation degree (reliability) is the highest, and the jackpot expectation degree becomes lower as “decision effect C1” and “decision effect B1”. Therefore, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, it can be said that the jackpot expectation by the effect using the effect button 18A increases as the effect mode B, effect mode C, and effect mode D progress.

  The sub CPU 102a operates the operation means (the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A) during the operation effective period in which the operation with respect to the operation means (the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A) is validated as a special effect in the figure variation effect. The corresponding effect is executed based on the above.

  The sub CPU 102a has a higher period (first period) in the specific gaming state at a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game. In the second period after the period of (1), an operation effective period is set during the variation effect.

  That is, the operation effective period is set during the changing effect at a higher rate in the changing effect (the changing 31st to 74th times) in the effect mode C than in the changing effect (the changing times 1 to 30). In addition, the operation effective period is set during the changing effect at a higher rate in the changing effect (the 75th to 84th changes) in the effect mode D than the changing effect in the effect mode C.

  In addition, the sub CPU 102a has a later period (in the specific gaming state) at a higher rate than the earlier period (first period) in the specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) after the end of the jackpot game. In the second period after the first period), an operation effective period in which the effect button 18A as the operation means for enabling the operation is set to the projecting state which is the second state is set.

  Further, when the sub CPU 102a is in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a executes the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A at a higher rate than the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A. On the other hand, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher in the jackpot expectation than the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A. . On the other hand, in the case of a specific gaming state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state), a higher proportion of special effects using the operation of the effect lever 19A than a special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A Run with. On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the big hit expectation is higher in the special effect using the operation of the effect button 18A than in the special effect using the operation of the effect lever 19A.

(Variation effect pattern determination processing by effect control board)
The variation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, thereby setting the current mode set in the effect mode setting process (see FIG. 36) described later. The production mode is confirmed, and the variation production pattern determination table associated with the current production mode is selected.

  In this step S1311-1, when the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode A”. Then, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode A shown in FIG. 40 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode B”. For this, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode B shown in FIG. 41 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode C”. For this, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode C shown in FIG. 42 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode D”. For this, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode D shown in FIG. 43 is selected.

  Alternatively, in step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and confirms that the current effect mode is “effect mode E”. For this, the variation effect pattern determination table associated with the effect mode E (not shown) is selected.

  In step S1311-2, the sub CPU 102a checks the special figure variation pattern designation command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  In the present embodiment, in each effect mode, one or more variable effect patterns are stored in association with the change effect pattern determination value for each special figure change pattern designation command. The variation effect pattern is identification information representing the effect contents of the variation effect, and is associated with a specific effect mode of the variation effect.

  The variation effect pattern is associated with the elements of the variation effect, such as the time of the change effect, the variation display mode of the effect symbol, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the contents of the reach effect, and the effect development configuration. In addition, in the variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the image display device 14, the display mode of the variation display of the effect symbol, and the display mode related to the object image and the background image composed of characters and the like are also components of the variation effect. It is associated.

  In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random effect pattern determination random number. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a stores the random value indicated by the random number counter related to the random effect pattern determination random number in the random effect storage pattern random number storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a collates the variation effect pattern determination random number stored in the variation effect pattern determination random number storage area in step S1313-4 with the selected variation effect pattern determination table, thereby changing the variation effect pattern. The process of determining is performed.

  In step S1311-5, the sub CPU 102a performs execution (O) and non-execution (x) information (FIG. 40 to FIG. 40) associated with the variation effect of the variation effect pattern determined in step S1313-4. By checking (see FIG. 43), it is determined whether or not to execute a special effect in the determined variation effect of the variation effect pattern. If the sub CPU 102a executes the special effect, the process proceeds to step S1311-6. If the sub CPU 102a determines not to execute the special effect, the process proceeds to step S1311-9.

  In step S1311-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect associated with the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4. For example, if the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern A034” in step S1311, the sub CPU 102a executes “serif notice A”, “character notice A”, and “development notice A” as special effects in step S1311-6. Then, it is confirmed that the “decision effect A” is not executed (see FIG. 40).

In step S1311-7, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining the type of special effect confirmed in step S1311-6 by lottery.
In step S1311-8, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the process of determining the type of special effect in step S1311-7 has been completed for all the special effects confirmed in step S1311-6, and determines that the process has ended. If so, the process proceeds to step S1311-9. If it is determined that the process has not ended, the process returns to step S1311-7.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a determines “variation effect pattern A034” in step S1311, the execution ratio according to the special effect type determination table in the effect mode A in FIG. “Selif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A5” is determined as the type of “Serial Notice A1”, and “Character Notice A1” to “Character Notice A5” is determined as the “Character Notice A” type. Then, one of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” is determined as the type of “development notice A”.

  In step S1311-9, the sub CPU 102a performs a process of determining whether or not to execute a specific effect. The specific effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for jackpot using vibration of the effect button 18A or the like. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect determination table shown in FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, and determines whether or not the specific effect is executed based on the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the specific effect determination random value. judge. In the present embodiment, the specific effect is not performed when the reach effect is not performed and when the reach effect is the normal effect.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H04H”, it is determined that the specific effect is executed at a rate of 50% (◯), and the specific effect is not executed at a rate of 50% (×). When the special figure change pattern designation command is “E6H0CH”, it is determined that the specific effect is executed at a rate of 80% (◯), and the specific effect is not executed at a rate of 20% (×).

  In step S1311-10, the sub CPU 102a checks whether or not it is determined in step S1311-9 that the specific effect is executed (O). If it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed (◯), the process proceeds to step S1311-1. If it is determined that the specific effect is not to be executed (x), the process proceeds to step S1311-1.

  In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a executes a specific effect type determination process for determining the type of the specific effect. The specific effect is performed by any one or a combination of vibration of the effect button 18A, pseudo sound output of the sound that the effect button 18A vibrates, and display of an image that the effect button 18A vibrates. In addition, the vibration of the effect button 18A is performed in one of two types of low speed vibration and high speed vibration.

  The specific effect type determination process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1311-11-1, the sub CPU 102a executes a vibration speed determination process for determining the vibration speed of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect vibration speed determination table shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, and uses the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command and the vibration speed determination random value to set the vibration speed to “low speed”. ”Or“ Fast ”. As shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the effect button 18A can vibrate. The “high speed” is a vibration speed at which vibration is transmitted to the player when the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A is vibrating. On the other hand, “low speed” means that, as described above, when the player touches the effect button 18A while the effect button 18A vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the player as “Poco… Poco…”. The vibration speed.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H05H”, “high speed” is determined at a rate of 50%, and “low speed” is determined at a rate of 50%. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E7H5BH”, it is determined as “high speed” at a rate of 90% and “low speed” at a rate of 10%. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the rate at which the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is determined to be “high speed” rather than “low speed” is higher than in the case of loss. Further, the higher the expectation level of the jackpot is, the more the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command is, the more the speed of the effect button 18A is determined to be "high speed" than "low speed". The percentage of the Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the effect of high jackpot expectation is higher when the vibration speed of the effect button 18A is “high speed” than when the vibration speed is “low speed”. If “high speed” is determined in this step, the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed when the specific effect is executed, and if “low speed” is determined, the effect button 18A is vibrated at a low speed when the specific effect is executed. .

  In step S1311-11-2, the sub CPU 102a executes a sound output determination process for determining whether or not to output a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A in the specific effect.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect sound output determination table shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, and uses the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the sound output determination random value to determine whether or not sound output is performed. decide. The voice output means that the voice output device 15 outputs a voice such as “Poco Poko Poko Poko” or “Poko... Poko...” That is a vibration sound of the presentation button 18A during execution of the specific presentation.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H05H”, it is decided to execute voice output at a rate of 50% (◯), and not to execute voice output at a rate of 50% (×). To do. Also, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E7H5BH”, it is decided to execute voice output at a rate of 90% (◯), and not to execute voice output at a rate of 10% (×). To do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a jackpot, the rate of executing sound output (◯) is higher than in the case of losing. In addition, the higher the expectation level of the jackpot expectation content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command is, the higher the proportion of execution of sound output (◯) becomes. Therefore, when the specific effect is executed, the effect of outputting the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is an effect having a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the effect of not outputting the sound.

  In step S1311-13-1, the sub CPU 102a executes image output determination processing for determining whether to output simulated image data of the effect button 18A that vibrates in the specific effect.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102a refers to the specific effect image output determination table shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, and determines the presence / absence of image output using the received special figure variation pattern designation command and the image output determination random number. To do. The output of an image is to display on the image display device 14 an image that simulates the appearance of the effect button 18A vibrating during execution of the specific effect.

  For example, when the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E6H05H”, it is decided to execute image output at a rate of 50% (◯) and not to execute image output at a rate of 50% (×). To do. When the special figure variation pattern designation command is “E7H5BH”, it is decided to execute image output at a rate of 90% (◯) and not to execute image output at a rate of 10% (×). To do. In the present embodiment, when the determination result is a big hit, the ratio of (○) to perform image output is higher than in the case of losing. Further, the higher the effect content (reach effect) associated with the special figure variation pattern designation command is, the higher the jackpot expectation degree effect, the higher the (○) rate at which image output is executed. Therefore, when executing the specific effect, the effect of outputting a pseudo image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is an effect that has a higher expectation degree of jackpot than the effect that does not output the image.

  Thus, sub CPU102a determines the production | generation aspect in a specific effect by performing the process of step S1311-11-1 to step S1311-1-11. The vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the simulated sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the display of the image of the effect button 18A that vibrates are determined according to the degree of expectation of jackpot. That is, in the specific effect, whether the effect button 18A vibrates at “high speed” or “low speed”, whether a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the audio output device 15, or an effect on the image display device 14. Whether or not an image representing the button 18A is displayed indicates the expected degree of jackpot. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, the jackpot expectation is increased step by step by the combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the output of the vibration sound of the simulated effect button 18A, and the display of the image of the effect button 18A. It has become different.

  Specifically, as shown in the jackpot expectation of the specific effect shown in FIG. 60, the effect button 18A vibrates at “high speed” in the specific effect, and a simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output. When the image of the effect button 18A is displayed, it is an effect that suggests the highest degree of jackpot expectation. On the other hand, when the effect button 18A vibrates only at “low speed” and the simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A or the image of the effect button 18A is not output, the specific effect of the lowest jackpot expectation is obtained.

  In the present embodiment, when executing a specific effect, as shown in the specific effect type determination process of FIG. 36, the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of the output of simulated vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and Although the presence or absence of the output of the image of the effect button 18A which vibrates is determined, respectively, it is not restricted to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 60, a combination of the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of simulated vibration sound output of the effect button 18A, and the presence / absence of output of the image of the effect button 18A vibrating is set in advance. Which combination of specific effects is to be determined may be determined according to the jackpot expectation. Moreover, a combination of specific effects may be set in association with each variation effect pattern.

  When the specific effect type determination process ends, the sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1311-1.

  In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a determines the special effect information of the type determined in step S1311-7 in the variable effect control command corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in step S1311-4, and determined in step S1311-1. Information on the type of the specific effect, and the variable effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 102c.

  In step S1311-1, the sub CPU 102a stores the variation effect data corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and sets the effect time of the variation effect in the variation effect timer counter. . The variation effect timer counter is incremented by “4” in step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can grasp the elapsed time of the variation effect at the present time by the variation effect timer counter.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the image control board 105 receives the change effect control command, the image control board 105 controls the image display device 14 to display the change effect effect image based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command, and the sound output device outputs the change effect sound. The control which outputs from 15 is performed. In addition, when the lamp control board 104 receives the change effect control command, the lamp control board 104 performs operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and illumination control of the effect illumination device 16 in the change effect based on the change effect pattern indicated by the command.

  The image control board 105 causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image of the special effect at the execution timing of the special effect associated with the change effect pattern indicated by the change effect control command received from the effect control board 102. Control and control for outputting the sound of the special effect from the sound output device 15 are performed. Further, when the lamp control board 104 receives the change effect control command, the lamp control board 104 performs the operation control of the effect accessory device 17 and the illumination control of the effect illumination device 16 in the special effect associated with the change effect pattern indicated by the command. Do.

(Production mode setting process by production control board)
Next, the effect mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special effect designating command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. In step S1314-2, the sub CPU 102a confirms whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is a loss. . If the sub CPU 102a confirms that it is a loss, it moves the process to step S1314-3, and if it confirms that it is not a loss, it moves the process to step S1314-7.

In step S1314-7, the sub CPU 102a confirms the result of the special symbol determination based on the information included in the special effect symbol designation command confirmed in step S1314-1. Then, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode determination table (FIG. 39) stored in the sub ROM 102b, and compares the confirmed result of the special symbol determination with the effect mode determination table to determine the effect mode.
If the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the first jackpot or the second jackpot, “effect mode B” is determined as shown in FIG. Thereby, after the end of the first jackpot game or after the end of the second jackpot game, the “effect mode B” is set.
Further, when the result of the special symbol determination confirmed in step S1314-1 is the third big hit or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 39, the “effect mode E” is determined. Thereby, after the end of the third big hit game or after the end of the small hit game, the “effect mode E” is set.

  In step S1314-8, the sub CPU 102a stores an effect mode flag corresponding to the effect mode determined in step S1314-7 in the effect mode flag storage area, and the number of executions of the effect mode that is associated with the effect mode. (Ma) is stored in the effect mode remaining number counter provided in the sub-RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process ends.

  The number of performance mode executions is the number of variable effects that can be executed in the effect mode. The effect mode remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of fluctuation effects (M: remaining number of effect modes) that can be executed in a specific effect mode in which the effect mode executable number (Ma) is set.

When “effect mode B” is determined in step S1314-7, “effect mode B” is set after the end of the first jackpot game or after the end of the second jackpot game. 30 times are stored as Ma).
In addition, when the “effect mode E” is determined in the above-described step S1314-7, the “effect mode E” is set after the end of the third big hit game or after the end of the small hit game, and the number of executions of the effect mode is possible. 84 times are stored as (Ma).

  On the other hand, in step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current mode is the production mode A, that is, whether or not the production mode flag “00H” is set in the production mode flag storage area.

  When the sub CPU 102a receives the initialization designation command transmitted from the main control board 101 in the initialization process of step S10 in the main process of the main control board described above, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect mode flag “00H” in the effect mode of the sub RAM 102c. The effect mode A is set by storing in the flag area.

  In step S1314-3, when determining that the sub CPU 102a is the effect mode A, the effect mode setting process ends. On the other hand, when determining that the mode is not the production mode A, the sub CPU 102a updates the remaining number (M) of the production mode by subtracting “1” from the counter value of the production mode remaining number counter in Step S1314-4. In −5, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter is “0”.

  In step S1314-5, if the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value of the effect mode remaining number counter of the remaining number (M) of the effect mode is not “0”, the sub CPU 102a ends the effect mode setting process. If it is determined that it is “0”, in step S1314-6, the effect mode flag of “transfer destination effect mode” shown in FIG. 39 is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (setting of the transfer destination effect mode), and the effect mode setting is performed. End the process.

  For example, the sub CPU 102a sets the production mode to the production mode B in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game, and M = 0 in step S1314-5. If it is determined that there is (YES in S 1314-5), in step S 1314-6, the effect mode C is set as the effect mode after the effect mode B (transition destination effect mode).

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 with the effect mode C set (YES in S1314-5), the effect mode C is determined in step S1314-6. The production mode D is set as a later production mode (transition destination production mode).

  If the sub CPU 102a determines that M = 0 in step S1314-5 with the effect mode D set (YES in S1314-5), the effect mode D is determined in step S1314-6. Production mode A is set as a later production mode (transition destination production mode).

In the present embodiment, as shown in the effect mode determination table of FIG. 39, effect mode A is set in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.
Also, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the first jackpot game or the second jackpot game when winning the first jackpot or the second jackpot, if the number of special figure changes is 1 to 30 The production mode B is set, the production mode C is set if the special figure fluctuation frequency is 31 to 74 times, and the production mode D is set if the special figure fluctuation frequency is 75 to 84 times.
Also, if the number of special figure fluctuations after the third big hit game or after the small hit game when winning the third big hit or the small hit game is 1 to 84 times, the effect mode E is set.

  The sub CPU 102a determines the variation effect pattern based on the variation effect pattern determination table corresponding to the effect mode set as described above.

  The sub CPU 102a executes a special effect (“Selif notice”, “Character notice”, “Development notice”, “Decisive effect”) among the change effect patterns shown in the change effect pattern determination tables of FIGS. The variation effect pattern associated with the information of (◯) and the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect based on the specific effect determination table shown in FIGS. 52 to 53 is determined, and the special effect associated with the determined variation effect pattern 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51 as the type of effect, the specific effect type associated with the operation effective period, and the specific effect type with reference to the specific effect type determination tables of FIGS. When the type is determined, the operation valid period is set in the variation effect.

  As can be seen from the execution ratio of special effects in FIG. 40 to FIG. 43 (the ratio of ◯) and FIGS. “A” is executed in “effect mode B” to “effect mode D” in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state at a rate higher than the rate of determining the special effect type associated with the operation effective period to be executed in “A”. The type of special effect associated with the operation valid period is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio than the ratio of the operation effective period in the variation effect of the “effect mode A” in the low-probability game state and the non-time-short game state, and the “effect mode in the high-probability game state and the time-short game state. In the variation effect of “B” to “effect mode D”, the operation valid period is set.

  As can be seen from the execution ratio of special effects (circle ratio) in FIGS. 41 to 43 and FIGS. 46, 48, and 50, the sub CPU 102 a performs the second big hit game after the end of the first big hit game. Among “Production Mode B” to “Production Mode D” in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state set in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state after the end of “Production Mode B”, “Production Mode C” As the “effect mode D”, the special effect type associated with the operation effective period is determined as a special effect type to be executed in that mode at a higher rate. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio of the special figure fluctuation frequency in the higher ratio than the production mode (first period) in which the special figure fluctuation frequency is smaller in the “production mode B” to the “production mode D”. In the (second period), the operation effective period is set during the fluctuating effect. Here, among “production mode B” to “production mode D”, the special production executed in that mode at a higher rate as “production mode B”, “production mode C”, and “production mode D”. As the type, the type of special effect associated with the operation effective period in which the operating means is in the protruding state (second state) is determined. That is, the sub CPU 102a has a higher ratio of the special figure fluctuation frequency in the higher ratio than the production mode (first period) in which the special figure fluctuation frequency is smaller in the “production mode B” to the “production mode D”. In the (second period), an operation effective period in which the operating means is in the protruding state (second state) during the fluctuating effect is set.

(Production input control processing by production control board)
The effect input control process by the effect control board 102 in step S1400 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S1401, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a based on the pressing operation of the effect button 18A, and an effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a based on the operation of the effect lever 19A. It is determined whether or not any of these operation means has been operated by determining whether or not any of the above has been input.

  In this step S1401, if the sub CPU 102a determines that any of the operating means has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if it is determined that no operating means has been operated, The effect input control process ends.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the special symbol variation display is currently being performed. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special symbol variation display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1403 to change the special symbol variation. When it is determined that the display is not in progress, the effect input control process is terminated.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 102a checks the variation effect pattern of the variation effect being executed according to the current special symbol variation display stored in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1404, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not it is during the operation effective period in the variation effect by the variation effect pattern confirmed in step S1403. If it is determined that it is during the operation effective period, the process proceeds to step S1405. If it is determined that the operation is not valid, the effect input control process is terminated.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a refers to FIG. 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, and FIG. 51 during the operation effective period determined in step S1404. It is confirmed whether the button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Then, whether or not an operation to the activated operation means has been performed depends on whether or not an effect button operation detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or an effect lever operation detection signal from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a is input. Judgment based on.

That is, when the operation means that is activated during the operation effective period is the effect button 18A, it is determined whether or not an effect button operation detection signal is input from the effect button operation detection switch 18a, and is enabled during the operation effective period. If the operating means is the effect lever 19A, it is determined whether or not an effect lever operation detection signal is input from the effect lever operation detection switch 19a.
In step S1405, the sub CPU 102a inputs the detection signal of the operating means activated from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a in the operation effective period in step S1405, so that the operation is performed. If it is determined that a designated operation has been performed on the activated operation means, the process proceeds to step S1406, and the activated operation means detection signal from the effect button operation detection switch 18a or the effect lever operation detection switch 19a. If it is determined that no designation operation has been performed on the operation means that has been validated during the valid operation period, the effect input control process is terminated.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 102a sets the corresponding effect control command for controlling the corresponding effect based on the designated operation to the operation means for which the operation is enabled in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c during the operation effective period. The corresponding effect control command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process in step S1500. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the corresponding effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 perform effect control for executing the corresponding effect based on the control content indicated by the corresponding effect control command.

  For example, when the sub CPU 102a confirms “variation effect pattern A034” as the variation effect pattern in step S1403 and executes “line notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a sends a corresponding effect control command to the image control board 105 and Transmit to the lamp control board 104. Thereby, the image control board 105 performs control to display the effect image of “serif a1” as the corresponding effect. Further, the lamp control board 104 performs drive control to the third effect accessory device 1703 based on the corresponding effect control command, whereby the third decorative member 17C is moved from “standby position 3” to “operation” as the corresponding effect. The moving operation to move to “position 3” is performed.

  In the present embodiment, an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A during the execution of a game effect related to a game using a game ball, such as a change effect performed during a special symbol change display, is performed. In the operation enabled state, the effect button 18A is in a non-projecting state (first state) or a projecting state (second state).

Here, a specific example of the variation effect will be described.
(Specific example of variation production in production mode A)
First, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode A will be described.

  FIG. 61A shows a variation effect time in which the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0AH” or “E7H0AH” from the main control board 101, determines the “variation effect pattern A034”, and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow. Further, FIG. 61B is executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0BH” or “E7H0BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern A038”, and performs a specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of the change production to perform. FIG. 61C shows a variable effect in which the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H0CH” or “E7H0CH” from the main control board 101, determines the “variable effect pattern A042”, and executes the specific effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the time flow of.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern A034 (first jackpot))
When the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and “variable effect pattern A034” is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a starts from timing T11 shown in FIG. Effect control is performed to execute the variable effect up to timing T14. FIG. 62 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 51A, an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a second decorative member 17B, and a third decorative member 17C.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in a period (a-1) from timing T11 to timing T12, and “normal reach A1-1” in a period (a-2) from timing T12 to timing T13. After that, in the period (a-3) and the period (a-4) from the timing T13 to the timing T14, the effect control for executing the “super reach A1-1” is performed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display effect images in which a plurality of special effect symbols are variably displayed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in this period (a-1), the sub CPU 102a first changes the special effect symbols in FIG. 62 and the predetermined character “character a1 (kunoichi)” appears in FIG. Effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-1-1) is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”. “Selif notice A” is a notice effect that notifies the possibility of executing the jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot.

  The sub CPU 102a displays “Selif Notice A” in FIG. 45A according to the execution rate of “Selif Notice A” in “Variation Effect Pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. Effect control for executing any one of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” shown in the special effect information table is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any of “Serif Notice A1” to “Serial Notice A3” in “Symbol Variation A1-1”, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A. A valid operation valid period X11 is set (see FIG. 45A).

  In the operation effective period X11, the sub CPU 102a includes an operation promotion notification image for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the case of “Selif Notice A2” or “Selif Notice A3” (a-1-2) in FIG. The effect which displays the effect image shown to the image display apparatus 14 is performed. The operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “Press the button !!” together with the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image. In the case of “Serial notice A1”, an effect of causing the image display device 14 to display an effect image shown in (a-1-3) of FIG. 62 including an image of an operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is executed. To do. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “draw the lever !!” together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image.

  The sub CPU 102a, as shown in the execution ratio of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in “Fluctuation effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. In the operation effective period X11 of “Serif notice A3”, the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state (first state)) and not in the projecting state (second state). Note that the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

  When the sub-CPU 102a executes “line notice A1”, the “character a1” is changed to “line a1” (“ 62) is displayed on the image display device 14 and the third decorative member 17C as the movable member is set to “standby position 3”. A corresponding effect (notice effect) such as moving to “operation position 3” is executed. The sub CPU 102a may execute an effect of outputting the voice of “serif a1” from the voice output device 15.

  When executing the “line notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 45A, is based on the fact that the presentation button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X11. Unlike the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of 62, the effect image in which “Character a1” speaks “Serif a2” (“Hundred cars?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14. Production control for performing production (notice production) is performed.

  When executing the “line notice A3”, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), the sub CPU 102a performs a pressing operation on the effect button 18A once during the operation effective period X11. Unlike the effect image shown in 62 (a-1-4), a corresponding effect in which an effect image in which “Character a1” speaks “Serif a3” (“Do you have enough for both?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14 ( Produce control for executing the notice effect).

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period X11 when executing the “line notice A4” and the “line notice A5”. That is, in “Serif Notice A4” and “Serial Notice A5”, the operation promotion notification image such as the effect image shown in (a-1-2) of FIG. 62 is not displayed, and “character” is displayed at a predetermined timing. A notice effect is displayed in which an effect image in which “a1” is speaking is displayed on the image display device 14. Note that the notice effects of “Serif notice A4” and “Serif notice A5” are effects equivalent to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “line notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a differs from the effect image shown in FIG. 62A-1-4 at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. Effect control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) in which an effect image that states that “Serif a4” (“Do you get one car?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  When executing the “line notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 45A, differs from the effect image shown in (a-1-4) of FIG. Effect control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding to a corresponding effect) in which an effect image of “speaking a5” (“Do you earn money?”) Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (a-2), the sub CPU 102a stops displaying the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) at the same numerical value (for example, 7) on the image display device 14. 62. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect of (a-2-1) in FIG. 62 for generating the reach state to be performed on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In this “normal reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect. “Character notice A” is a notice effect that notifies the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, similarly to “Serial notice A”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice A” in “Change effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of “Character notice A5” is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” as a special effect, the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is effective as shown in FIG. The operation effective period Y11 is set (see FIG. 45B).

  The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the operation effective period Y11. That is, in the operation effective period Y11, the sub CPU 102a causes the image display device 14 to display the effect images shown in (a-2-2) and (a-2-3) in FIG. 62 that do not include the operation promotion notification image. Take control.

  As shown in the execution ratio of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” in “variable effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. 44B, the sub CPU 102a displays “character notice A1”. In the operation effective period Y11 of “Character notice A3”, the state of the effect button 18A is kept in the non-projecting state (first state) and not in the projecting state.

  When executing the “character notice A1”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (a-2-4) of FIG. 62, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period Y11. In the image display device 14, an effect for executing a corresponding effect (notice effect) such as additionally displaying a new character “Character a2-1” in addition to the already displayed “Character a1”. Take control.

  When executing the “character notice A2”, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period Y11. The device 14 performs effect control for executing the corresponding effect (notice effect) such as additionally displaying “Character a2-2” different from “Character a2-1”.

  When executing the “character notice A3”, as shown in FIG. 45B, the sub CPU 102a displays an image based on the press of the effect button 18A once during the operation effective period Y11. The device 14 performs effect control for executing a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as “Character a2-1” and “Character a2-3” which are different from “Character a2-2” are additionally displayed.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a does not set the operation valid period Y11 when executing “character notice A4” and “character notice A5”. That is, in “Character notice A4” and “Character notice A5”, the operation promotion notification images such as (a-2-2) and (a-2-3) in FIG. At the timing, effect control for executing a notice effect in which a new character is additionally displayed is performed. The notice effects of “character notice A4” and “character notice A5” are effects equivalent to the corresponding effects described above.

  When executing the “character notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image in which “character a2-4” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 45 (b). Effect control for executing the notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  When executing the “character notice A5”, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image in which “character a2-5” (not shown) is added at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. 45 (b). Effect control for executing the notice effect (corresponding effect) is performed.

  In the period (a-3) of “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and “character a3 (child A)”. The effect control for executing the effect of displaying the effect image of the reach effect appearing on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-3), the sub CPU 102a first stops the special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same two numerical values and “character a3 (A child)”. "Is performed, control for causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (a-3-1) of FIG.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W11 for executing the specific effect in the “super reach A1-1”. In the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process in step S1311-1. When the specific effect is executed, the effect button 18A is changed from the state of FIG. 72A to the state of FIG. 72B to vibrate, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the specific effect is performed in the period (a-3), but is not limited to this. For example, the specific effect is performed in the period (a-1), the period (a-2), and the period (a-4). The specific effect execution period W11 may be set.

  Further, the sub CPU 102a envisages the development to “special reach A1-1”, which is a production with higher reliability than the “super reach A1-1” as a special effect in the “super reach A1-1”. “Development notice A” is executed. “Development notice A” is a notice effect that informs the possibility of executing a jackpot game and gives a sense of expectation that the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot, like “Serial notice A” and “Character notice A”. is there.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A1” to “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in the “variation effect pattern A034” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development notice A6”.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation effective period X12 in which the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is valid in any of the cases of “development notice A1” to “development notice A6” in “super reach A1-1”. Is set (see FIG. 45C).

  In the operation valid period X12, the sub CPU 102a includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. 62 (a-3-2) or (a-3-3). The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “Press the button !!” together with the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image, or the characters “Lever retract!” Together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image. It consists of

  However, the effect image of (a-3-2) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state during the operation effective period X12, and an operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate the protruding button 18A in the protruding state. Contains images.

  On the other hand, the effect image of (a-3-3) includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12.

  As shown in (a-3-4) of FIG. 62, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice A1” based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12. In addition, the second decorative member 17B as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14. Effect control is performed to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.

  When executing the “development notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 45C, is based on the fact that the projecting effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X12. The second decorative member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and an effect image (effect a2) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B is displayed on the image display device 14. Production control for executing the corresponding production (development notice) is performed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice A3”, as shown in FIG. 45C, the image display device 14 is operated based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a3) is performed.

  When executing the “development notice A4”, the sub CPU 102a performs a single pressing operation on the non-projecting effect button 18A during the operation effective period X12 as shown in FIG. 45 (c). Based on this, the second decorative member 17B is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2” and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B is displayed on the image display device 14. Production control is performed to execute the corresponding production (development notice).

  When the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice A5”, as shown in FIG. 45C, the image display device 14 is operated based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X12. The effect control for executing the corresponding effect (development advance notice) such as displaying the effect image (effect a2) is performed.

  When executing the “development notice A6”, the sub CPU 102a performs a single pressing operation on the non-projecting effect button 18A during the operation effective period X12 as shown in FIG. 45 (c). Based on this, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image (effect a3).

In the period (a-4) of “Super Reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. By having the same numerical value, control is performed to display the effect image shown in (a-4) of FIG. 62 in which the three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern A022 (losing))
In the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variable effect pattern A022” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically displays “ A variation effect similar to the variation effect pattern A034 "is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (a-1) from timing T11 to timing T12, and “normal reach A1-1 in the period (a-2) from timing T12 to timing T13. ”Is executed, and effect control for executing the effect in the period (a-3) of“ super reach A1-1 ”from the timing T13 is performed.

  However, in the variation effect “variation effect pattern A022”, the sub CPU 102a stops in the period (a-4) without changing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to the same value as the left symbol and the right symbol. The effect control for displaying the effect image of (A-1) in FIG. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern A038 (first jackpot))
When the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state and “variable effect pattern A038” is selected, the sub CPU 102a starts from timing T21 shown in FIG. 61 (b). Effect control for executing the change effect up to timing T24 is performed.

  FIG. 63 shows an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 61 (b), an effect button 18A, an effect lever 19A, a first decorative member 17A, and a second decorative member 17B.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1) from the timing T21 to the timing T22 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern A038”, and the period from the timing T22 to the timing T23 (b -2), “normal reach A1-1” is executed, and then “special reach A1-1” is executed in the period (b-3) and the period (b-4) from timing T23 to timing T24. The production control is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image (b-1-1) corresponding to the effect image (a-1-1) in the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1), The effect image (b-1-2) corresponding to the effect image a-1-2) or the effect image (b-1-3) corresponding to the effect image (a-1-3) is displayed. .

  The effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG. 63 shows the image of the corresponding effect in “Serial notice A2”. When the sub-CPU 102a executes “line notice A2”, the “character a1” is changed to “line a2” (“ Effect control for executing a corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image of (b-1-4) in FIG.

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (b-2), the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (b-2-1) in FIG. 54 corresponding to the effect image of (a-2-1) in FIG. After that, the effect image (b-2-2) corresponding to the effect image (a-2-2) or (b-2-3) corresponding to the effect image (a-2-3) is displayed. To do.

  The effect image shown in (b-2-4) of FIG. 63 shows the image of the corresponding effect in “character notice A2”. When executing the “character notice A2”, the sub CPU 102a adds “character a2-2” based on a single press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period Y21 (b). -2-4) The corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the period (b-3) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays the “character b1 (侍) along with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value. ) "Performs an effect control to display a reach effect effect image ((b-3-1) in FIG. 63) that attempts to capture" character c1 (thief) ".

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W21 for executing the specific effect in the “special reach A1-1”. In the specific effect execution period W11, the sub CPU 102a executes the specific effect of the type determined in the specific effect type determination process in step S1311-1. When the specific effect is executed, the effect button 18A is changed from the state of FIG. 72A to the state of FIG. 72B to vibrate, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  When executing “determined effect A1” in “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X22 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is enabled, as shown in FIG. 61 (b). (See FIG. 45 (d)).

  In the operation effective period X22, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (b-3-3) including the operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. The effect to be executed is executed. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-3), this operation promotion notification image is composed of the characters “Draw!” Together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image.

When executing the “determination effect A1”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (b-3-4) of FIG. 63, is based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X22. In addition, the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operating position 1-1” through the “operating position 1-1”, and “moving position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. In addition, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash d1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

  On the other hand, when executing the “decision effect A2”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X22 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid as shown in FIG. 61 (b) (see FIG. 45 (d)). .

  In the operation effective period X22, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image shown in (b-3-2) including an operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, as shown in FIG. The effect to be executed is executed. As shown in the effect image of (b-3-2), this operation promotion notification image is made up of the characters “Press and hold!” Together with the effect button 18A in the protruding state and the image of the timer gauge.

  Note that the image of the effect button 18A in the image display device 14 may not indicate the state of the effect button 18A in the operation effective period. For example, the image of the effect button 18A in the image display device 14 may indicate a non-protruding state (first state) when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state (second state) during the operation effective period. When the effect button 18A is in the non-projecting state (first state) during the operation valid period, the image of the effect button 18A on the image display device 14 may indicate the protruding state (second state).

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in this “decision effect”. ) Does not work until.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect”. Only move it.
As described above, in the “decision effect” of the variation effect that is selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned below the “operation position 1-1”. Because it is moved to “motion position 1-2”, the big hit determination result is 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than “second big hit” in which the second big hit game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the game is played has been won is informed.

In the period (b-4) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. As a result of the same numerical value, the three special performance symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value, and “batter” b1 in FIG. The effect control which displays the effect image to show on the image display apparatus 14 is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern A026 (losing))
In the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variable effect pattern A026” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically selects “ A variation effect similar to the variation effect pattern A038 "is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (b-1) from timing T21 to timing T22, and “normal reach A1-1 in the period (b-2) from timing T22 to timing T23. ”Is performed, and the effect control for executing the effect during the period (b-3) of“ Special Reach A1-1 ”from the timing T23 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect A1” as “decided effect A” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect A” in “variable effect pattern A026” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of the “decided production A2” is performed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern A026”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A in any case of executing “determination effect A1” and “determination effect A2” of “special reach A1-1”. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbols of the three special effects symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbols and the right symbols, and the state in which “character c1” escapes from “character b1”. By displaying the effect image 63 (B-1), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation production according to the fluctuation production pattern A042 (first jackpot))
When the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and “variable effect pattern A042” is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 102a starts from timing T31 shown in FIG. 61 (c). Production control for executing the production of fluctuation up to timing T35 is performed. FIG. 61 shows the effect image displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG. 61 (c), the effect button 18A, the effect lever 19A, the second decorative member 17B, and the third decorative member 17C.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1) from the timing T31 to the timing T32 in the variation rendering of the “variation presentation pattern A042”, and the period (c from the timing T32 to the timing T33). -2), "normal reach A1-1" is executed, and then "super reach A1-1" is executed in the period (c-3) from timing T33 to timing T34, and the period from timing T34 to timing T35 In (c-4) and period (c-5), effect control is performed so that “special reach A1-1” is executed.

  In the “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1), the sub CPU 102a has the sub CPU 102a (c-1-1) in FIG. 64 corresponding to the effect image in (a-1-1) in FIG. The effect of displaying the effect image on the image display device 14 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “line notice A” as a special effect in the “symbol variation A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Selif notice A” in FIG. 45A according to the execution rate of “Selif notice A” in “Fluctuation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. One of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A5” shown in the special effect information table is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any of “Serif notice A1” to “Serif notice A3” in “symbol variation A1-1”, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), the effect button 18A or the effect lever An operation valid period X31 for validating the operation 19A is set (see FIG. 45A).

  In the operation effective period X31, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image of (c-1-2) or (c-1-3) of FIG. 64 including the operation promotion notification image. To do.

  The effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG. 64 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “Serial notice A3”. When the sub-CPU 102a executes the “line notice A3”, the “character a1” is changed to “line a3” (“ A corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image of (c-1-4) in FIG.

  In the “normal reach A1-1” in the period (c-2), the sub CPU 102a first produces an effect image (c-2-1) in FIG. 64 corresponding to the effect image in (a-2-1) in FIG. Is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In this “normal reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “character notice A” as a special effect.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A1” to “Character notice A” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice A” in “Fluctuation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “character notice A5” is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes any one of “character notice A1” to “character notice A3” as a special effect, the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is effective as shown in FIG. The operation valid period Y31 is set (see FIG. 45B).

  The sub CPU 102a does not execute the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in the operation effective period Y31. That is, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image shown in (c-2-2) or (c-2-3) of FIG. 64 that does not include the operation promotion notification image on the image display device 14 during the operation effective period Y31. Perform the production.

  The effect image shown in (c-2-4) of FIG. 64 shows an image of the corresponding effect in “Character notice A3”. When executing the “character notice A3”, the sub CPU 102a adds “character a2-3” based on a single pressing operation on the effect button 18A during the operation valid period Y31 ( The corresponding effect (notice effect) for displaying the effect image of c-2-4) on the image display device 14 is executed.

  In the “super reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing “development advance notice A” that encourages development to “special reach A1-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice A1” to “development notice A1” to “development notice A” according to the execution ratio of “development notice A” in the “variation effect pattern A042” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development notice A6”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X32 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid in any case of executing “Development notice A1” to “Development notice A6” in “Super reach A1-1” ( FIG. 45 (c)).

  As shown in FIG. 64, the sub CPU 102a includes an operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A (c-3-2) or the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, as shown in FIG. (C-3-3) including the image is displayed on the image display device 14. The operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is composed of the characters “Press the button !!” together with the effect button 18A and the image of the timer gauge. In addition, the operation promotion notification image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is composed of the characters “draw the lever !!” together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image.

  (C-3-4) in FIG. 64 illustrates an example of “development notice A1”. As shown in (c-3-4) of FIG. 64, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice A1” based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X32. In addition, the second decorative member 17B as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 2” to the “operating position 2”, and an effect image (effect a1) for emphasizing the second decorative member 17B in the image display device 14. Effect control is performed to execute the corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying.

  During the “special reach A1-1” period (c-4), the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display “Character b1 (侍) along with two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value. ) "Performs the effect control for displaying the effect image ((c-4-1) of FIG. 64) of the reach effect that tries to catch" Character c1 (Thief) ".

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W31 for executing the specific effect in the “special reach A1-1”. And in order to vibrate production button 18A, it changes from the state of Drawing 72 (a) to the state of Drawing 72 (b), and production button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  In the case of executing the “decision effect A” in the “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X33 for enabling the operation of the effect button 18A, as shown in FIG. 61 (c). (See FIG. 45 (d)).

  In the operation valid period X33, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in FIG. 64, includes the effect image shown in (c-4-2) including the operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or the operation of the effect lever 19A. Effect control for executing an effect of causing the image display device 14 to display the effect image shown in (c-4-3) including the image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the user to perform the operation is performed. This operation promotion notification image is composed of the letters “cush-down!” Together with the projected button 18A and timer gauge image (c-4-2), or the image of the effect lever 19A and timer gauge. It is made up of the characters “Draw!” (C-4-2).

When the “determination effect A1” is executed, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (c-4-4) of FIG. 64, is based on the fact that the tilting operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X33. In addition, the first decorative member 17A as the movable member is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operating position 1-1” through the “operating position 1-1”, and “moving position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. In addition, the image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (decision effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a1).
The moved first decorative member 17A returns to the original “standby position 1”.

  Further, when executing the “decided effect A2”, the sub CPU 102a performs the pressing operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X33, based on (c-4-4) in FIG. As shown, the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from “standby position 1” through “operation position 1-1” to “motion position 1-” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. The image display device 14 performs effect control for executing a corresponding effect (determined effect) such as displaying a flash effect image (flash a2).

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation position) in this “decision effect”. ) Does not work until.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect”. Only move it.
As described above, in the “decision effect” of the variation effect that is selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is positioned below the “operation position 1-1”. Because it is moved to “motion position 1-2”, the big hit determination result is 16R (round), which is more advantageous to the player than “second big hit” in which the second big hit game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the game is played has been won is informed.

In the period (c-5) of “special reach A1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. The same numerical value is used to stop the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value, and FIG. 64 (c-5) shows that “Character b1” captures “Character c1”. The effect control which displays the effect image to show on the image display apparatus 14 is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern A030 (losing))
In the low-probability gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state, when the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variable effect pattern A030” is selected, the sub CPU 102a basically selects “ A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern A042” is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation A1-1” in the period (c-1) from timing T31 to timing T32, and “normal reach A1-1 in the period (c-2) from timing T32 to timing T33. ”,“ Super Reach A1-1 ”from timing T33 to timing T34, and production control for executing the production of the period (c-4) of“ special reach A1-1 ”from timing T34. I do.

The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect A1” as “decided effect A” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect A” in “variable effect pattern A030” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control for executing any one of the “decided production A2” is performed.
However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern A030”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decoration member 17A from “standby position 1” in any case of executing “decision effect A1” or “decision effect A2”. Do not move to the position (operating position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbols of the three special effects symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbols and the right symbols, and the state in which “character c1” escapes from “character b1”. Effect control for displaying 64 (C-1) effect images is performed. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Specific example of variation production in production mode B)
Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode B set in the first to thirty times of the variation in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state will be described.
FIG. 65A shows the temporal flow of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H39H” or “E7H39H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B019”. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 65 (b) shows the variation effect time series executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3AH” or “E7H3AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B021”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow. FIG. 65 (c) shows the time of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H3BH” or “E7H3BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern B023”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern B019 (first jackpot))
When the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and “variation effect pattern B019” is selected in the first to thirtyth variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. The effect control for executing the changing effect from the timing T401 to the timing T403 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 66 shows an effect image and an effect button 18A to be displayed on the image display device 14 in the variation effect shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402, and the period (d-3) from the timing T402 to the timing T403. In the period (d-4), effect control for executing “Special Character Reach B1-1” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a controls an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (d-1) of the “symbol change B3-1”.

  In the period (d-1) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays an effect image (d-1) of FIG. 66 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change on the image display device 14. To control.

  Then, during the period (d-2) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect design (left design) in which the special effect design (right design) to be stopped is stopped first. The effect images of (d-2-1) or (d-2-2) and (d-2-3) in the reach of FIG. Production control to be displayed on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for executing “development notice B” that envisages development to “special character reach B1-1” as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B1”, “development notice B1”, “development notice B” according to the execution ratio of “development notice B” in “variation effect pattern B019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Production control is performed to execute any one of “Development Notice B2”.

  The sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, in the “symbol change B3-1” in any case of executing “development notice B1” and “development notice B2”. The operation valid period X41 is set. In the operation valid period X41, the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) previously stopped and the reach state is generated, such as whether or not a reach state occurs. Set during execution.

  In the operation effective period X41, the sub CPU 102a operates the effect image (d-2-1) including the operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or the operation of the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. The effect which displays the effect image (d-2-2) containing the image of a promotion alerting | reporting on the image display apparatus 14 is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification of “Development Notice B1” is composed of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image (d-2-1) and “Deletion Notice B2”. The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of characters (d-2-2) including the effect lever 19A and the image of the timer gauge and the characters “draw the lever!”.

  The effect image (d-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is in the protruding state during the operation effective period X41 of the “development notice B2”, and the operation to the protruding effect button 18A is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification for prompting is included.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the “development notice B1”, the special effect design of the reach-rolling effect is performed based on the fact that the push-down effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X41. An effect for executing a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 66) having an effect image (effect b1 (light blue)) superimposed on the image display device 14 Take control.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the “development notice B2”, the effect image (overlaid on the special effect design of reach reach effect is superimposed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X41. Effect control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (development notice) such as displaying an effect image ((d-2-3) in FIG. 66) having an effect b2 (orange) on the image display device 14.

  FIG. 66 (d-2-3) shows an example of “development notice B1”. When executing the “development notice B1”, the sub CPU 102a performs one pressing operation on the projecting effect button 18A during the operation effective period X41, based on (d-2 of FIG. 66). As shown in -3), a corresponding effect (development notice) is executed in which an effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on the special effect symbol of reach reach effect.

  Further, in the “development notice B2”, the sub CPU 102a has a reach that is different from (d-2-3) in FIG. 70 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X41. Effect control is performed to execute an advance notice (corresponding effect), such as displaying an effect image (effect b2) superimposed on a special effect symbol of a roaring effect.

  In the period (d-3) of “Special Character Reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and the special character “Character s1 (warrior)”. 66 is displayed on the image display device 14 with the effect images of (d-3-1), (d-3-2), and (d-4) in FIG. 66 of the content of fighting the special character “character p1 (enemy warrior)” Perform production control to be displayed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W41 for executing the specific effect in the “special character reach B1-1”. And in order to vibrate production button 18A, it changes from the state of Drawing 72 (a) to the state of Drawing 72 (b), and production button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

Then, during the period (d-4) of “Special Character Reach B1-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (the middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. FIG. 66 (d-4) shows that “Character s1” has defeated “Character p1” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. The effect control to display the effect image shown in FIG.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern B013 (losing))
When the jackpot determination result is “losing” and “variation effect pattern B013” is selected in the first to thirtyth variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically selects FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern B019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (d-1) and the period (d-2) from the timing T401 to the timing T402, and the period (d-3) from the timing T402 to the timing T403. ) And period (d-4), “special character reach B1-1” is executed. Moreover, when performing a specific effect, a specific effect is performed during execution of "special character reach B1-1."

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B019”, the sub CPU 102a does not have the same value as the left symbol and the right symbol in the middle symbols of the three special effect symbols in “special character reach B1-1”. Effect control is performed to display an effect image (D-1) in a state where “Character s1” is overthrown by “Character p1”. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the variation effect pattern B021 (first jackpot))
When the jackpot determination result is “first jackpot” and “variation effect pattern B021” is selected in the first to thirty-time fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. Effect control for executing a fluctuating effect from timing T501 to timing T503 shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2) from the timing T501 to the timing T502 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern B021”. In the period (e-2) and the period (e-3) up to the timing T503, effect control for executing “special character reach B2-1” is performed.

  In the period (e-1) of “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display effect images that change a plurality of special effect symbols.

  In the period (e-1) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first causes the image display device 14 to display the effect image (e-1) of FIG. 67 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change. The production control is performed.

  Then, during the period (e-2) of the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect design (left design) in which the special effect design (right design) to be stopped is stopped first. Display of the effect images of (e-2-1) or (e-2-2) and (e-2-3) of reach reach in FIG. Production control for display on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute “development notice B” that envisages development to “special character reach B2-1” as a special effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice B1”, “development notice B1” and “development notice B” according to the execution ratio of “development notice B” in the “variation effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control is performed so as to execute any one of “evolution notice B2”.

  The sub CPU 102a validates the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, which is the operation means, in the “symbol change B3-1” in any case of executing “development notice B1” and “development notice B2”. An operation valid period X51 is set. In the operation effective period X51, the special effect design (the right design) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special production design (the left design) that has been stopped first, and the reach state is generated. Set during execution.

  In the operation effective period X51, the sub CPU 102a operates an effect image (e-2-1) including an operation promotion notification image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A or an operation of the effect lever 19A as shown in FIG. An effect of causing the image display device 14 to display an effect image of the effect image (e-2-2) including the image of the promotion notification is executed. The image of the operation promotion notification of “Development Notice B1” is composed of the characters “Press the button !!” together with the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image (e-2-1). The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters “Erase lever!” (E-2-2) together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  However, the effect image of (e-2-1) is displayed when the effect button 18A is set to the protruding state during the operation effective period X51 of the “development notice B1”, and the operation to the protruding effect button 18A is performed. The image of the operation promotion notification for prompting is included.

  FIG. 67 (e-2-3) shows an example of “development notice B1”. When executing “development notice B1”, the sub CPU 102a performs (e-2) (e-2) in FIG. 67 based on the pressing operation performed once on the projecting effect button 18A during the operation effective period X51. As shown in 3), control is performed so as to execute a corresponding effect (development advance notice) in which an effect image (effect b1) is displayed on the image display device 14 so as to be superimposed on a special effect design of reach reach effect.

  Further, in the “development notice B2”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (e-2-3) in FIG. 67, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X51. Then, control is performed so as to execute a corresponding effect (development notice) such that the effect image (effect b2) is displayed on the image display device 14 over the special effect design of the reach effect.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special performance symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (e-3) of the “special character reach B2-1” and the special character “character s2 (warrior)”. 67 performs effect control for causing the image display device 14 to display an effect image such as (e-3-1) in FIG. 67 of the content of fighting the special character “Character p2 (enemy warrior)”.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W51 for executing the specific effect in the “special character reach B2-1”. And in order to vibrate production button 18A, it changes from the state of Drawing 72 (a) to the state of Drawing 72 (b), and production button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a performs control so that “decision effect B” is executed in “special character reach B2-1”. The sub CPU 102a controls to execute “determined effect B” as a special effect in “special character reach B2-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control is performed to execute one of the “decision effects B2”.

  (E-3-2) of FIG. 67 shows an example of “decision effect B1”. When executing the “decision effect B1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X52 in which the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means is valid in the “special character reach B2-1”. In the operation effective period X52, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-2) in FIG. 67) including an operation promotion notification image that prompts the user to operate the projecting effect button 18A.

  The sub CPU 102a, as shown in (e-3-4) of FIG. 67, is based on the fact that the press button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X52 in the “determination effect B1”. In addition, the effect image of “flash b1” is displayed on the image display device 14, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from the “standby position 1” to the “operation position 1-1” on the front surface of the image display device 14. A “decision effect” (corresponding effect) is executed, such as moving to the lower position “operation position 1-2”.

  (E-3-3) in FIG. 67 illustrates an example of “decision effect B2”. When the “determination effect B2” is executed, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X52 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A as the operation means is valid in the “special character reach B2-1”. In the operation effective period X52, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image ((e-3-3) in FIG. 67) including an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation to the effect lever 19A.

  The sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of “flash b2” on the image display device 14 based on the fact that the tilt operation is performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X52 in the “determination effect B2”. The first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1” to “operation position 1-2” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. The content “decision effect” (corresponding effect) is executed.

In the period (e-4) of “special character reach B2-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is being changed is stopped and displayed first. As shown in FIG. 67 (e-4), the three special performance symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value, and “Character s2” defeats “Character p2”. The effect control for displaying the effect image to be displayed on the image display device 14 is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

  Note that, in the variation effect executed when the determination result of the big hit determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in this “decision effect B”. To the position).

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in this “decision effect B”. Only move up to.
As described above, in the “decision effect B” of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is placed below the “operation position 1-1”. Therefore, the determination result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the jackpot game is played is informed.

Then, during the period (e-3) of “Special Character Reach B2-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) on which the special effect symbol (the middle symbol) being changed is stopped and displayed first. (E-4) in FIG. 67 showing that “Character s2” defeated “Character p2” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to fluctuation effect pattern B015 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variation effect pattern B015” is selected in the first to thirtyth variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically selects FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern B021” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (e-1) and the period (e-2) from the timing T501 to the timing T502, and the period (e-3) from the timing T502 to the timing T503. ) And the period (e-4), the effect control is performed so that “special character reach B2-1” is executed. Further, when executing a specific effect, the specific effect is executed during the execution of “special character reach B2-1”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B015” set in the special effect type determination table in FIG. Control to execute one of the “decision effects B2” is performed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B015”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member in any case of executing “determination effect B1” and “determination effect B2” of “special character reach B2-1”. 17A is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without the middle symbols of the three special effect symbols having the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and “Character s2” is defeated by “Character p2”. Effect control for displaying the effect image of (E-1) in FIG. 67 is performed. This notifies the player that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the variation effect pattern B023 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and “change effect pattern B023” is selected in the first to thirty times of the fluctuation in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. ) To execute a fluctuating effect from timing T601 to timing T603.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern B023”, and from the timing T602. In the period (f-3) and the period (f-4) up to the timing T603, presentation control is performed so that “special character reach B3-1” is executed.

  In the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B023”, the effect contents of “symbol variation B3-1” in period (f-1) and period (f-2) from timing T601 to timing T602 are “variation effect pattern B019”. It is the same as the production content of “symbol fluctuation B3-1”.

  In the sub CPU 102a, the operation effective period X61 shown in FIG. 65 (c) corresponds to the operation effective period X41 shown in FIG. 65 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value during the period (f-3) of the “special character reach B3-1” and the special character “character s3 (warrior)”. "(Not shown) performs effect control so that an effect image of content fighting the special character" Character p3 (enemy warrior) "(not shown) is displayed on the image display device 14.

  The sub CPU 102a performs control to execute “determined effect B” as a special effect in “special character reach B3-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B023” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects B2” is executed. Note that the sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X62 as shown in FIG. 65 (c) in the “decision effect B1” and “decision effect B2”. Moreover, the specific effect execution period W61 shown in FIG. 65C corresponds to the specific effect execution period W41 shown in FIG.

In the period (f-4) of “special character reach B3-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. As a result, the image display device 14 displays an effect image informing that “Character s3” has defeated “Character p3” while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned with the same numerical value. Control to display on the screen.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern B017 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variation effect pattern B017” is selected in the first to thirtyth variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically selects “variation”. Effect control is performed so as to execute the same variation effect as the effect pattern B023 ". That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation B3-1” in the period (f-1) and the period (f-2) from the timing T601 to the timing T602, and the period (f-3) from the timing T602 to the timing T603. ) And effect control to execute “Special Character Reach B3-1” in the period (f-4). When executing the specific effect, the specific effect execution period W61 is set and the specific effect is executed when the “special character reach B3-1” is being executed. Then, in the specific effect execution period W61, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 72A to the state of FIG. 72B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect B1” as “decided effect B” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect B” in “variable effect pattern B017” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects B2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern B017”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member in any case of executing “determination effect B1” and “determination effect B2” of “special character reach B3-1”. 17A is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbols of the three special effect symbols to be the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and “Character s3” is defeated by “Character p3”. By displaying the effect image (not shown), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Specific example of variation production in production mode C)
Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode C set in the variations 31 to 74th in the high probability game state and the short time game state will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 68 (a) shows the temporal flow of the variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H59H” or “E7H59H” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C019”. It is a figure for demonstrating. Further, FIG. 68B shows the time of variation effect executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5AH” or “E7H5AH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C021”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow. FIG. 68 (c) shows the temporal effect of the variation effect that is executed when the sub CPU 102a receives the variation pattern designation command “E6H5BH” or “E7H5BH” from the main control board 101 and determines the “variation effect pattern C023”. It is a figure for demonstrating a general flow.

(Variation effect related to variation effect pattern C019 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and “change effect pattern C019” is selected in the variations 31 to 74th in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. The control for executing the fluctuating effect from the timing T701 to the timing T703 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 69 shows an effect image, an effect button 18A, and a first decorative member 17A displayed on the image display device 14 in the changing effect shown in FIG. 68 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and the period (g-3) from the timing T702 to the timing T703. In the period (g-4), “attack reach C1-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes an effect of displaying an effect image for changing a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 during the period (g-1) of the “symbol change C3-1”.

  In the period (g-1) of the “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a first displays an effect image (g-1) of FIG. 69 in which a plurality of special effect symbols change on the image display device 14. Execute.

  Then, during the period (g-2) of the “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) in which the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. The effect images of (g-2-1) or (g-2-2) and (g-2-3) in the reach of FIG. Control to display on the device 14 is performed.

  In the “symbol variation C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes “development notice C” as a special effect, encouraging the development to “attack reach C1-1”. The sub CPU 102a selects “development notice C1”, “development notice C1”, “development notice C1” according to the execution ratio of “development notice C” in the “variation effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Any one of “Development notice C2” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs the operation effective period X71 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means in the “symbol change C3-1” regardless of whether the “development notice C1” or the “development notice C2” is executed. Set. In the operation effective period X71, a special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) stopped first, and a reach state effect such as whether or not a reach state occurs. Set during execution.

  In the operation effective period X71, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation prompting the operation of the effect image (g-2-1) or the effect lever 19A including the image of the operation promotion notification prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, as shown in FIG. The effect which displays the effect image of the effect image (g-2-2) containing the image of a promotion alerting | reporting on the image display apparatus 14 is performed. The operation advance notification image of “Development Notice B1” is composed of the effect button 18A and the timer gauge image (g-2-1) with the letters “Press the button!”, And “Development Notice B2” The image of the operation promotion notification is composed of the characters “give the lever!” (G-2-2) together with the image of the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the “development notice C1”, the special effect design of the reach roll effect is performed based on the fact that the push-down effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X71. A corresponding effect (development advance notice) is executed such that an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 69) having an effect image (effect c1 (green)) is superimposed on the image display device 14.

  When executing the “development notice C2”, the sub CPU 102a superimposes the effect image (with the special effect design of reach reach production on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X71 on the effect lever (A). A corresponding effect (development advance notice) is executed such that an effect image ((g-2-3) in FIG. 69) having an effect c2 (red) is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In the period (g-3) of “attack reach C1-1”, the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value and the character “character b1 (１)” is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as (g-3-1) in FIG. 69 on the image display device 14 such that the enemy sprints and attacks the enemy. When executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed by setting the specific effect execution period W71 when the “attack reach C1-1” is being executed. Then, in the specific effect execution period W71, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 72A to the state of FIG. 72B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C1-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  69 (g-3-2) and (g-3-4) show examples of “decision effect C1”. When executing the “decision effect C1”, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X72 in which the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means is valid in “attack reach C1-1”. In the operation valid period X72, an operation promotion notification (notification promotion image made up of the characters “Press and hold!” Together with the projection button 18A in the protruding state and the timer gauge image) that prompts the player to operate the performance button 18A is executed.

  In the “determination effect C1”, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect image of “flash c1” on the image display device 14 based on one press operation on the effect button 18A during the operation effective period X72. Is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operating position 1-1” as a movable member, and the “motion position 1-2” is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. “Decisive effect” (corresponding effect) with the content of moving to “” is executed.

  FIG. 69 (g-3-3) shows an example of “decision effect C2”. When the “decision effect C2” is executed, the sub CPU 102a sets an operation valid period X72 in which the operation of the effect lever 19A as the operation means is valid in “attack reach C1-1”. In the operation valid period X72, an operation promotion notification (notification promotion image made up of characters “Draw!” Together with the effect lever 19A and the timer gauge image) is executed to urge the player to operate the effect lever 19A.

  In the “decision effect C2”, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect image (not shown) of “flash c2” on the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X72. ) And the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from “standby position 1” via “operation position 1-1” to “motion position 1” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. “Decisive effect” (corresponding effect) with a content such as “-2” is executed.

  In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, the sub CPU 102a moves the first decorative member 17A from the “standby position 1” to another position (operation) in the “decision effect C”. To the position).

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “decision effect C”. Only move up to.
As described above, in the “decision effect C” of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is placed below the “operation position 1-1”. Therefore, the determination result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the jackpot game is played is informed.

Then, in the period (g-4) of the “attack reach C1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) in which the special effect symbol (middle symbol) being changed is first stopped and displayed. (G-4) in FIG. 62 which notifies that “Character b1” “destroyed” the enemy while stopping the three special performance symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same numerical value. ) Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern C013 (losing))
When the big hit determination result is “losing” and “fluctuation effect pattern C013” is selected in the 31st to 74th fluctuations in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically performs FIG. A variation effect similar to the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (g-1) and the period (g-2) from the timing T701 to the timing T702, and in the period (g-3) from the timing T702, “ The attack reach C1-1 "is executed. When executing the specific effect, the specific effect is executed by setting the specific effect execution period W71 when the “attack reach C1-1” is being executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C013” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C019”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of whether the “decision effect C1” or “decision effect C2” of the “attack reach C1-1” is executed. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies that the “character b1” has failed in the attack. By displaying the image (G-1), it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the variation effect pattern C021 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern C021” is selected in the 31st to 74th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. ) Is performed from timing T801 to timing T803.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h−1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern C021”, and from the timing T802. In the period (h-3) and period (h-4) up to timing T803, “attack reach C2-1” is executed.

  In the variation production of the “variation production pattern C021”, the production contents of the “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h-1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802 are “variation production pattern C019”. It is the same as the production content of “symbol variation C3-1”. The operation effective period X81 shown in FIG. 68 (b) corresponds to the operation effective period X71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

  During the “attack reach C2-1” period (h-3), the sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value, and the “character q2 (samurai)” is running. Then, a control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14 with a content such as making an attack. The specific effect execution period W81 shown in FIG. 68 (b) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” as a special effect during the period (h-3) of “attack reach C2-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C021” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period X82 as shown in FIG. 68B in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C021”.

Then, during the period (h-4) of “attack reach C2-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is first stopped and displayed. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that “Character q2” has “defeated” the enemy. Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to variation production pattern C015 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variation effect pattern C015” is selected at the 31st to 74th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically performs FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C021” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (h−1) and the period (h-2) from the timing T801 to the timing T802, and in the period (h-3) from the timing T802, “ Execute “Attack Reach C2-1”. When executing a specific effect, the specific effect execution period W81 is set and the specific effect is executed when “attack reach C2-1” is being executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C015” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern C015”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decorative member 17A regardless of which of “decision effect C1” and “decision effect C2” of “attack reach C1-1” is executed. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and also notifies that “Character q2” has failed in the attack. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the variation effect pattern C023 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern C023” is selected in the variations 31 to 74th in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. ) Is performed from timing T901 to timing T903.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i−1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902 in the variation rendering of the “variation rendering pattern C023”, and from the timing T902. “Attack reach C3-1” is executed in the period (i-3) and the period (i-4) until the timing T903.

In the variation production of “variation production pattern C023”, the production contents of “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2) from timing T901 to timing T902 are “variation production pattern C019”. It is the same as the production content of “symbol variation C3-1”.
That is, in the “symbol fluctuation C3-1” in the period (i-1) and the period (i-2), the sub CPU 102a performs the effect image (i-1) and the effect image (i-2) in FIG. Is displayed.
The operation effective period X91 shown in FIG. 68 (c) corresponds to the operation effective period X71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the two special performance symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) having the same numerical value during the “attack reach C3-1” period (i-3), and “Character q3 (Ronin)” sprints. Then, a control is performed to display an effect image (not shown) on the image display device 14 with a content such as making an attack. The specific effect execution period W91 shown in FIG. 68 (c) corresponds to the specific effect execution period W71 shown in FIG. 68 (a).

The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect C” as a special effect in “attack reach C3-1”. The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C023” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.
When executing the “decision effect C1” in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C023”, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period X92 as shown in FIG.

Then, during the period (i-4) of “attack reach C3-1”, the sub CPU 102a has two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) in which the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) is first stopped and displayed. ), The three special effect symbols are stopped in a state where they are aligned to the same value, and an effect image (not shown) notifying that “Character q3” has “defeated” the enemy. Is displayed on the image display device 14.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.
(Variation production related to variation production pattern C017 (losing))
If the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and “variation effect pattern C017” is selected in the 31st to 74th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a basically operates as shown in FIG. A variation effect similar to the “variation effect pattern C023” shown in FIG. That is, the sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation C3-1” in the period (i−1) and the period (i-2) from the timing T901 to the timing T902, and the “CPU in the period (i-3) from the timing T902” “Attack Reach C3-1” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect C1” as “decided effect C” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect C” in “variable effect pattern C017” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects C2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern C017”, the sub CPU 102a executes the first decoration member 17A regardless of whether the “decision effect C1” or the “decision effect C2” of the “attack reach C3-1” is executed. Is not operated from “standby position 1” to another position (operation position). Then, the sub CPU 102a stops without causing the middle symbol of the three special effect symbols to have the same numerical values as the left symbol and the right symbol, and notifies that the “character q3” has failed in the attack. By displaying the image, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

Next, a specific example of the variation effect of the variation effect pattern in the effect mode D set in the 75th to 84th variation in the high probability game state and the short time game state will be described.
In the effect mode D, the sub CPU 102a performs effect control so as to execute a change effect having a janken effect with the content that two characters perform “Janken” as the change effect.

  FIG. 70A is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D019”. FIG. 70B is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D022”. FIG. 70C is a diagram for explaining the temporal flow of the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D25”.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern D019 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern D019” is selected at the 75th to 84th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. Effect control for executing a fluctuating effect from timing T1001 to timing T1003 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 71, the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 14 in the change effect shown to Fig.70 (a), the effect button 18A, the effect lever 19A, and the 1st decoration member 17A are shown.

  The sub CPU 102a displays “symbol variation D1-1” in a period (j−1) to a period (j-3) from timing T1001 to timing T1002, and a period (j−4) from timing T1002 to timing T1003. Production control is performed so that “Janken Reach D1-1 (Win)” is executed in the period (j-5).

  In the period (j-1) of “symbol variation D1-1”, the sub CPU 102a displays the effect image of (j-1) in FIG. 71 that changes a plurality of special effect symbols, and also in the period (j-2). Then, the effect control is performed so that the effect image of (j-2) in FIG. 71 in which the character display “Janken wins twice !!” is superimposed on the display image of the special effect symbol is displayed on the image display device 14.

  During the “symbol variation D1-1” period (j-3), the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped is stopped first. 71 and (j-3-) in FIG. 71, which shows that the character “Friendly r1” who is an ally character and “Character u1” who is an opponent character perform the first round of junken together with the reach of whether or not to perform. 1) or (j-3-2) and (j-3-3) effect images are displayed on the image display device 14 for effect control.

  As shown in the effect images of (j-3-1), (j-3-2), and (j-3-3) in FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a displays “Janken Reach D1- Execute “Development Notice D” encouraging the development to “1 (win)”. The sub CPU 102a selects “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in the “variation effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “evolution notice D2” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A as the operation means during the period (j-3), regardless of whether the advance notice D1 or the advance notice D2 is executed as the special effect. A valid operation valid period X101 is set.

  In the operation effective period X101, the sub CPU 102a performs control so as to execute an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. In the operation effective period X101, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A to the protruding state (second state) as shown in (j-3-1) of FIG. Operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate 18A is controlled, and if it is “Development advance notice D2,” operation promotion notification for urging the user to operate the effect lever 19A as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. Control to execute.

  When executing the “development notice D1”, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A to the protruding state (second state) in the operation valid period X101 and also shows (j-3-1) in FIG. As described above, from the image of the projecting effect button 18A and the timer gauge, and the characters "Press!" Together with the effect image of "Character r1" and "Character u1" being "Janken" in the introduction part of Jeanken. The effect which displays the effect image of the operation promotion notification which urges operation of the effect button 18A is displayed on the image display device 14 is executed.

On the other hand, when executing the “development notice D2”, the sub CPU 102a displays “character r1” and “character u1” in the operation valid period X101 as shown in (j-3-2) of FIG. In addition to the effect image of the appearance of “Janken” in the introduction part of Janken, the effect lever 19A and the image of the timer gauge and the effect image of the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A consisting of the letters “Close!” The effect displayed on the display device 14 is executed.
Note that the corresponding sound may be output from the sound output device 15 when the effect image of the operation promotion notification is displayed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes the “development notice D1”, the special effect design of reach reach effect is performed based on the fact that the push-down effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X101. In addition, the effect image (effect j1 (blue)) of the effect image (effect d1 (blue)) is superimposed on the effect image of the content that “character r1” wins “character u1” in the first round of Janken ((j-3-3 in FIG. 65). )) Is displayed on the image display device 14 and a corresponding effect (development notice) is executed.

  When executing the “development notice D2”, the sub CPU 102a performs a special effect design of reach-reaching production and the first round of Janken based on the tilting operation performed on the production lever 19A during the operation effective period X101. In FIG. 71, an effect image ((j-3-3) in FIG. 71) having an effect image (effect d2 (yellow)) is overlaid on the effect image having the content that “character r1” wins over “character u1”. The corresponding effect (development notice) is displayed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W101 in the period (j-4) of “Janken Reach D1-1” and executes the specific effect. Then, in the specific effect execution period W101, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 72A to the state of FIG. 72B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  As shown in (j-4-1) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a performs two identical operations in “Janken Reach D1-1 (win)” in the period (j-4) of “Janken Reach D1-1”. When numerical special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) are stopped and displayed, “character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice D” in the “Change effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Character notice D3” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation to validate the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A during the period (j-4), regardless of which of “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” is executed as the special effect. An effective period Y101 is set. In the operation valid period X101, the sub CPU 102a issues an operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A as shown in (j-4-1) and (j-4-2) of FIG. Do not execute.

  In “Character notice D1”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (j-4-3) of FIG. 71, is based on the fact that the presentation button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X101. Control is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying “Character d1” as a support character of “Character r1” on the image display device 14.

  In “Character notice D2”, the sub CPU 102a selects “Character d2”, which is the support character of “Character r1”, based on the fact that the presentation button 18A is pressed once during the operation valid period X101. Control to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as displaying on the image display device 14 is performed.

  In “Character notice D3”, the sub CPU 102a displays “Character d3”, which is the support character of “Character r1”, based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation valid period X101. 14 is performed to execute a notice effect (corresponding effect) such as that displayed on the screen 14.

  Then, after executing this “character notice D”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in (j-4-4), (j-4-5), and (j-4-6) in FIG. Effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image with the content that “r1” and “character u1” perform the second round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D” as a special effect in the effect of the second round of janken, as shown in the effect images of (j-4-4) and (j-4-5) in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D019” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” as a special effect, the operation effective period during which the operation of the effect button 18A is valid during the period (j-4) of “Janken Reach D1-1 (win)”. X102 is set. Then, as shown in (j-4-4) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a sets “character r1” and “character u1” to “go”, “choki”, “par” in the operation effective period X102. In the production image of the state before any of the above, the operation promotion for prompting the operation to the projection button 18A in the projecting state, which includes the projection button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display of “Press!” Production control is performed so as to display a notification image.

  In the “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a makes a “winning” in the image display device 14 based on the fact that the effect button 18A is pressed once during the operation effective period X102. d1 ”is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A is moved as a movable member from the“ standby position 1 ”to the“ operation position 1-1 ”, which is the lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. A “decision effect” (corresponding effect) with the content of moving to the operation position 1-2 ”is executed.

  Further, when the “determination effect D2” is executed as the special effect, the sub CPU 102a performs an operation to validate the operation of the effect lever 19A during the period (j-4) of the “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”. An effective period X102 is set. Then, as shown in (j-4-5) of FIG. 71, the sub CPU 102a sets “character r1” and “character u1” to “go”, “choki”, “par” in the operation valid period X102. In the effect image of the state before any one of the above is displayed, an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation to the effect lever 19A, which includes the effect lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display of “Close!” Is displayed. The production control is performed as described above.

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a performs “tilt d2” that wins the big hit in the image display device 14 based on the tilting operation performed on the effect lever 19A during the operation effective period X102. An effect image is displayed, and the first decorative member 17A as a movable member is moved from “standby position 1” through “operation position 1-1” to “motion position 1” which is a lower position on the front surface of the image display device 14. “Decisive effect” (corresponding effect) with a content such as “-2” is executed.

In the variation effect executed when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “second jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is moved from “standby position 1” to “operation position 1-1” in the “decision effect D”. Only move up to.
As described above, in the “decision effect D” of the variation effect selected when the determination result of the jackpot determination is “first jackpot”, the first decorative member 17A is placed below the “operation position 1-1”. Therefore, the determination result of the jackpot is the first of 16R (round) which is advantageous to the player than the “second jackpot” in which the second jackpot game of 4R (round) is performed. The fact that the “first jackpot” in which the jackpot game is played is informed.

After the execution of “decision effect D” in the period (j-4) of “Janken reach D1-1 (win)”, the sub CPU 102a, as shown in the effect image (j-4-7) in FIG. After displaying the effect image of “Character r1” winning “Character u1” by “Character r1” issuing “Cho” and “Character u1” issuing “Par” in the round, the period (j −5) As shown in the effect image (j-5) of FIG. 71, the special effect design in change (middle design) is the same as the two special effect designs (the left design and the right design) that were previously stopped and displayed. 71, the effect control for displaying the effect image of (j-5) in FIG. 71 on the image display device 14 that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are aligned to the same value is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation effect related to fluctuation effect pattern D010 (losing))
In the case of the 75-84th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, when the big hit determination result is “losing” and “variation effect pattern D010” is selected, the sub CPU 102a changes to FIG. The variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D019” shown is executed. In other words, the sub CPU 102a determines that the “symbol variation D1-1” in the period (j−1) to the period (j-3) from the timing T1001 to the timing T1002, that is, the “character r1” becomes the “character u1” in the first round. Control is performed so as to execute “Janken Reach D1-1 (losing)” after executing the variation effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning by janken. In “Janken Reach D1-1 (losing)”, “Character r1” is “Character u1” in the same manner as the fluctuating effect in the period (j-4) from the timing T1002 of “Janken Reach D1-1 (winning)”. And reach production including production to perform the second round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “decided effect D” as a special effect in the period (j-4) in the same way as the “variable effect pattern D019” in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D010”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D010” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” of the “variable effect pattern D010”.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D010”, the sub CPU 102a executes “determination effect D1” in “Janken reach D1-1 (losing)” and then, as shown in FIG. 71 (J-1). In addition, in the second round of Janken, after “Character r1” gave “Choki” and “Character u1” gave “Goo”, an image of “Character r1” losing to “Character u1” was displayed. As shown in the effect image (J-2) in FIG. 71, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing does not have the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that have been stopped and displayed first. Thus, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation effect related to the fluctuation effect pattern D022 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and the “variable effect pattern D022” is selected in the 75th to 84th variations in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. ) Is performed from timing T1101 to timing T1103.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation D2-1” in the period (k−1) to the period (k-3) from the timing T1101 to the timing T1102, and the period (k−4) from the timing T1102 to the timing T1103 In the period (k-5), “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)” is executed.

  In the “symbol variation D2-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes the same effect as the “symbol variation D1-1”. That is, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image that fluctuates a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 in the period (k-1). In the period of “symbol variation D2-1” (k-2), an effect image (not shown) in which the character display “Janken 3 wins !!” is superimposed on the variation display of the special effect symbol is an image. Production control is performed so as to display on the display device 14.

  During the “symbol variation D2-1” period (k-3), the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped first stops. Along with the reach of whether or not to perform, an effect image (not shown) of the content that “Character r1” as the ally character and “Character u1” as the opponent character perform the first round of janken Production control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub-CPU 102a executes “development notice D” for encouraging the development to “Janken Reach D2-1 (win)” in this reach production effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in the “variation effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “evolution notice D2” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation that validates the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means in the period (k-3), regardless of whether the advance notice D1 or the advance notice D2 is executed as the special effect. An effective period X111 is set.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays the special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)” in the period (k-4) of “Janken Reach D2-1”. Then, “Character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “Character notice D” in the “Change effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Character notice D3” is executed.

  When executing the specific effect, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W111 for executing the specific effect in the period (k-4). Then, in the specific effect execution period W111, in order to vibrate the effect button 18A, the state is changed from the state of FIG. 72A to the state of FIG. 72B, and the effect button 18A is vibrated at high speed or low speed. When outputting an image, an effect image of the effect button 18A that vibrates is displayed on the image display device 14 as shown in FIG. Furthermore, in the case of outputting sound, a pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A is output from the sound output device 15 as shown in FIG.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period Y111 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A in the period (k-4) regardless of whether the “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” are executed as the special effects. Set.

  After executing “Character notice D” in “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”, the sub CPU 102a performs “Character r1” and “Character u1” in the second and third rounds of “Janken Reach”. The effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 the effect image having the content that “r1” wins continuously over the “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes the “decision effect D” in the third round of the Janken game in the latter half of the period (k-4). The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D022” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets an operation effective period X112 in which the operation of the effect button 18A is effective in the period of performing the third round of Janken in the latter half (k-4) of the “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”. Set. In the operation effective period X112 of the “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a before the “character r1” and the “character u1” give out “goo”, “choki”, or “par” in the third round of Janken. In the effect image of the state of, an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation to the effect button 18A in the protruding state, which is composed of the effect button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display “Press!” Is displayed. The production control is performed as described above. In addition, the sub-CPU 102a determines whether “character r1” and “character u1” are “goo”, “choki”, or “par” in the third round of Janken during the operation effective period X112 of “decision effect D2”. Effect control to display an image of an operation promotion notification that prompts an operation to the effect lever 19A, which includes an effect lever 19A, a timer gauge, and a character display of “Let's pull!” In the effect image before being put out. I do.

Sub CPU102a, after executing “Decision Effect D” during the period (k-4) of “Janken Reach D2-1 (Win)”, produces an effect of “Character r1” winning “Character u1” in the third round of Janken. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing in the period (k-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) that have been stopped and displayed first. The effect control which displays the effect image which stops in the state (777) which arranged the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to fluctuation production pattern D013 (losing))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “losing” and the “variable effect pattern D013” is selected at the 75th to 84th variation in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a displays FIG. 70 (b). The variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D022” shown is executed. In other words, the sub CPU 102a determines that the “symbol variation D2-1”, that is, “character r1” in the period (k−1) to period (k-3) from the timing T1101 to the timing T1102 is “character u1” in the first round. Control is performed so as to execute “Janken Reach D2-1 (losing)” after executing the variation effect of the special effect symbol including the effect of winning by janken. In “Janken Reach D2-1 (losing)”, “Character r1” is “Character u1” in the same way as the variation effect of the period (k-4) from the timing T1102 of “Janken Reach D2-1 (winning)”. In the second round of Janken, “Character r1” wins “Character u1”, and in the third round of Janken, “Character r1” loses to “Character u1”. Perform reach production.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the specific effect in the period (k-4) in the period (k-4) in the variation effect of the “variation effect pattern D013” as well as the special effect. "Decision effect D" is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” in accordance with the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D013” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed. However, the sub CPU 102a does not operate the first decorative member 17A in the “decided effect D1” and “decided effect D2” of the “variable effect pattern D013”.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D013”, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” in “Janken Reach D2-1 (losing)” and then “Character r1” is “ After displaying the effect image of losing character “u1”, the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) must not be the same value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were previously stopped. Thus, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

(Variation production according to the fluctuation production pattern D025 (first jackpot))
When the determination result of the jackpot is “first jackpot” and “change effect pattern D025” is selected in the 75th to 84th changes in the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state, the sub CPU 102a selects FIG. 70 (c). ) Is performed from timing T1201 to timing T1203.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “symbol variation D3-1” in the period (l-1) to the period (l-3) from the timing T1201 to the timing T1202, and the period (l-4) from the timing T1202 to the timing T1203; In the period (1-5), “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)” is executed.

  In the “symbol variation D3-1”, the sub CPU 102a executes an effect similar to the “symbol variation D1-1”. That is, the sub CPU 102a performs an effect of displaying an effect image that fluctuates a plurality of special effect symbols on the image display device 14 in the period (l-1). In the period (1-2) of “symbol variation D3-1”, an effect image (not shown) in which the character display “Janken 4 wins!” Is superimposed on the variation display of the special effect symbol is displayed as an image. Production control is performed so as to display on the display device 14.

  During the “symbol variation D3-1” period (l-3), the sub CPU 102a stops at the same numerical value as the special effect symbol (left symbol) that the special effect symbol (right symbol) to be stopped first stops. Along with the reach of whether or not to perform, an effect image (not shown) of the content that “Character r1” as the ally character and “Character u1” as the opponent character perform the first round of janken Production control to be displayed on the display device 14 is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a executes “development notice D” for encouraging the development to “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” in this reach production effect. The sub CPU 102a sets “development notice D1”, “development notice D1”, “development notice D” according to the execution ratio of “development notice D” in the “variation effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. Control to execute any one of “evolution notice D2” is performed.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an operation for validating the operation of the effect button 18A as the operation means in the period (l-3), regardless of whether the “development notice D1” or the “development notice D2” is executed as the special effect. An effective period X121 is set.

  In the “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” period “1-4” of the “Janken Reach D3-1”, the sub CPU 102a sets a specific effect execution period W121 when executing a specific effect. The specific effect determined with reference to FIG. 59 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a stops and displays two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) having the same numerical value in “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” in the period (1-4) of “Janken Reach D3-1”. Then, “Character notice D” is executed. The sub CPU 102a sets “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D1” to “Character notice D” according to the execution ratio of “Character notice D” in the “Change effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of “Character notice D3” is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the operation valid period Y121 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A in the period (l-4) regardless of whether the “character notice D1” to “character notice D3” are executed as the special effects. Set.

  After executing “Character notice D” in “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)”, the sub CPU 102a performs “Charar1” and “Character u1” in the second through fourth rounds of “Janken Reach”. The effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 the effect image having the content that “r1” wins continuously over the “character u1”.

  Then, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D” in the effect of the fourth round of Janken in the latter half of the period (l-4). The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D025” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

  When the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” as a special effect, in the period when the effect of the fourth round of Janken in the latter half of this “Janken Reach D3-1 (win)” period (l-4) is performed. An operation valid period X122 for validating the operation of the effect button 18A is set. In the operation effective period X122 of the “decision effect D1”, the sub CPU 102a before “Character r1” and “Character u1” give any of “Goo”, “Cho”, and “Par” in the fourth round of Janken. In the effect image of the state of, an operation promotion notification image that prompts an operation to the effect button 18A in the protruding state, which is composed of the effect button 18A in the protruding state, the timer gauge, and the character display “Press!” Is displayed. The production control is performed as described above.

  In the “decision effect D2”, the sub CPU 102a determines that “character r1” and “character u1” are “goo”, “choki”, and “par” in the fourth round of Janken during the operation valid period X122. In the effect image of the state before taking out, an image of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation to the effect lever 19A, including the effect lever 19A, the timer gauge, and the character display “Let's pull!” Is displayed. Perform production control.

Sub CPU102a, after executing “Decision Production D” during period (1-4) of “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)”, produces an appearance that “Character r1” wins over “Character u1” in the fourth round of Janken. After displaying the image, the special effect symbol (middle symbol) that is changing in the period (1-5) becomes the same numerical value as the two special effect symbols (the left symbol and the right symbol) that are stopped and displayed first. The effect control which displays the effect image which stops in the state (777) which arranged the three special effect symbols in the same numerical value is performed.
Accordingly, the player is notified that the first jackpot game in which the jackpot game (the first jackpot game) with the round number of 16R (round) is executed is won.

(Variation production related to the fluctuation production pattern D016 (losing))
In the case of the 75-84th variation in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, when the jackpot determination result is “losing” and “variable effect pattern D016” is selected, the sub CPU 102a selects “variable effect pattern D025”. A variation effect substantially the same as the variation effect is executed. That is, the sub CPU 102a determines that the “symbol variation D3-1” in the period (l-1) to the period (1-3) from the timing T1201 to the timing T1202, that is, the “character r1” becomes the “character u1” in the first round. Control is performed so as to execute “Janken Reach D3-1 (Lose)” after executing a variation effect of a special effect symbol including an effect of winning by Janken. In “Janken Reach D3-1 (losing)”, “Character r1” is “Character u1” in the same manner as the fluctuating effect in the period (1-4) from the timing T1202 of “Janken Reach D3-1 (Win)”. Reach production including the production to perform the second round to the fourth round of Janken.

  The sub CPU 102a sets the specific effect execution period W121 in the period (l-4) as in the case of the “change effect pattern D025” when executing the specific effect in the change effect of the “change effect pattern D016”. The specific effect determined with reference to FIGS. 54 to 59 is executed.

  The sub CPU 102a also executes the “decided effect D” as the special effect in the period (l-4) in the same way as the “variable effect pattern D025” in the variable effect of the “variable effect pattern D016”.

  The sub CPU 102a sets “decided effect D1” as “decided effect D” according to the execution ratio of “decided effect D” in “variable effect pattern D016” set in the special effect type determination table of FIG. One of the “decision effects D2” is executed.

  However, in the variation effect of “variation effect pattern D016”, the sub CPU 102a executes “decision effect D1” in “Janken Reach D3-1 (losing)”, and then “Character r1” becomes “Character r1” in the fourth round of Janken. After displaying the effect image of losing character “u1”, the changing special effect symbol (middle symbol) must not be the same value as the two special effect symbols (left symbol and right symbol) that were previously stopped. Thus, effect control is performed to display on the image display device 14 an effect image that stops the three special effect symbols in a state where they are not aligned with the same numerical value. Thereby, it is notified that the determination result of the jackpot determination is “losing”.

As described above, in the changing effects of the effect modes A to D, the sub CPU 102a moves the effect button 18A in the non-projecting state (first state) in the operation effective period in which the operation promotion notification is made to prompt the player to operate the effect button 18A. State) or protruding state (second state).
On the other hand, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect button 18A to the non-protruding state (first state) and the protruding state (second state) during the operation effective period during which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A is not performed. The state of ().

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y executes the variation effects of the effect modes B to D in the specific game state (the high probability game state and the short time game state) after the end of the jackpot game. The operational effective period is set during the changing production at a higher rate in the changing production in the production mode C (from the 31st to the 74th fluctuation) than the fluctuation production in the first fluctuation (the first fluctuation to the 30th fluctuation). The operation effective period is set during the change effect at a higher rate in the change effect (changes 75th to 84th) of the effect mode D than the effect.

(Specific examples of display results for each display)
73, the first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first indicator 61, the first special symbol second indicator 88, the second special symbol second indicator 89, the second A specific example of the display result that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display on the one-image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 will be described.

  First, the details of the variable display of various symbols performed before the display result is derived by each display will be described.

  In the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61, the right end of the six LEDs arranged in the left-right direction, which becomes the special symbol display area when the power is turned on (RAM clear), is lit (disaster special symbol). The initial special symbol of the same mode as that of the first special symbol is displayed), and the special symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition. Specifically, the lighting position is repeatedly moved one by one in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds) from the leftmost LED toward the rightmost LED, and finally one or more LEDs are turned on. Lost special symbol or jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Then, the loss special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol first display 60 is next displayed on the first special symbol first indicator 60 until the variable display is started (the second special symbol first). While the variable display on the display 61 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed), the state of being stopped and displayed is maintained, and the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol first indicator 61 is Next, until the variable display is started on the second special symbol first display 61 (while the variable display on the first special symbol first display 60 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed), the display remains stopped. The state of is to be maintained.

  In the first special symbol second indicator 88 and the second special symbol second indicator 89, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), one LED that becomes the fourth symbol display area is turned off (the same manner as the loss fourth symbol). The display of the 4th symbol is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variation display of the special symbol. Specifically, turning off and turning on one LED is repeated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds), and finally the LED is turned off or turned on, and the lost 4th symbol or the big hit 4th symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, about the lighting cycle of LED, you may make it earlier than the lighting cycle (0.25 second) of LED of a special symbol 1st indicator.

  Then, the lost fourth symbol or the big hit fourth symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol second indicator 88 is then displayed on the first special symbol second indicator 88 until the variable display is started (second special symbol). While the variable display on the second display 89 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed, the state where the display is stopped is maintained, and the lost 4th symbol or jackpot that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol second display 89 The fourth symbol is stopped until the next variable display on the second special symbol second display 89 is started (during the execution of the variable display on the first special symbol second display 88 or the execution of the jackpot game). The state as it is displayed is maintained.

  In the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), the initial effect symbols different from the three effect symbols (losing effect symbol and jackpot effect symbol) predetermined in the effect symbol display area (left area, center area, right area) ) Is displayed, and the effect symbol variation display is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the special symbol variation display. Specifically, the three effect symbols are scrolled up and down, and finally, the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The lost effect symbol or jackpot effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is either until the next variable display starts, until the customer waiting effect is executed, or until the jackpot game is executed. Is maintained in a stopped display state, and when a customer waiting effect is executed or when a jackpot game is executed, it is not displayed in the effect symbol display area. Note that the initial effect symbol may be the same as the lost effect symbol.

  In the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), one special symbol (initial special symbol having the same form as the loss special symbol) is displayed in the special symbol display area in advance. The special symbol variation display is performed so as to be synchronized (synchronized) with the symbol variation display. Specifically, the display mode of one special symbol is changed, and finally the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The lost special symbol or jackpot special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area is either until the next variable display starts, until the customer waiting effect is performed, or until the jackpot game is performed. Is maintained in a stopped display state, and is not displayed in the special symbol display area when a customer waiting effect is executed or when a jackpot game is executed.

  As described above, the size of the 4th symbol display area disposed inside the game area 2A is smaller than that of the special symbol display area (the special symbol 2nd indicator than the special symbol 1st indicator). Therefore, the area inside the game area 2A is not extremely narrowed. Also, the size of the special symbol display area is larger than that of the fourth symbol display area (the special symbol first display has more LEDs than the special symbol second display). On the other hand, it becomes easy to accurately notify the result of the game.

  Next, a specific example of the display result that is stopped and displayed on each display device as a result of the variable display will be described.

In the special symbol first displays 60 and 61, one of a display result indicating one type of special symbol for losing and a display result indicating special symbols for 22 types of jackpots is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the lost special symbol, one LED at the right end is turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off as in the case of power-on (RAM clear). In other words, the display result indicating the loss special symbol of the first special symbol first display 60 and the display result indicating the loss special symbol of the second special symbol first display 61 are the same display result.
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol, 2 to 5 LEDs are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off.

  As a result of the special symbol determination, it is different from the jackpot game (the jackpot 8 is opened for a predetermined time or intermittently, but the degree of advantage to the player is lower than the jackpot game, and the game state is changed. In the case where the small hit game is made executable, the display result indicating the special bonus symbol on the special symbol first display 60, 61 is the display result indicating the special symbol for the loss or the display result indicating the special bonus symbol. It is recommended that the display result is different from the above. In addition, when there is one kind of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also one kind, but when there are a plurality of types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also small. It is better to have multiple types corresponding to the type of game.

In the special symbol second display, one of a display result indicating one type of lost fourth symbol and a display result indicating one type of big hit fourth symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the 4th pattern of loss, one LED is turned off in the same manner as when the power is turned on (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the big hit 4th symbol, one LED is lit.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned small hit game is made executable, the display result indicating the small hit fourth symbol on the special symbol second display indicates the display result indicating the lost fourth symbol or the big hit fourth symbol. The display result may be different from the display result. In addition, when there is one kind of small hit game, the display result indicating the small hit 4th symbol is also one type, but when there are multiple types of small hit games, the display result indicating the 4th small hit game is also displayed. It is better to have multiple types corresponding to the types of small hit games.

In the effect symbol display area of the image display device 14, one of a display result indicating 23 or more types of lost effect symbols and a display result indicating ten types of jackpot effect symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the loss effect design, the combination (separation) of the 3 production designs that are not the same and have no regularity is stopped.
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the jackpot effect symbol, the same combination of three effect symbols (9 types of 111 to 999) is stopped.

  When the above-described small hit game can be executed, the display result indicating the small hit effect symbol on the image display device 14 is different from the display result indicating the lost effect symbol or the display result indicating the big hit effect symbol. Although it is good also as a display result, it is good also as the same display result as the display result which shows a predetermined jackpot effect design. Further, when there is one kind of small hit game, the display result indicating the small hit effect symbol is also one type. However, when there are plural types of small hit games, the display result indicating the small hit effect symbol is also small. It is better to have multiple types corresponding to the type of game.

In the special symbol display area of the image display device 14, one of a display result indicating one type of loss special symbol and a display result indicating one type of jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the loss special symbol, the “x” symbol is stopped as in the case of power-on (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol, the “◯” symbol is stopped.
When the above-described small hit game is made executable, the display result indicating the small hit special symbol in the special symbol display area of the image display device 14 indicates the display result indicating the lost special symbol or the big hit special symbol. The display result may be different from the display result. In addition, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result indicating the small hit special symbol is also one type, but when there are a plurality of types of small hit games, the display result indicating the small hit special symbol is also small. It is better to have multiple types corresponding to the type of game.

  As explained above, there are multiple types of display results showing the jackpot special symbol, but there is only one type of display result showing the loss special symbol. It is possible to easily determine whether or not it is lost. In addition, if there are fewer display results indicating the special symbol for loss than the types of display results indicating the special symbol for jackpot, two or more types of display results indicating the special symbol for loss may be used.

  In addition, only one LED is lit in the display result showing the special symbol for losing, whereas two or more LEDs are lit in the display result showing the special symbol for jackpot, so it is easy to determine whether it is a big hit or lost. It becomes possible to do.

  Also, since there are multiple types of display results (LED lighting modes) for each special jackpot symbol, it is difficult to instantly determine which type of jackpot game will be executed, which type of jackpot game will be executed It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the game.

  In addition, when the display result indicating the lost special symbol is derived and displayed, an LED that is different from the LED that lights when the variation starts is lit. It becomes possible to recognize what has been broken.

  In addition, when the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed, at least one LED that is different from the LED that lights when the variation starts is lit, so even if the variation time is extremely short, It is possible to recognize that the variable display has been performed.

  In addition, since there are fewer types of display results showing jackpot 4 symbols and display results showing jackpot special symbols than types of display results showing jackpot special symbols, It is possible to instantly determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. Note that the number of display results indicating the jackpot special symbol may be less than the type of display result indicating the jackpot fourth symbol or the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol.

  Also, since there are fewer types of display results showing jackpot special symbols than types of display results showing special jackpot symbols, there are fewer types of display results showing jackpot special symbols. This makes it easier to predict the type of jackpot game. Note that the types of display results indicating the jackpot special symbol may be less than the types of display results indicating the jackpot effect symbol.

  In addition, since the size of the display result indicating the lost special symbol and the size of the display result indicating the lost fourth symbol are the same or similar (both are displayed by one LED), it is easy to grasp the correspondence between the two. It becomes easy to recognize that it is a loss.

  In addition, since the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol includes a display result indicating the special jackpot symbol, the display result indicating the special jackpot symbol is displayed when the display result indicating the special jackpot symbol is derived. It is possible to reduce a bad impression on the display result.

  In addition, regardless of what kind of jackpot game is performed, the display result showing the jackpot special symbol includes the one that turns on the LED that lights up with the display result showing the lose special symbol. It is possible to further reduce the bad impression on the display result indicating.

  In addition, during the variable display on the special symbol first display 60, 61, there is no state where all the LEDs are turned off or a plurality of LEDs are turned on, and one LED is always turned on. Therefore, it becomes easy to grasp that the variable display is being performed.

  In addition, during the variable display on the special symbol first display 60, 61, a plurality of special symbols (1 to 5 from the left side) that are not finally stopped except for the display result indicating the special symbol for loss. The mode in which the first one LED is lit up appears (displayed), so that it is easy to grasp that the variable display is being performed.

(Display examples of the first game information display device, the second game information display device, and the first image display device)
74 to 79 are diagrams showing display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Specifically, FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a display example during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the non-short game state, and FIG. 75 is a reach effect ( 76 is a diagram showing a display example during SP reach production), FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a display example during a blackout effect and a moving effect by a movable effect member, and FIGS. 77 to 78 are during a jackpot game FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a display example, and FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a display example when power interruption occurs.

First, FIG. 74 will be described.
74 (a), (b), and (c) are scenes of a production example by a specific music notice pattern. FIG. 74 (a) shows the present sign effect (pre-reach effect). Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 performs change display of the 1st special symbol which makes LED light in a predetermined order, and the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63 Indicates that two LEDs are lit and two first holds are stored.
In addition, the second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 turn on a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol hold first The display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, ordinary map hold) is stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 88 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol holding unit The 2 indicator 83 lights two LEDs and indicates that two first holds are stored.
The second special symbol second indicator 89 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 turn off the LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the second special symbol hold second indicator. 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, ordinary map hold) is stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the hold icon H11 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the special display mode 3 is displayed on the second display unit. The (red) hold icon H12 is displayed, the change icon TH is displayed in the change icon display area 70D, and “2” indicating the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. . Further, the first special symbol display area DZ1 is displayed with the first special symbol variable display corresponding to the first special symbol variable display.
Further, since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol is not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

  FIG. 74B shows a reach effect (SP reach effect) after the development effect is performed. Since the first special symbol continues to be changed and no new hold (first hold, second hold, general figure hold) has occurred, the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device In 79, the same display as in FIG. 74A is continuously displayed.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D are displayed. And the effect symbol 70a is displayed small in the upper left so as not to hinder the reach effect (SP reach effect).
The number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG.

FIG. 74 (c) shows the effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) ends and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 displays LED by the lighting mode (for example, only LED of the right end lights up) which shows a loss, and the stop display of the 1st special symbol is carried out. Is going.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, general figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol hold first display 63, the second special symbol first display 61, the second special symbol hold. The first display 64, the normal symbol first indicator 62, and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 continuously display the same display as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b).

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 88 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, and indicates that the variation of the first special symbol is lost. Yes.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, universal figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol second indicator 89, the second special symbol hold The second display 84, the normal symbol second display 90, and the normal symbol hold second display 85 continue to display the same display as in FIGS. 74 (a) and 74 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 that are not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect), and the variation. The display of the icon display area 70D is displayed again, the hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the hold icon H12 is displayed on the second display section. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 70D has disappeared since the variation has ended. In the first hold number display area SH1, “2” indicating the first hold number is displayed. In addition, the effect symbol and the first special symbol display area DZ1 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol is not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

As described above, in the variable effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the non-time-saving game state, the special symbol variable display is performed by the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59. 61, the special symbol second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, the effect symbol and the special symbol display region (first special symbol display region DZ1, Since it is displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2), it is easy to grasp the variation display of the special symbol.
In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold number of the second game information display device 79. 2 display devices 88 and 89, a hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and a hold number display area (first liquid crystal display) 14 Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).

  On the other hand, during reach production (SP reach production), in order to draw attention to reach production (SP reach production), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is used. The display of the hold icon in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) is erased, but the display of the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) is the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59. The first display 63, 64, the special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the hold number display area (first hold number display) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since the area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) are displayed, the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

  Further, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the normal gaming state, an effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 so as not to hinder the reach effect (SP reach effect). Are displayed in a reduced scale, but the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second indicator 88, 89, and the special symbol display areas DZ1, DZ2. The size of the special symbol displayed on the screen is not reduced, but the size is maintained, so even if you lose sight of the production symbol, you can check each indicator to see if variable display is being performed. It becomes.

  In the first special symbol hold second indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold second indicator 89, the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, so the display indicating the number of holds is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon for executing the hold change notice.

  In addition, in the first special symbol hold first display 63 and the second special symbol hold first display 64, the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, so the display indicating the number of holds is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon for executing the hold change notice.

  Further, in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2, the hold change notice for changing the display mode is not executed, so the display indicating the hold number is always displayed in the normal display mode. It will be. Therefore, it becomes easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon for executing the hold change notice.

  Further, in the icon display area constituted by the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon display area 70D, the first hold icon corresponding to the start of the change display. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the hold icon is displayed as the change icon by moving (shifting) the first hold icon or the second hold icon to the change icon display area 70D (the hold number is reduced). In the hold number display area composed of the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2, the first hold corresponding to the start of the variable display is performed. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the number is subtracted without performing the hold reduction effect as described above. Therefore, it is easy to grasp the pure number of reservations itself by checking the number-of-holds display area. Note that displaying as the icon may be included in the specific effect.

Even during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the number of reservations (first hold number display area SH1 and second hold number display area SH2) of the hold number display area (first liquid crystal display) 14 of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 Although the display of 1 hold number and 2nd hold number was displayed without erasing, the hold number (first hold) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) Number and second hold number) may be deleted. Similarly, in the SP reach effect of FIG. 75 (b), the blackout effect of FIG. 76 (a), the movement effect and the SPSP reach effect of FIG. 76 (b), which will be described later, the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1). In addition, the display of the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) in the second hold number display area SH2) may be deleted.
Thus, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect). , Second hold icon display area 70C1-70C4) hold icon display and hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) hold number (first hold number, second hold) The display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79 (the number of holds). Since the first hold number and the second hold number are displayed, the hold number (the first hold number and the second hold number) can be grasped.

Next, FIG. 75 will be described.
FIG. 75 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the short-time game state. is there.

FIG. 75A shows a fluctuating effect before reaching a reach effect (SP reach effect) in the short-time gaming state. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 performs change display of the 2nd special symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order, and the 2nd special symbol hold 1st indicator 64 Indicates that two LEDs are stored, and two second holds are stored. Moreover, the normal symbol 1st display 62 performs the fluctuation | variation display of the normal symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order. Since the right-handed first display 67 is in a short-time game, the LED is turned on to display the right-handed display.
The first special symbol first indicator 60 turns on a predetermined LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65. Indicates that any LED is turned off and no hold (first hold, ordinary hold) is stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second indicator 89 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold second The indicator 84 lights up two LEDs, indicating that two second reservations are stored. Further, the normal symbol second display 90 performs the normal symbol variation display in which the LEDs are blinked in a predetermined order in response to the normal symbol variation display. Further, since the right-handed second display 87 is in a short-time game, the LED is turned on to display the right-handed display.
The first special symbol second indicator 80 turns off the LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 All the LEDs are turned off, indicating that no hold (second hold, general hold) is stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect symbol and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display area DZ2 are variably displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. Further, the hold icons H21 and H22 are displayed on the first display unit 70C1 and the second display unit 70C2 of the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the change icon is displayed on the change icon display area 70D, In the 2-hold number display area SH2, “2” indicating the second hold number is displayed. Further, since the game is being played for a short time, the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14.
Since the first hold is not stored, no hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol is not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Also, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “short time gaming state”). ing.

FIG. 75B shows a reach effect (SP reach effect). Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, since the change of the 2nd special symbol is performed continuously, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 is performing the variable display similarly to Drawing 75 (a). . And since one second hold occurs and the second hold number is 3, the second special symbol hold first indicator 64 blinks the left LED and lights the right LED, It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, two new figure reservations have occurred and the number of new figure reservations has reached two, so the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 lights two LEDs, and two common figure holds are stored. It shows that.
In addition, since the 1st hold | maintenance has not newly generate | occur | produced, the 1st special symbol hold | maintenance 1st display 63 remains extinguished.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second indicator 89 performs variable display corresponding to the second special symbol as in FIG. 75 (a). And since one second hold occurs and the second hold number becomes 3, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 blinks the left LED and lights the right LED, It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, two new figure reservations have occurred and the number of new figure reservations has reached two, so the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 lights two LEDs, and two common figure holds are stored. It shows that.
Since the first hold has not newly occurred, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 remains off.

  On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, a reach effect (SP reach effect) using a character image is performed. In addition, the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D are deleted, and the effect design 70a is displayed in a small size on the upper left. Thus, the reach production (SP reach production) is not disturbed. In addition, the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed as in FIG. 75 (a). In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, character information G12 (“SP reach”) indicating that the reach effect (SP reach effect) is being displayed is displayed.

FIG. 75C shows the effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is finished and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 2nd special symbol 1st indicator 61 displays LED by the lighting mode (for example, only LED of the right end lights up) which shows a loss, and the stop display of the 2nd special symbol is carried out. Is going.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, general figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol first display 60, the first special symbol hold first display 63, the second special symbol hold. The first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 display the same display as in FIG. 75 (b). Also, the right-handed first display 67 remains lit.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second indicator 89 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, and indicates that the variation of the second special symbol is lost. Yes.
Since no new hold (first hold, second hold, universal figure hold) has occurred, the first special symbol second indicator 88, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83, the second special symbol hold The second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 display the same display as in FIG. The right-handed second display 87 is also lit.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect symbol and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display area DZ2 are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the stop display of the second special symbol. Yes. In addition, the display of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the variation icon display area 70D that were not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect) is displayed again. 2 The hold icon H21 is displayed on the first display unit 70C1 of the hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the hold icon H22 is displayed on the second display unit 70C2, and the hold icon H23 is displayed on the third display unit 70C3. ing. Further, the variation icon displayed in the variation icon display area 70D has disappeared since the variation has ended. In the second hold number display area SH2, “3” indicating the second hold number is displayed.
Since the first hold is not stored, no hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and “0” is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol is not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information (“sorry”) indicating that it is lost.

As described above, in the variable effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the short-time gaming state, the special symbol variable display is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59, 61, special symbol second indicators 88 and 89 of the second game information display device 79, and effect symbol and special symbol display region (first special symbol display region DZ1, first) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. 2 special symbol display area DZ2), it is easy to grasp the variation display of the special symbol.
In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold number of the second game information display device 79. 2 display devices 88 and 89, a hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and a hold number display area (first liquid crystal display) 14 Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).
The right-handed display includes a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed, the right-handed display is easy to grasp.

  On the other hand, during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display areas (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 are held. Although the display of the icon is erased, the number of holds (the first hold number, the second hold number) is displayed with the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information. In the special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the display device 79 and the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since it is displayed, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

  Further, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the short-time gaming state, an effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 so as not to hinder the reach effect (SP reach effect). Is displayed in the special symbol first display 60, 61, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol second display 88, 89 and the special symbol display areas DZ1, DZ2. Since the size of the special symbol to be displayed is maintained without being reduced, even if the production symbol is lost, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display. .

  Further, the hold icons of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the change icon TH of the change icon display area 70D are displayed. As an effect for erasing the display, the SP reach effect has been described as an example as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, but is not limited to the SP reach effect.

  For example, the display on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 suddenly turns dark during the changing effect as shown in FIG. During the production that is developed into the reach production (so-called blackout production), the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 are displayed. And the display of the variable icon TH in the variable icon display area 70D are deleted, and the number of holds (the first hold number and the second hold number) is displayed in the special symbol hold number of the first game information display device 59. 1 display 63, 64, special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, hold number display area (first hold number display) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 Frequency SH1, to be displayed out with the second number of holding display region SH2).

  By doing in this way, it can make a player grasp | ascertain the number of holding | maintenances (the 1st holding | maintenance number and the 2nd holding | maintenance number), preventing preventing a blackout effect.

  Further, when a moving effect using the movable effect member 73 is performed during the changing effect, the first hold on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 when the movable effect member 73 moves as shown in FIG. The display of the hold icons in the icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the hold number (first hold number, second hold number). ) Is displayed on the first game information display device 59 special symbol hold first display 63, 64, the second game information display device 79 special symbol hold second display 88, 89, and the first image display device ( The display is performed in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the main liquid crystal) 14.

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player know the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the movement effect from being hindered.

  In addition, although not shown, the SPSP reach effect is similar to that shown in FIGS. 74 (b), 75 (c), 76 (a), and 76 (b), in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. The display of the hold icon in the 1 hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the 2nd hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is deleted, and the hold number (first hold number, second The number of holds) is displayed on the first symbol display first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display. The display is performed in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) of the device (main liquid crystal) 14.

  By doing so, it is possible to make the player know the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the SPSP reach effect from being hindered.

Next, FIGS. 77 to 78 will be described.
77 to 78 are display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 during the jackpot game.

FIG. 77 (a) shows the first round game effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first indicator 60 lights the LED in a stop mode indicating the probability variation big hit, performs the first special symbol stop display, and the round number indicator 66 The LED is turned on in a manner that indicates the number of rounds of two probable jackpots (8 rounds), indicating that the number of rounds of this jackpot game is eight, and the first special symbol holding first display 63 has two LEDs. It blinks, indicating that four first holds are stored. Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in a big hit game, the LED is turned on to display the right-handed display.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 88 lights up the LED, displays a stop indicating that it is a big hit, and the first special symbol hold second display 83 displays the LED 2 Blinking, indicating that four first holds are stored. Further, the right-handed second display 87 turns on the LED and performs right-handed display.
The second special symbol second indicator 89 and the normal symbol second indicator 90 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first round game effect of the jackpot game is performed, and the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 displayed before the jackpot game start, the second hold The hold icons in the icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the change icon display in the change icon display area 70D are deleted. In the first hold number display area SH1, “4” indicating the first hold number is displayed. The first special symbol display area DZ1 has a stop display indicating a big hit of the first special symbol corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol. Further, since the big hit game is being played, an image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70.
Since the second hold is not stored, “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2, and the second special symbol is not changed, so the second special symbol display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed. ing. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (“round 1”) indicating the number of round games currently being performed.

FIG. 77 (b) shows a promotion effect performed from the first opening to the fourth closing of the big prize opening 8 of the fifth round game. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, since the common figure hold | maintenance generate | occur | produced newly, the normal symbol hold | maintenance 1st indicator 65 blinks four LED, and it is memorized that four common figure hold | maintains are memorize | stored. The normal symbol first display 62 performs the normal symbol variation display in which the LEDs blink in a predetermined order. The displays other than the normal symbol first display 62 and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65 are continuously displayed as in FIG. 77 (a).
Further, in the second game information display device 79, the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 blinks four LEDs to indicate that four normal symbol holds are stored, and the normal symbol second indicator 90 is a predetermined symbol. In this order, the normal symbols are displayed in a blinking manner. The displays other than the normal symbol second display 90 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 are continuously displayed as in FIG. 77 (a).

On the other hand, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 displays an effect using a character image corresponding to the promotion effect. Here, the display of the image G10 “right-handed →→” displayed before the promotion effect is performed is deleted.
Note that the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed. In the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the character information indicating the number of round games is erased (not displayed).

  FIG. 77 (c) shows the movement effect of the movable effect member 73 during the promotion effect. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59 and the 2nd game information display device 79, the same display as Drawing 77 (b) is displayed continuously.

  In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect image G <b> 15 is displayed in accordance with the movable effect member 73 moving to the front of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Similarly to FIG. 77 (b), the display of the image G10 “right strike →→” remains erased, and the special symbols in the special symbol display areas (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2). In (first special symbol, second special symbol), the same display as in FIG. 72B is continuously displayed. On the other hand, the display position of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) is changed, and the display position is changed as shown in FIG. ), It is displayed below the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2).

  In this way, due to the effects performed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the number of reservations (first reservation number, first reservation number display area SH1, second reservation number display area SH2) By changing the display position of the second hold number), the display of the effect performed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 and the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) ( Is prevented.

  FIG. 78 (a) is an effect that is performed from the fifth opening of the big winning opening 8 of the fifth round game after the promotion effect. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59 and the 2nd game information display device 79, the same display as Drawing 77 (c) is performed.

The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 displays an effect of notifying (notifying) that a jackpot game will be continued after the fifth round game using the character image. In addition, the image G10 “right-handed →→” that was not displayed during the promotion effect is displayed again.
Note that the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). The special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) are continuously displayed. The second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (round 5) indicating the number of round games that have been erased (not displayed).

  FIG. 78 (b) shows the ending effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59 and the 2nd game information display device 79, the same display as Drawing 79 (a) is performed.

  The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 displays an effect using a character image corresponding to the ending effect. In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2), special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) and the image G10 “right-handed →→” display are continuously displayed as in FIG. 78 (a). Yes. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G13 (“BONUS end”) indicating that the jackpot game has ended.

  FIG. 78 (c) is an effect showing that the jackpot game has ended and the game has shifted to a time-saving game. Here, the round number display 66 of the first game information display device 59 ends (turns off) the display of the number of rounds when the jackpot ends. The first game information display device 59 displays the same display as in FIG. 78 (b) except for the round number display 66. Also, the second game information display device 79 displays the same display as in FIG. 78 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D that are not displayed during the big hit game are displayed. The display is displayed again, and the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, the third display portion 70B3, and the fourth display portion 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. Yes. In the first hold number display area SH1, “4” indicating the first hold number is displayed.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. The special symbol display areas (the first special symbol display area DZ1 and the second special symbol display area DZ2) are stopped because the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not changed. Also, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 displays character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “short time gaming state”). The

As described above, during the jackpot game, the hold icons in the hold icon display areas (the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4), and the fluctuations thereof, in order to draw attention to the jackpot game effect. Although the display of the variation icon TH in the icon display area 70D is erased, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold first display 63 of the first game information display device 59. 64, a special symbol hold second display 88, 89 of the second game information display device 79, and a hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since it is displayed in the hold number display area SH2), the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.
The right-handed display includes a right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, a right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14. Since the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed, the right-handed display is easy to grasp.

  Further, even during the jackpot game, during the promotion effect, the display of the image G10 “right-handed →→” on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is deleted, but the right-handed display is the first game information display. Since the right-handed first display 67 of the device 59 and the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79 are displayed, the right-handed display (right-handed) can be grasped.

  Further, the right-handed display includes the lighting of the LED of the right-handed first display 67 that is not marked with anything, the lighting of the LED of the right-handed second display 87 that is marked as “right-handed”, and the first The image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 displays the image G10 “right-handed →→”. That is, the display mode of the right-handed display is displayed in a display mode that is more easily recognized by the player than the right-handed first display 67, and further from the right-handed second display 87. The first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is displayed in a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize. The right-handed second display 87 is provided closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 than the right-handed first display 67, and is also right-handed in that it is easy to see for the player. The right-handed second display 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the first display 67.

Next, FIG. 79 will be described.
FIG. 79 shows a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 when power interruption occurs.

FIG. 79A shows a variation effect before reaching a reach effect in the normal gaming state. Here, in the 1st game information display device 59, the 1st special symbol 1st indicator 60 performs change display of the 1st special symbol which blinks LED in a predetermined order, and the 1st special symbol hold 1st indicator 63 Blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol first indicator 61 and the normal symbol first indicator 62 light a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second indicator 88 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol holding unit The 2 indicator 83 blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol second indicator 81 and the normal symbol second indicator 82 turn off the LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. In addition, the second special symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 turn off any LED, indicating that no hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the effect symbol and the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 are variably displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the change icon display is performed. The change icon TH is displayed in the area 70D. In the first hold number display area SH1, “4” indicating the first hold number is displayed.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and “0” is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol is not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

  Then, since the power interruption occurred and the supply of the power supply voltage was cut off, nothing in any of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 It is not displayed (FIG. 79 (b)).

  Thereafter, when the power interruption is restored, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79 are restored at substantially the same timing. Specifically, the first game information display device 59 controlled by the main CPU 101a displays all displays (special symbol first display 60, 61, normal symbol first indicator 62, special symbol hold based on backup data). First display 63, 64, normal symbol hold first display 65, round number display 66, right-handed first display 67, high-probability gaming state display 68, and short-time gaming state display 69) are restored. However, the second game information display device 79 controlled by the sub CPU 102a uses the special symbol hold second display 83 based on the special symbol hold memory designation command and the normal symbol memory designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of recovery. 84 and the display of the normal symbol hold second display 85 are restored. On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, a power restoration effect is provided to notify that the power is being restored based on the fact that the image control board 105 has received the power restoration designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 a at the time of restoration. Do.

  Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the image control board 105 displays a reserved number display area (first display) on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 based on the special symbol hold storage designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101a at the time of restoration. The hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) in the hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) is resumed (recovered) (FIG. 79 (d)).

  As described above, when power failure occurs and recovery is performed, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61 of the first game information display device 59. And the special symbol second indicators 88 and 89 of the second game information display device 79 are restored and displayed at substantially the same timing, and then the reserved number display area (first reservation) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is displayed. In the number display area SH1, the second hold number display area SH2) the hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) is restored and displayed. That is, when power is restored, the number of holds on the second game information display device 79 rather than the number of holds on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 (first hold number, second hold number). The display of (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed (recovered) first.

  Thus, the display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) on the second game information display device 79 before the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 14 is restored, so that the first Even during the power recovery effect on the image display device (main liquid crystal) 14, the second game information display device 79 displays the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number). The player can grasp the first hold number and the second hold number).

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols held is normally displayed as the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold number of the second game information display device 79. 2 display units 83 and 84, a hold icon display area (first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4) and a hold number display area (first liquid crystal display) 14 Although displayed in four places, the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect) and jackpot effect If so, the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image table. Apparatus (main LCD) 14 number of holding the display area of the (first number of holding display region SH1, second number of holding display region SH2) is displayed in three places with. In addition, if it is after restoration after power interruption, the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79. Are displayed in two places.
In other words, the number of special symbols held may be displayed in two places, three places, or four places depending on the progress of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there are displayed rather than the LEDs of the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 and the special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84. Is large and is displayed at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine so that it can be easily seen by the player. However, the special symbol is more than the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there. By making the LED of the holding first display 63, 64 and the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 larger, or arranging the LED at a position closer to the center of the gaming machine, it is easy for the player to visually recognize. Good.

  73 to 79, the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numbers displayed there are larger than the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icons displayed there. Although it is easy to see, the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icons displayed there are larger than the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numbers displayed there. You may make it easy.

(Structure of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79)
FIG. 80 is a front view of the first game information display device 59. In the present embodiment, the first game information display device 59 is disposed adjacent to the outer rail member 29C at the lower left of the game area 2A, but is not limited thereto, and is disposed at various positions. Can do.

  The first game information display device 59 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination (in other words, information related to profits given to a player in a game). More specifically, the first game information display device 59 includes first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, a round number indicator 66, It can be configured as a right-handed first display 67, a high-probability gaming state display 68, a short-time gaming state display 69, a normal symbol first display 62, and a normal symbol hold first display 65.

  The second game information display device 79 also displays information related to the benefits given to the player in the game, and similarly, the first and second special symbol second indicators 88, 89, 1, second special symbol hold second display 83, 84, right-handed second display 87, normal symbol second display 82, and normal symbol hold second display 85.

(Details of the structure of the first game information display device 59)
As shown in FIG. 80, the first game information display device 59 has a plurality of LEDs 4045 arranged in two rows. These LEDs 4045 include first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, a high probability gaming state indicator 68, and a short-time gaming state indicator 69. A right-handed first display 67, a round number display 66, a normal symbol first display 62, and a normal symbol hold first indicator 65. The LEDs 4045 are arranged in two rows in parallel along the launch ball guide path of the game balls formed by the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C (see FIG. 1). Note that the arrangement of the LEDs 4045 is not limited to this, and the LEDs 4045 may be arranged in one row along the launch ball guide path of the game balls, or may be arranged in three or more rows. , They may be arranged irrespective of the launch ball guide path.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first game information display device 59 includes a first display substrate 4200 on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are surface-mounted and a first cover that at least covers the front side of the first display substrate 4200. A member 4202 and a protective member 4204 covering the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 are provided. That is, the first display substrate 4200 is accommodated by the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first game information display device 59 is installed in a standing posture so that the first display substrate 4200 disposed between the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is along the board surface of the game board 2. The first game information display device 59 is configured to be difficult or inaccessible from the outside to the first display substrate 4200 by the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first game information display device 59 is fitted to an attachment opening (not shown) formed in a plate member constituting the game board 2 and attached to the plate member, and the front side faces the front side of the game board 2 so that the game The light of the LED 4045 is visible from the person. In addition, the first game information display device 59 has a rear surface facing the back side of the game board 2 (plate member), and a connector 4100 (FIG. 81), which will be described later, provided so as to face the back side. It is accessible from the back side. The first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 may be combined to form a cover member.

  The first game information display device 59 is fixed to the game board 2 by fixing the first cover member 4202 or the protection member 4204 constituting the outer shell of the first game information display device 59 by screwing, bonding, or other methods. It is attached. Here, the first game information display device 59 is difficult to be removed, reassembled, or removed from the game board 2 by bonding or the like. You may attach with the structure in which a trace remains in either. In other words, the attachment structure of the first game information display device 59 and the game board 2 is a configuration that is difficult to remove without destroying the game board 2 or the first game information display device 59, and the game board 2 or the first game board by the removal. 1 game information display device 59 cannot be assembled as originally because it is destroyed or deformed, and the game board 2 or first game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed by removal, so that the game board 2 or the first game information display device 59 may have at least one structure in which a trace of removal remains.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the first display substrate 4200 is a printed circuit board in which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the front surface facing the player, and light can be emitted from each LED 4045 toward the front side. ing. The LED 4045 is mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 instead of through-hole mounting for fixing the lead of the LED 4045 to the hole of the printed circuit board. In the first display substrate 4200, the light emitting element of the LED 4045 and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same front surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, in the first display substrate 4200, the lead for connecting the LED 4045 to the circuit does not protrude on the rear surface, and the solder for fixing the LED 4045 is not disposed on the rear surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 4045 are arranged in two upper and lower rows in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As the LED 4045, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. As the LED 4045, a chip type or a shell type can be used as long as it can be mounted on the surface, but a chip type is desirable from the advantage of reducing space. The first display board 4200 is controlled by the control means of the main control board 101 to control the ON / OFF / flashing states of the plurality of LEDs 4045, and the ON / OFF / flashing states and combinations and states thereof. Information related to profits given to the player due to changes or the like is displayed.

  Thus, by mounting the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, the space for disposing the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. it can. Further, by mounting the LED 4045 on the first display substrate 4200, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. Further, by mounting the LED 4045 on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the LED 4045 does not affect the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display substrate 4200, it is possible to arrange other electronic components on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is effectively used. The first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  The LED 4045 has either a configuration in which the light emitting elements are arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200 (see FIG. 82) or a configuration in which the light emitting elements are embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200. May be. The first display substrate 4200 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects white light or the like in the front surface area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect black light or the like in the front surface area. An absorption part may be provided. When the light emitting element of the LED 4045 protrudes from the surface of the first display substrate 4200, the light irradiated from the LED 4045 can be reflected by the reflecting part and efficiently used by providing a reflective part around the light emitting element. Further, in the case where the light emitting element of the LED 4045 is embedded in the first display substrate 4200, the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the absorption unit is diffused on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 by providing an absorption part around the light emitting element. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 85 is a front view of the first display substrate 4200 as seen from the front surface side. The first special symbol first indicator 60 is composed of six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row, and the second special symbol first indicator 61 is composed of six LEDs 4045 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold first indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61, and the second special symbol. The reserved first indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first indicator 61. On the right side of the second special symbol holding first display 64, there is one LED 4045 constituting the high probability gaming state display 68, the short time gaming state display 69, and the right-handed first display 67 in this order. They are arranged side by side. The round number indicator 66 is composed of eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row, and the normal symbol first indicator 62 is composed of three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number indicator 66. 65 is composed of two LEDs 4045 from the right side of the lower row. The number and arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in each display are not limited to the above.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the first display substrate 4200 is provided with a connector 4100 on the rear surface opposite to the surface on which the LED 4045 is mounted, and via a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 4100. The first game information display device 59 and the main control board 101 are electrically connected. The connector 4100 is a so-called jack in which a plug provided at the end of the harness is detachable, and may be in a male terminal shape or a female terminal shape. The connector 4100 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the connector 4100 is fixed to the hole of the printed circuit board, but in this embodiment, is surface-mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. In addition, connector 4100 has a connector opening into which a plug provided at an end of the harness is inserted toward the rear in FIG. Thus, the main body of the connector 4100 and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the first display substrate 4200 has no front surface protruding leads for connecting the connector 4100 to a circuit, and no solder for fixing the connector 4100 is disposed on the front surface. Thus, by mounting the connector 4100 on the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the connector 4100 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. be able to.

  The connector 4100 is disposed on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the connector 4100 overlap with the first display substrate 4200 sandwiched between the front and back sides. In this way, by mounting the connector 4100 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the connector 4100 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Accordingly, the first display substrate 4200 can be provided with the connector 4100 on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front surface and the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 are effectively provided. By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact.

  As shown in FIG. 86, a chip-type resistor 4500 as current limiting means is mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. In this embodiment, the plurality of resistors 4500 do not overlap the connector 4100. They are arranged side by side. The resistor 4500 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the resistor 4500 is fixed to the hole of the printed circuit board, but in this embodiment, is mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200. In the first display substrate 4200, the resistor 4500 and the solder for fixing the resistor 4500 to the first display substrate 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit does not protrude from the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the solder for fixing the resistor 4500 is not disposed on the front surface. In the present embodiment, a plurality of resistors 4500 are arranged in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As shown in FIG. 88, the resistor 4500 is disposed between the connector 4100 and the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the circuit of the first display substrate 4200, and restricts the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be a predetermined value or less. This prevents an excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045.

  Thus, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200, even if the resistor 4500 breaks down, the first game information display device 59 can be replaced, and maintenance can be performed. It becomes easy. Since the exchange of the first game information display device 59 can be easily performed, it is possible to shorten the game pause period and avoid impairing the interest of the game. Further, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200, the arrangement space of the resistor 4500 on the first display substrate 4200 can be reduced, and the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. it can.

  The resistor 4500 may be disposed on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. In this case, the mounting region of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting region of the plurality of resistors 4500 may have either a configuration in which the first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched in the front and back or a configuration in which they partially overlap. In this manner, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Accordingly, in the first display substrate 4200, the resistor 4500 can be disposed on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front surface and the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 are effectively provided. By using this, the first display substrate 4200 can be made more compact. Note that the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 may not overlap each other with the first display substrate 4200 sandwiched between the front and back surfaces.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first cover member 4202 includes a front cover portion 4208 in which windows 4206 corresponding to the respective LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 are formed, and the front cover portion. 4208 and a lateral cover portion 4210 formed so as to rise to the rear side at the periphery of 4208. The first cover member 4202 is formed in a box shape opened rearward by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210, and is provided for the first display in an inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 4208 and the lateral cover portion 4210. The substrate 4200 can be stored. When the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is closer to the front cover portion 4208 side than the open end (rear end) of the lateral cover portion 4210 ( Positioned on the front side, the entire first display substrate 4200 is accommodated in the inner region of the first cover member 4202. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. The presence of the one cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. In the first cover member 4202 of this embodiment, the inner region is formed to match a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region, the lateral cover portion 4210. Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held without being displaced.

  As described above, since the first display substrate 4200 is disposed in the state of being accommodated in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the lateral side, and the first display substrate 4200 is used. Unauthorized acts on the substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the first display substrate 4200, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 as described above, and therefore the first display substrate 4200 is removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 87, the first cover member 4202 has a window 4206 penetrating the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LED 4045 by a window defining portion 4212 formed in the front cover portion 4208. It is defined. The window 4206 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 4045 (this embodiment), or may be provided so as to correspond to two or more predetermined number of LEDs 4045 among the plurality of LEDs 4045. The window 4206 has a polygonal shape such as a quadrangle or a circular shape, and is formed larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 4045 so that the corresponding one or more LEDs 4045 are entirely inside. In the first cover member 4202, the windows 4206 are formed in two rows. When the first cover member 4202 is disposed in a state of covering the front side of the first display substrate 4200, each window 4206 corresponds to each LED 4045. The LED 4045 facing each window 4206 can be visually recognized through the window 4206.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 87, the first cover member 4202 penetrates the front cover portion 4208 back and forth, partitions a window 4206 formed corresponding to the LED 4045, and the state of the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is changed. Each window 4206 has a window defining unit 4212 configured to be distinguishable. The window defining part 4212 is formed in a cylindrical shape projecting rearward from the front cover part 4208 (this embodiment), and a part corresponding to the front side of the mounting area of the LED 4045 in the front cover part 4208 is thickly formed. It is provided depending on the configuration. In the case where the window defining portion 4212 is formed of a cylindrical body, the window defining portions 4212 may be separated from each other and independent, or a part of the adjacent window defining portions 4212 may be integrated. . Between the front side opening of the window 4206 facing the front side and the rear side opening of the window 4206 facing the corresponding LED 4045, for example, the thickness of the side cover part 4210 or the thickness of the first display substrate 4200 is equal to or greater than the plate thickness. A long distance is provided, and the window defining unit 4212 functions as a light guide unit that guides the light emitted from the LED 4045 to prevent the light from diffusing. In other words, a configuration in which a gap is formed between the front cover portion 4208 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, or a portion corresponding to the LED 4045 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 is configured to protrude forward, By the window defining unit 4212 that defines the window 4206, the light of the LED 4045 can be guided to the front without any leakage.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 is combined with the first display substrate 4200 so that the window defining portion 4212 faces the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. The entire circumference of the LED 4045 mounted on the front surface is individually surrounded by the window defining unit 4212. In the present embodiment, the rear end of the window defining part 4212 formed in a cylindrical shape is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the adjacent LED 4045 is partitioned by the window defining part 4212. The first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are configured such that the window defining portion 4212 of the first cover member 4202 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 are in contact with each other and the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. The first display substrate 4200 is basically configured so as to have a gap between it and the surface of the first display substrate 4200. Thus, since the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is surrounded by the window defining unit 4212 that defines the window 4206, the light emitted from the LED 4045 does not diffuse and the state of the LED 4045 through the window 4206 is not diffused. Can be more easily identified. Further, since the rear end of the window defining portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the gap between the front cover portion 4208 and the first display substrate 4200 is blocked, light passes through the gap. Leakage into the window 4206 can be prevented, and the state of the LED 4045 can be clearly distinguished. In addition, even if an unauthorized tool is intruded through the window 4206, the unauthorized tool can be blocked only by the window forming unit 4212 in the window 4206, and the illegal act can be prevented more appropriately. Note that the window defining unit 4212 may face the rear end (rear surface) and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 so as to have a slight gap.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the first cover member 4202 includes a protruding alignment portion 4600 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. The alignment portion 4600 is formed integrally with the window defining portion 4212 so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212 facing the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. The alignment unit 4600 is configured to fit into a substrate hole 4400 (see FIG. 85) formed in the first display substrate 4200 and to align the first display substrate 4200 with respect to the first cover member 4202. ing. In the first cover member 4202, a plurality of alignment portions 4600 are arranged in a distributed manner on the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 so as to be separated from each other. Among the plurality of alignment portions 4600, there may be one formed apart from the window defining portion 4212. Each alignment portion 4600 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The alignment portion 4600 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the window defining portion 4212, but its rear end is positioned in front of the rear end of the horizontal cover portion 4210 and is accommodated inside the first cover member 4202. .

  The first display substrate 4200 includes a substrate hole 4400 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction, and the substrate hole 4400 is also formed in a circle in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 4600. The substrate hole 4400 is set to have the same or slightly larger opening size as the outer shape of the alignment portion 4600. The alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are provided so as to correspond in number, position, and the like. The alignment portion 4600 is fitted into the substrate hole 4400, and the first display substrate is formed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202. 4200 relative positions are defined. Therefore, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled in a state where they are positioned vertically and horizontally by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400.

  As described above, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled in a state of being aligned with each other by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400. Accordingly, the LED 4045 corresponds to the LED 4045. The window 4206 can be aligned with no deviation, and the state of the LED 4045 can be identified more suitably. Further, since the alignment unit 4600 is formed integrally with the window defining unit 4212 and is reinforced by the window defining unit 4212, the alignment unit 4600 may be configured to protrude rearward from the window defining unit 4212. Can be avoided. By forming the alignment portion 4600 integrally with the window defining portion 4212, the projecting dimension can be shortened, and breakage or deformation of the alignment portion 4600 can be more preferably avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the first display substrate 4200 includes a plurality of substrate holes 4400 formed so as to sandwich the connector 4100. The first cover member 4202 is provided with an alignment portion 4600 corresponding to each of the plurality of substrate holes 4400 so as to sandwich the connector 4100 mounted on the first display substrate 4200. More specifically, the first display substrate 4200 has a pair of substrate holes 4400 arranged in a symmetrical positional relationship with the connector 4100 sandwiched in the left and right (this embodiment), up and down, or diagonal directions. A pair of alignment portions 4600 are provided in the first cover member 4202 corresponding to each of the pair of substrate holes 4400. As described above, in the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure including the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400 into which the first game information display device 59 is fitted is not unevenly distributed only in the region on one side of the connector 4100, but sandwiches the connector 4100. Dispersed in the regions on both sides.

  In the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure of the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 by the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is provided in the regions on both sides of the connector 4100. They are distributed. The connector 4100 is a portion to which a force is applied when the plug of the harness is attached / detached. However, the first display substrate 4200 can be prevented from being displaced by the alignment structure arranged with the connector 4100 interposed therebetween.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the protection member 4204 has a plate shape, and a connector opening 4300 penetrating in the front and back direction is formed in accordance with the connector 4100 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200. The connector opening 4300 is formed in accordance with the outer shape of the connector 4100 so that there is no large gap between the connector opening 4300 and the connector 4100 passed through the connector opening 4300. The protective member 4204 covers the first display substrate 4200 accommodated in the first cover member 4202 in a state where at least part of the rear surface covers the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside so as to be difficult to access. The cover member 4202 (this embodiment) or the first display substrate 4200 is attached. The protective member 4204 is disposed so as to fit inside the first cover member 4202, and is disposed behind the first display substrate 4200 housed inside the first cover member 4202. The protection member 4204 of this embodiment is formed in an outer shape that matches the inner region of the first cover member 4202 defined by the lateral cover portion 4210. When the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the peripheral surface of the protective member 4204 is in contact with the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 4210, and the protective member 4204 is held so as not to be displaced vertically and horizontally. . When the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the position where the rear surface of the protective member 4204 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the lateral cover portion 4210 or the front cover portion beyond the open end. Arranged on the 4208 side (front side), the entire protection member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202.

  As described above, since the rear side of the first display substrate 4200 is covered with the protective member 4204, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the rear, and illegal acts on the first display substrate 4200 are prevented. Can be prevented. Further, the presence of the protective member 4204 makes it difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202. Here, since the protection member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to remove the protection member 4204 itself by being obstructed by the first cover member 4202.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are assembled with a concave and convex fitting structure, and after the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are assembled, it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble the first cover. Any one of the member 4202 and the protective member 4204 is configured to leave a trace of removal. The fitting structure is such that a claw-like engagement portion 4214 provided on one of the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 (the protection member 4204 in this embodiment) is connected to the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204. The first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 are fitted into an engagement receiving portion 4216 provided on the other (the first cover member 4202 in this embodiment), and the engagement portion 4214 and the engagement receiving portion 4216 are caught. It is integrated. The fitting structure is provided at a plurality of locations corresponding to the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204, and is distributed on the opposite sides of the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 across the first display substrate 4200. Is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the first cover member 4202 is provided with an engagement receiving portion 4216 in the lateral cover portion 4210. The engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided on the open end side of the lateral cover portion 4210 so as to form an opening edge on the rear side of the engagement opening formed so as to penetrate the lateral cover portion 4210. The lateral cover part 4210 is formed in a concave shape with the front part opened outward from the engagement opening to have a thin plate thickness, and an engagement receiving part 4216 is constructed over the opening side of the concave part. That is, in the present embodiment, the engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided with a plate thickness that is thinner than the plate thickness of the lateral cover portion 4210 so that the inside is recessed, and the engagement portion 4214 is easily fitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the protective member 4204 is provided with an engaging portion 4214 that protrudes from the outer edge along the plate surface of the protective member 4204. The width of the engagement portion 4214 and the width of the engagement receiving portion 4216 (engagement opening) are set substantially the same, and the thickness in the front-rear direction of the engagement portion 4214 and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement opening are When the engagement portion 4214 is fitted to the engagement receiving portion 4216, the engagement portion 4214 hits the opening edge of the engagement opening and is positioned. The engaging portion 4214 has an inclined surface such as an arc shape or a flat surface that is inclined backward as the front surface approaches the protruding end, and the rear surface is a flat surface along the rear surface of the protection member 4204. In other words, the engaging portion 4214 extends so that the front surface obliquely intersects with the engagement receiving portion 4216, and the rear surface intersects with the engagement receiving portion 4216 in an orthogonal or nearly orthogonal relationship. It is extended. Accordingly, when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted to the engaging receiving portion 4216, the first cover member 4202 is elastically deformed so as to be expanded by the inclination of the front surface of the engaging portion 4214 that hits the engaging receiving portion 4216, thereby engaging the engaging portion 4214. The engagement portion 4214 can be easily fitted into the engagement opening over the receiving portion 4216. When the engaging portion 4214 fits into the engaging opening, the engaging portion 4214 is caught by the engaging receiving portion 4216 and the rearward movement of the engaging portion 4214 is prevented. Here, when the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 are fitted, the rear surface of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 are hooked to face each other, so that the engaging portion 4214 is engaged. The first cover member 4202 is not guided to be expanded by the engaging portion 4214 like when the engagement receiving portion 4216 is fitted. Therefore, the protection member 4204 cannot be substantially detached from the first cover member 4202 by fitting the engagement portion 4214 into the engagement receiving portion 4216.

  Thus, according to the fitting structure of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216, it is difficult to remove the protective member 4204 from the first cover member 4202, and the first display substrate 4200 is attached by the protective member 4204. It is possible to protect and prevent an illegal act on the first display substrate 4200. In addition, when the engaging portion 4214 or the engaging receiving portion 4216 is destroyed and the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, there is a trace that the engaging receiving portion 4216 is broken on the first cover member 4202. The trace that destroyed the engaging portion 4214 remains in the protection member 4204, and it is easy to find out that there has been an illegal act. Furthermore, when the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, at least one of the engaging portion 4214 or the engaging receiving portion 4216 is broken, and the protective member 4204 is attached to the first cover member 4202 again. Cannot be reassembled.

  The first game information display device 59 of this embodiment is configured such that the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, and leave traces. Accordingly, the first display substrate 4200 disposed between the first cover member 4202 and the protection member 4204 is substantially difficult to remove from the first cover member 4202, and the first display member 4202 is not easily removed from the first cover member 4202. The reassembly is difficult and the removal mark remains on the first cover member 4202. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the first display substrate 4200 and to easily detect even if there are fraudulent acts.

  As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, an identification means 4220 that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 is disposed on the front side of the first cover member 4202. . The identification means 4220 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the transmissive part 4222 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and is provided around the transmissive part 4222. Is also provided with a shielding portion 4224 as a second region that hardly transmits light. Moreover, the identification means 4220 may be provided with the combination area | region 4226 (FIG. 80) which is displayed on the shielding part 4224 and shows the light emission mode of 2 or more LED4045 as a combination. The identification unit 4220 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The identification means 4220 is preferably formed in a shape that matches the front area of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens. In this embodiment, the identification means 4220 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. Has been. In this embodiment, the identification unit 4220 and the first cover member 4202 are bonded, but the size of the identification unit 4220 and the method of attaching to the first cover member 4202 are not limited thereto.

  The transmissive part 4222 of the present embodiment is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 so that the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted and affects the transmitted light. It has become. The transmissive portion 4222 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the transmissive portion 4222 on the front side of the window 4206 prevents the LED 4045 disposed on the opening of the window 4206 and the inside of the window 4206 from being directly visible from the front side. It is. Here, “influence on light” means, for example, an aspect that makes the LED 4045 difficult to visually recognize by being translucent, an aspect that colors the light emitted from the LED 4045 by being colored, A mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused and the light emitted from the LED 4045 is converged and a mode in which the light is emitted from the LED 4045 is combined, or a mode in which these are combined. Light is diffused by the transmission part 4222. The transmission part 4222 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged according to the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202. The plurality of transmission parts 4222 are identification means. 4220. That is, the identification means 4220 is formed with a transmission part 4222 having a square shape matching the window 4206 and the same size as the window 4206, and the transmission part 4222 closes the front opening of the window 4206.

  Thus, since the front side of the window 4206 is blocked by the transmission part 4222, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. Can do. That is, the transmissive portion 4222 can prevent an illegal act from being performed on the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 that penetrates to the inside of the first cover member 4202. In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmissive portion 4222, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LEDs 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmissive portion 4222, there is provided a shielding portion 4224 configured such that light is less likely to pass than the transmissive portion 4222 that covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, the shielding part 4224 is disposed so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding part 4224 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmission part 4222, and in this embodiment, a part other than the transmission part 4222 is configured in one sheet constituting the identification means 4220. The shielding part 4224 is arranged so as to overlap with the area other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover part 4208 of the first cover member 4202, and does not cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding unit 4224 is composed of a dark color such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black or a cold color such as amber, or the like, and has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well). Is different.

  Thus, since the shielding part 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmissive part 4222, the transmissive part 4222 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmissive part 4222 is further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Even if the window 4206 and the transmission portion 4222 are misaligned, it is difficult to understand that the window 4206 is not visible because it cannot be seen directly. Moreover, if the transmissive portion 4222 is placed on the window 4206, the transmissive portion 4222 surrounded by the shielding portion 4224 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shielding part 4224 is not limited to the configuration in which the transmission part 4222 is set to the same sheet, and the front surface of the front cover part 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding part 4224 so that the transparent part of the sheet Alternatively, other configurations such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 4224 appears on the front side by disposing the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 4224 may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the combination area 4226 is partitioned by a partition mark 4228 composed of a frame line (this embodiment) displayed on the shielding unit 4224. The division mark 4228 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of transmission parts 4222, and the combination area 4226 surrounded by the division mark 4228 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, the high probability gaming state indicator 68, the short-time gaming state indicator 69, the right-handed In the first indicator 67, the round number indicator 66, the normal symbol first indicator 62, and the normal symbol hold first indicator 65, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmission portion 4222) among them constitute the indicator. For a thing, a group of transmission parts 4222 corresponding to the display is surrounded by a division mark 4228 to form a combination area 4226 corresponding to each display. In addition, the division label 4228 is not limited to the form of the frame line, and may have any configuration that can recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4226. .

  As shown in FIG. 80, specifically, the transmission area 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row is surrounded by the division mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed. To do. A transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed. A transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61 is surrounded by a division mark 4228, and the first special symbol reservation unit A combination area 4226 corresponding to one display 63 is displayed. A transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61 is surrounded by a partition mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol holding first indicator 64 is displayed. In addition, the transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row is surrounded by the division mark 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the round number display 66 is displayed. A transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display 66 is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62 is displayed. A transmissive part 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 from the right side of the lower row is surrounded by a section mark 4228, and a combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol holding first display 65 is displayed.

  Thus, by displaying the combination area 4226, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is recognized in association with each other, and the player can easily recognize information by the combination of the LED 4045.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the identification means 4220 is arranged to overlap the first layer 4230 on the front side of the region other than the window 4206 in the first cover member 4202 and the first layer 4230 which is easy to transmit light. And a second layer 4232 that is less likely to transmit light than 4230. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmissive portion 4222 is configured only by the first layer 4230 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is between the first layer 4230 and the second layer 4232. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 4232, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole and prevents light from being transmitted from the shielding portion 4224. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 4230 is disposed on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 4232 is disposed on the front side (front side). The identification unit 4220 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 4232 on a sheet formed of the first layer 4230 by painting, printing, or the like, and there is a level difference that can be visually recognized between the transmission part 4222 and the shielding part 4224. Absent.

  When the first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 2, the connector 4100 on the rear surface is exposed to the rear side of the game board 2. The first game information display device 59 can be attached to and detached from the connector 4100 in a state where the first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 2, and is easy to use.

  As the first cover member 4202, the front cover portion 4208, the side cover portion 4210, the window defining portion 4212, the engagement receiving portion 4216, the alignment portion 4600, and the like are integrally formed of a thermoplastic resin or the like. Molded products made of synthetic resin are used. Further, as the protective member 4204, a molded product made of a synthetic resin such as a thermoplastic resin in which the respective portions such as the engaging portion 4214 are integrally formed is used.

  Note that the first display substrate 4200 is bonded to the first cover member 4202 by welding or bonding the first display substrate 4200 to the first cover member 4202 in a state where the surface is covered with the first cover member 4202. On the other hand, it may be attached in a state where it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or leave a trace of removal.

(Modification of the first game information display device 59)
Next, a modified example of the first game information display device 59 will be described. Here, differences from the first game information display device 59 described above will be mainly described, and description of similar configurations will be basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the first game information display device 59 is disposed on the rear side of the covering member 4800 installed on the game board 2, and the front side is covered with the covering member 4800. The covering member 4800 is a member that functions to close or fill the front and rear regions on the front side of the game board 2, and is composed of a plate portion constituting the front surface and a wall portion extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the plate portion. It is in the shape of a box that opens to the center (FIG. 90). Here, the “front-rear area” is an area that can be provided to provide a game area 2A through which a game ball passes on the front side of the plate member of the game board 2. The covering member 4800 is disposed so that the front surface thereof is substantially the same as the front ends of the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C, and is disposed outside the outer rail member 29C (game area 2A) as in the present embodiment. Sometimes doubles as a board decoration. In the case where the first game information display device 59 is arranged inside the game area 2A, one of the game parts installed in the game area 2A, such as the first start port 6, the second start port 7, and the big prize port 8, is provided. The part may be constituted by a covering member 4800.

  The covering member 4800 is configured so that the portion covering the front side of the first game information display device 59 is transparent or translucent, or has an opening corresponding to the window 4206 of the first game information display device 59. The state of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized through the window 4206. The covering member 4800 is attached to the plate member of the game board 2 so as to be replaceable by screwing or the like. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800 so as to be housed inside the covering member 4800. At this time, the first game information display device 59 has a back surface facing the back side of the game board 2 (plate member) and a connector 4100 (FIG. 93), which will be described later, provided so as to face the back side. 2 can be accessed from the back side. As described above, the covering member 4800 can be attached to and detached from the plate member with the first game information display device 59 attached, and the covering member 4800 can be changed according to the exchange of the first game information display device 59 or the change of the model. The 4800 can be easily replaced.

  Since the first game information display device 59 is covered with the covering member 4800, it is difficult to access from the outside. Even if a fraudulent act is performed, it is possible to save time until it reaches the first display substrate 4200, and it is possible to make fraud more difficult.

  The first game information display device 59 of this embodiment is detachably attached to the covering member 4800 by screwing or the like. Therefore, by removing the covering member 4800 from the plate member, it can be easily replaced when the first game information display device 59 breaks down. The first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove or reassemble from the covering member 4800 by bonding or the like, or when the first game information display device 59 is removed from the covering member 4800, You may attach with the structure in which a trace remains. In other words, the attachment structure of the first game information display device 59 and the covering member 4800 has a structure that is difficult to remove without destroying the covering member 4800 or the first game information display device 59, and the covering member 4800 or the first member by the removal. A structure that cannot be assembled as originally due to destruction or deformation of one game information display device 59, or a covering member that is destroyed or deformed by covering member 4800 or first game information display device 59 by removal. 4800 or the first game information display device 59 may have at least one structure in which a trace of removal remains.

  The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800, and the light of the LED 4045 is visible from the player via the covering member 4800. Further, the first game information display device 59 has a rear surface facing the back side of the game board 2 (plate member) and a connector 4100 (FIG. 93) provided so as to face the back side, from the back side of the game board 2. It is accessible.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, in this modification, current limiting means 4500 and 4500 for controlling the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the main control board 101 side. If the first game information display device 59 is electrically connected to the effect control board 102, the current limiting means 4500 and 4500 may be provided on the effect control board 102. As shown in FIG. 97, an excessive current flows through each LED 4045 by mounting a resistor 4500 as current limiting means on the main control board 101 and limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to a predetermined value or less. Is preventing. The resistor 4500 may be through-hole mounting in which the lead of the resistor 4500 is fixed to the hole of the printed board, but may be surface-mounted on the main control board 101. As a result, the main control board 101 can effectively use the surface opposite to the mounting surface without the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit protruding on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the resistor 4500.

  The resistor 4500 may be disposed on the other surface of the main control board 101 opposite to the surface on which the electrical component is mounted, at a position corresponding to the mounting region of the electrical component. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 and the mounting area of the electronic component may be either entirely overlapped or partially overlapped with the main control board 101 interposed therebetween. By mounting the resistor 4500 on one surface of the main control board 101, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 like through-hole mounting. In this way, the main control board 101 can be made more compact by effectively using both sides of the main control board 101.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the current limiting means 4500 may be provided as a driver 5600 on the main control board 101. The current limiting unit 4500 prevents the excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045 by limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 to be a predetermined value or less. Thus, by providing the current limiting means 4500 and 4500 on the main control board 101 side, the resistance of the first display board 4200 can be eliminated or reduced, so that the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. The first game information display device 59 can be downsized.

  As shown in FIGS. 94, 95, and 96, when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the first display substrate 4200 is opened at the open end of the horizontal cover portion 4210. The entire first display substrate 4200 is accommodated in the inner region of the first cover member 4202 at a position (this embodiment) aligned with the (rear end) or positioned on the front cover portion 4208 side (front side) with respect to the open end. The In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. The presence of the one cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. In the first cover member 4202 of this embodiment, the inner region is formed to match a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is stored in the inner region, the lateral cover portion 4210. Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held without being displaced.

  As described above, since the first display substrate 4200 is disposed in the state of being accommodated in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 from the front side or the lateral side, and the first display substrate 4200 is used. Unauthorized acts on the substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, even if it is attempted to remove the first display substrate 4200, it is difficult to access the first display substrate 4200 as described above, and therefore the first display substrate 4200 is removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled by an engagement structure in which the alignment portion 4600 is melted and engaged with the first display substrate 4200. Are configured such that when they are difficult to remove from each other, difficult to reassemble, or disassembled, traces of removal remain on either the first cover member 4202 or the first display substrate 4200. Specifically, when the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are fitted together, the tip of the alignment portion 4600 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is melted to be larger than the substrate hole 4400. By crushing in this way, the latching portion 4600a is formed at the tip of the alignment portion 4600. The first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched between the rear end of the window defining part 4212 and the hooking part 4600a of the alignment part 4600 and fixed to the first cover member 4202.

  Thus, according to the engagement structure described above, it is difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202, and the first display member 4200 is protected by the first cover member 4202, and the first display substrate 4200 is protected. Unauthorized acts on one display substrate 4200 can be prevented. Further, when the latching portion 4600a is destroyed and the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, a trace of the latching portion 4600a being destroyed remains on the first cover member 4202, and fraudulent activity is caused. It will be easier to discover that there was. Further, when the first display substrate 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the latching portion 4600a is broken and the first display substrate 4200 cannot be reattached to the first cover member 4202. It becomes difficult to reassemble.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, identification means 4220 that can identify the light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 as individual or combinations of the light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045 is arranged. . The identification means 4220 may be an arrangement associated with the display by the LED 4045 or the LED 4045, such as providing only the first cover member 4202, only the covering member 4800, or being distributed in the first cover member 4202 and the covering member 4800. In addition, the identification unit 4220 may be any one of a configuration attached to the front surface or the rear surface of the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800, a configuration provided inside the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800, and the like. The identification unit 4220 of this embodiment includes a first identification unit 5122 provided on the front surface of the first cover member 4202 and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the first identification unit 5122. The second identification part 5124 is arranged so as to overlap the front side. As shown in FIG. 89, the identification unit 4220 includes a third identification unit 4802 provided separately from the second identification unit 5124 on the front surface of the covering member 4800.

  As shown in FIG. 94, the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and a transmission unit 5126 serving as a first region that can transmit light or influence transmitted light, and the transmission unit 5126 A shielding portion 5128 is provided as a second region that is provided around and is less likely to transmit light than the transmission portion 5126. The first identification unit 5122 of this embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The first identification unit 5122 is preferably formed in a shape that matches the front surface area of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens. In this embodiment, the first identification unit 5122 covers the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. A portion 5122 is formed. In the present embodiment, the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member 4202 are bonded by the adhesive layer provided on the first identification unit 5122. However, the size of the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member The attachment method to 4202 is not limited to this. Note that the first identification unit 5122 may include a combination area that indicates combinations of light emission modes of two or more LEDs 4045.

  The transmission part 5126 is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 and can transmit light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. The transmission part 5126 is provided so as to cover the entire front side opening of the window 4206, and the front side opening of the window 4206 is covered by the transmission part 5126 on the front side of the window 4206. The transmissive portion 5126 may be configured to be transparent, or may be configured to affect the transmitted light so that the LED 4045 disposed inside the window 4206 cannot be directly seen from the front side. Here, “influence on light” means, for example, an aspect that makes the LED 4045 difficult to visually recognize by being translucent, an aspect that colors the light emitted from the LED 4045 by being colored, A mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is diffused and the light emitted from the LED 4045 is converged and a mode in which the light is emitted from the LED 4045 is combined, or a mode in which these are combined. Light is diffused by the transmission portion 5126. The transmission part 5126 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged in accordance with a plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmission parts 5126 are the first. The identification unit 5122 is provided. That is, the first identifying portion 5122 is formed with a transmissive portion 5126 having a quadrangular shape matching the window 4206 and the same size as the window 4206, and the transmissive portion 5126 closes the front opening of the window 4206 without a gap. .

  As described above, since the front side of the window 4206 is covered with the transmission part 5126, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. it can. In other words, the transmission part 5126 can prevent an illegal act from being performed on the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 that penetrates to the inside of the first cover member 4202. In addition, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmissive portion 5126, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LEDs 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the transmissive portion 5126, a shielding portion 5128 is provided that is configured to make it more difficult for light to pass through the transmissive portion 5126 that covers the window 4206. In other words, the shielding portion 5128 is disposed so as to surround the window 4206 on the front side of the first cover member 4202. The shielding part 5128 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmission part 5126, and in this embodiment, a part other than the transmission part 5126 is configured in one sheet constituting the first identification part 5122. The shielding part 5128 is arranged so as to overlap with the area other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover part 4208 of the first cover member 4202, and does not cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding unit 5128 is composed of a dark color such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, or a cold color such as amber, or the like, and has a low brightness level (which absorbs light well). Is different.

  Thus, since the shielding part 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmissive part 5126, the transmissive part 5126 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmissive part 5126 is further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Even if the window 4206 and the transmission portion 5126 are misaligned, it is difficult to understand that the window 4206 is not visible because it is not directly visible. In addition, if the transmission part 5126 is placed on the window 4206, the transmission part 5126 surrounded by the shielding part 5128 shines, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

  The shielding unit 5128 is not limited to the configuration in which the transmission unit 5126 is set to the same sheet, but the front surface of the front cover unit 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding unit 5128 so that the transparent portion of the sheet is set. Alternatively, other configurations such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 5128 appears on the front side by disposing the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 5128 may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the first identification unit 5122 is disposed on the first layer 5130 on the front side of the first cover member 4202 other than the window 4206 on the first layer 5130 that is easy to transmit light. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5131 that is less likely to transmit light than the first layer 5130. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmission portion 5126 is configured only by the first layer 5130 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is between the first layer 5130 and the second layer 5131. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 5131, light is difficult to transmit in the stacking direction (thickness direction), and light is prevented from transmitting from the shielding portion 5128. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 5130 is disposed on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 5131 is disposed on the front side (front side). The first identification unit 5122 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 5131 on a sheet made of the first layer 5130 by painting, printing, or the like, and can be visually recognized between the transmission unit 5126 and the shielding unit 5128. There is no step.

  By configuring the first identification portion 5122 in this manner, even if the window 4206 and the transmission portion 5126 are misaligned, light can be guided to the transmission portion 5126 by the first layer 5130, and the shielding portion 5128. Since the transmissive portion 5126 surrounded by the light shines, the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced. In addition, in the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128, the light incident on the first layer 5130 is blocked by the second layer 5131 on the front side and does not leak to the front side, so that the transmission portion 5126 can be clearly identified.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the second identification portion 5124 is located on the front side of the window 4206 and is attached to the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the light transmission unit 5132 and the light transmission unit 5132 as a first region that can transmit light or influence the transmitted light. The light-shielding part 5134 as a 2nd area | region which is hard to permeate | transmit light rather than the light transmission part 5132 is provided. In addition, the second identification unit 5124 may include a combination area 4804 that is displayed on the light shielding unit 5134 and indicates the light emission mode of two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The second identification portion 5124 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is formed in accordance with the range of the plurality of windows 4206, and the front side of the plurality of windows 4206 is covered by one second identification unit 5124. In the present embodiment, the second identification portion 5124 and the covering member 4800 are bonded by the adhesive layer of the second identification portion 5124. However, the size of the second identification portion 5124, the attachment method to the covering member 4800, etc. It is not limited to this.

  The light passing portion 5132 of the present modification is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202, and the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted or affects the transmitted light. It is like that. The light passing portion 5132 is provided so as to cover at least the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the state of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized through the window 4206 by the light passing portion 5132 on the front side of the window 4206. The light transmitting portion 5132 of this embodiment is configured to be transparent and formed in a range corresponding to the plurality of windows 4206. Note that the light transmitting unit 5132 may be configured to affect the transmitted light in the same manner as the transmitting unit 5126 of the first identifying unit 5122. Then, by adjusting the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the light passing portion 5132, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the state of the adjacent LED 4045 can be easily distinguished.

  Around the light passing portion 5132, there is provided a light blocking portion 5134 configured such that light is less likely to pass than the light passing portion 5132 that covers the window 4206. In other words, the light shielding portion 5134 is disposed so as to surround the window 4206 on the front side of the first cover member 4202. The light shielding portion 5134 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the light passing portion 5132, and in this embodiment, a portion other than the light passing portion 5132 is configured in one sheet constituting the second identifying portion 5124. The light shielding portion 5134 is disposed on the front side of the first cover member 4202 so as to overlap with an area other than the window 4206, and does not cover the inside of the window 4206. The light shielding unit 5134 is configured by a dark color with a low degree of brightness (which absorbs light well), such as a color that absorbs light of a wide wavelength such as black, or a cold color such as amber, and the color of the light transmitting unit 5132 Is different.

  As described above, since the light-shielding portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the light-transmitting portion 5132, the light-transmitting portion 5132 can be easily understood, and the LED 4045 recognized through the light-transmitting portion 5132 can be seen. The situation becomes easier to distinguish. Further, even if the window 4206 and the light transmitting portion 5132 are misaligned, it can be difficult to understand that they are misaligned.

  In addition, the light shielding part 5134 is not limited to the configuration in which the light transmitting part 5132 is set to the same sheet, but the front part of the covering member 4800 corresponding to the front side of the window 4206 is set as the light shielding part 5134 so that the transparent part of the sheet Other configurations such as a configuration in which the light shielding portion 5134 appears on the front side by not arranging the sheet via the front side of the light shielding portion 5134 may be used. The covering member 4800 may be provided with an opening corresponding to the window 4206, and the opening may be blocked by the second identification portion 5124 (the light transmitting portion 5132 and / or the light shielding portion 5134).

  The combination area 4804 is partitioned by a partition mark 4806 including a frame line (this embodiment) displayed on the light shielding portion 5134. The division mark 4806 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of light passing portions 5132, and the combination area 4804 surrounded by the division mark 4806 can be recognized separately from other areas. For example, the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, the high probability gaming state indicator 68, the short-time gaming state indicator 69, the right-handed In the first indicator 67, the round number indicator 66, the ordinary symbol first indicator 62, and the ordinary symbol holding first indicator 65, among them, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (the transmitting portion 5126 or the light transmitting portion 5132) are used. With respect to what constitutes the display device, a group of LEDs 4045 (transmission portion 5126 or light transmission portion 5132) corresponding to the display device is surrounded by a division mark 4806 to form a combination region 4804 corresponding to each display device. Note that the section mark 4806 is not limited to the form of the frame line, and may be any structure that can recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4804. .

  Specifically, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed by being surrounded by the division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed by being surrounded by a division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4845 in the upper row. A first special symbol hold first display surrounded by a division mark 4806 so as to correspond to two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first indicator 60 and the second special symbol first indicator 61. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the device 63 is displayed. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol hold first indicator 64 is displayed by surrounding it with a division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first indicator 61. In addition, a combination area 4804 corresponding to the round number display 66 is displayed by being surrounded by a partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62 is displayed by surrounding it with the division mark 4806 so as to correspond to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display. A combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol holding first display 65 is displayed by being surrounded by a partition mark 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 from the lower right side.

  Thus, by displaying the combination area 4804, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is recognized in association with each other, and the player can easily recognize information by the combination of the LED 4045.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the second identification unit 5124 is disposed so as to overlap the front side of the first layer 5136 in addition to the first layer 5136 that easily transmits light and the region corresponding to the window 4206. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5138 that is less likely to transmit light than 5136. In other words, the light passing portion 5132 corresponding to the window 4206 is configured by only the first layer 5136 that transmits light, and the portions corresponding to the light blocking portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light are the first layer 5136 and the second layer 5138. It is comprised by the laminated part. Since the stacked portion includes the second layer 5138, it is difficult to transmit light as a whole, and the light is blocked from being transmitted from the light shielding portion 5134. Here, in the stacked portion, the first layer 5136 is disposed on the rear side, and the second layer 5138 is disposed on the front side (front side). The second identification unit 5124 is obtained by, for example, laminating the second layer 5138 on a sheet made of the first layer 5136 by painting, printing, or the like, and is visible between the light transmission unit 5132 and the light shielding unit 5134. There is no step.

  The third identification unit 4802 is an area where various information is displayed, and is attached to the covering member 4800. The third identification portion 4802 is formed in a sheet shape, and is disposed on the front surface of the covering member 4800 at a position different from the second identification portion 5124 (upper side in the present embodiment). In the third identification unit 4802, the displayed information is visible to the player. In the present embodiment, the third identification portion 4802 and the covering member 4800 are bonded to each other by the adhesive layer of the third identification portion 4802. It is not limited to this. Further, the information displayed by the third identification unit 4802 may be displayed on the second identification unit 5124 or the first identification unit 5122 or may be displayed separately from the identification unit 4220, and the third identification unit 4802 may be omitted. .

  Thus, by providing the third identification unit 4802, more information can be displayed, and the information displayed on the first game information display device 59 can be more easily understood. Further, by dividing each information and sorting and displaying it on a plurality of identification units 4802, 5122, 5124, it is possible to flexibly cope with changes such as when changing models.

  The identification units 4802, 5122, and 5124 (identification means 4220) may be configured to cover their peripheral surfaces with a protection unit 4808 (FIG. 90). In the present embodiment, a protective portion 4808 is provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, the peripheral surface of the second identifying portion 5124 attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the third identifying portion attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. Each peripheral surface of 4802 is covered with a protective portion 4808. Specifically, the protection portion 4808 is configured by a wall extending in the front-rear direction in a recess formed in accordance with the shape of the identification portion 4802, 5124 corresponding to the attachment position of the identification portion 4802, 5124. Yes. Further, the concave portion of the covering member 4800 has a depth approximately equal to the thickness of the identification portions 4802 and 5124. The protective portion 4808 faces the circumferential surface of the identification portions 4802 and 5124 fitted and attached to the concave portions, and the identification portion. The entire peripheries of 4802 and 5124 are surrounded by a protection unit 4808.

  Thus, by covering the peripheral surfaces of the identification units 4802 and 5124 with the protection unit 4808, it is possible to make it difficult for the protection unit 4808 to access the identification units 4802 and 5124. Removal of 4802 and 5124 can be prevented. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as replacing the identification units 4802 and 5124 or removing the identification units 4802 and 5124 to access the first display substrate 4200. Further, the identification units 4802 and 5124 can be aligned by attaching the identification units 4802 and 5124 to the covering member 4800 with the protection unit 4808 as a reference. In particular, since the second identification unit 5124 overlapping the front side of the window 4206 can be arranged without deviation, the state of the LED 4045 can be more appropriately determined.

  In this modification, the protection unit 4808 is provided corresponding to the entire circumference of the identification units 4802, 5124. However, the protection unit 4808 is provided on a part of the peripheral surface of the identification units 4802, 5122, 5124 (identification means 4220). The structure provided correspondingly may be sufficient.

  The information displayed by the identification means 4220 is supplemented or explained by information related to profits given to the player in the game (sometimes referred to as game state information in the description) displayed by the first game information display device 59. Game status display, unique display indicating unique information such as model name, probability of gaming machine 1 (for example, 1/299), probability of gaming machine 1 (for example, 60/100), jackpot A specification display indicating specification information such as the number of rounds (for example, 15R, 4R, etc.) may be displayed alone or in combination. In addition, these displays are described by printing or other methods visible to the player.

  For example, as the game state display, as in the above-described embodiment, by forming the combination area 4804 surrounded by the partition mark 4806, the states of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the combination area 4804 are associated and recognized as combinations, The game state information displayed by the combination of a plurality of LEDs 4045 may be easily identified and assisted.

  FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the game state display 4810 applied in correspondence with the round number display 66. For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the game status display 4810 has a number of rounds at a position that is known to correspond to the round number display 66, such as a position corresponding to the side of the round number display 66. The pattern which represents the display 66 and the structure which describes the display mode and the number of rounds of LED4045 for every round may be sufficient. The game status display 4810 in FIG. 91A describes the game status information (number of rounds) displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 of the round number display 66. Therefore, by referring to the game status display 4810 in FIG. 91A, it is possible to easily identify the game status information (round number) indicated by the round number display 66.

  Further, as the game status display 4810, a sign such as a number or a symbol is arranged corresponding to the LED 4045 at a position corresponding to the side of the LED 4045 (FIG. 91 (b)) or the front side (FIG. 91 (c)). The sign may be configured to assist the recognition of the state of the LED 4045 as a combination, or the structure of the LED 4045 may be described. The label may be a color or a shape difference.

  The identification unit 4220 is divided into a first identification unit 5122 provided in the first cover member 4202 and a second identification unit 5124 provided in the covering member 4800 as a configuration corresponding to the front side of the window 4206. Since the functions required for the identification unit 4220 can be assigned to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the configuration of each identification unit 5122 and 5124 can be simplified. In addition, by assigning and setting the functions required for the identification unit 4220 to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the state of the LED 4045 can be more clearly distinguished and the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily understood. In addition, by arranging the first identification unit 5122 and the second identification unit 5124 so as to overlap each other, a synergistic effect that is difficult with one sheet can be obtained due to the overlap of the two identification units 5122 and 5124.

  Since the covering member 4800 is attached to the game board 2 in a replaceable manner, when the model is changed, if the covering member 4800 is removed from the game board 2 and replaced, the identification portions 4802 and 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 are replaced. It can be easily exchanged. If the unique display and the specification display are performed by the covering member 4800, another model can be handled by replacing the covering member 4800. Further, since the first identification unit 5122 is provided in the first cover member 4202, it is not affected by the replacement of the covering member 4800.

(Details of structure of second game information display device 79)
As shown in FIG. 99, the second game information display device 79 has a plurality of LEDs arranged in a triangular shape. These LEDs are the first and second special symbol second indicators 88 and 89, the first and second special symbol hold second indicators 83 and 84, the normal symbol second indicator 82, and the normal symbol hold second indicator. And a right-handed second display 87.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the second game information display device 79 covers at least the second display substrate 5800 having 10 LEDs on the surface thereof and the front side of the second display substrate 5800. The second cover member 5710 and the like are included. Although not shown here, on the front side (top) of the second cover member 5710, an identification unit that can identify the light emission modes of a plurality of LEDs individually or as a combination of two or more LED light emission modes is disposed. .

  The second cover member 5710 includes a plate-like pedestal portion 5730 that forms the bottom of the second cover member 5710, and a triangular prism-shaped protrusion portion 5720 that protrudes from the pedestal portion 5730. The corners on the side surfaces of the protrusions 5720 are chamfered, and the second game information display device 79 is arranged with the top of the protrusions 5720 facing the player.

  The second display substrate 5800 is a printed circuit board in which a plurality of LEDs are provided on the front surface that faces the player, and light can be emitted from each LED toward the front side. The LED is mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800, not through-hole mounting for fixing the LED lead to the hole of the printed circuit board. In the second display substrate 5800, the LED light emitting element and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the second display substrate 5800 are on the same front surface of the second display substrate 5800. That is, in the second display substrate 5800, the lead for connecting the LED to the circuit does not protrude on the rear surface, and the solder for fixing the LED is not disposed on the rear surface. As the LED, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. As the LED, any of a chip type or a shell type can be used as long as it can be mounted on the surface. Under the control of the control means of the effect control board 102, the second display board 5800 is controlled to turn on, turn off, and blink the plurality of LEDs, and turn on, turn off, blink, and the like, and combinations and states thereof. Information related to profits given to the player due to changes or the like is displayed.

  In this manner, by mounting the LEDs on the second display substrate 5800, the space for arranging the LEDs on the second display substrate 5800 can be reduced, and the second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact. it can. Further, by mounting the LED on the second display substrate 5800, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. In addition, by mounting the LED on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800, the mounting of the LED does not affect the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 like through-hole mounting. Accordingly, in the second display substrate 5800, other electronic components can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area where the plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the second display substrate 5800 is effectively used. The second display substrate 5800 can be made more compact.

  The LED may have either a configuration in which the light emitting elements are arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800 or a configuration in which the LEDs are embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The second display substrate 5800 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects white light or the like in a front region where a plurality of LEDs are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect black or the like light in the front region. An absorption part may be provided. In the case where the LED light emitting element protrudes from the surface of the second display substrate 5800, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED can be reflected by the reflecting portion and used efficiently. Further, in the case where the light emitting element of the LED is embedded in the second display substrate 5800, by providing an absorption portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED by the absorption portion is diffused on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800. Can be prevented.

  In the protruding portion 5720, ten light guide hole portions 5740 are formed as windows penetrating the protruding portion 5720 along the protruding direction. In addition, the second display substrate 5800 is attached to the base portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710 so as to cover the surface thereof, and each light guide hole portion 5740 is surface-mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The LED is arranged at a position corresponding to the LED. Accordingly, the lighting state of each LED can be visually recognized from the top side of the protruding portion 5720 through the light guide hole 5740.

  On the other hand, the back surface of the second display substrate 5800 is provided with a connector 5810 wired to an LED mounted on the front surface (see FIG. 100). And are connected.

  The second display substrate 5800 is screwed to the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710, so that the second display substrate 5800 can be detached from the second cover member 5710 and reassembled. The second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 is attached in a state where no trace remains when disassembled.

  Note that the method of attaching the second display substrate 5800 to the second cover member 5710 (the pedestal portion 5730) is not limited to this, and for example, by attaching using the engagement portion and the engagement receiving portion. The second cover member 5710 may be attached in a state in which no trace remains on the second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 when the second cover member 5710 can be detached, reassembled, and disassembled.

  Further, the shape of the protruding portion 5720 is not limited to the triangular prism shape, but may be various shapes such as a cylindrical shape and a quadrangular prism shape. In the present embodiment, as an example, ten LEDs are surface-mounted on the second display substrate 5800, and ten light guide hole portions corresponding to each LED are provided on the second cover member 5710. 5740 is formed, but not limited to this, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of LEDs and a light guide hole.

  In addition, the second game information display device 79 may be divided into a plurality of display devices according to functions, and in that case, the second game information display device 79 is gathered adjacent to the inner rail member 29B at the lower left of the game area 2A. Or may be distributed at a plurality of locations in the game area 2A.

  When the second game information display device 79 is divided into a plurality of display devices, for example, the first special symbol second display 88 and the first special symbol hold second display 89 are set as one display device, and the second The special symbol second display 81 and the second special symbol hold second display 84 are one display device, the normal symbol second display 82 and the normal symbol hold second display are one display device, Two displays may be used as one display device.

  The first special symbol second indicator 88, the second special symbol second indicator 89, and the normal symbol second indicator 82 are used as one display device, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 and the second special symbol second indicator 82 are provided. The symbol hold second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 may be one display device, and the right-handed second display may be one display device.

  The first special symbol second indicator 88, the second special symbol second indicator 89, and the normal symbol second indicator 82 are set as one display device, and the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 is indicated as one display. The second special symbol reservation second display 84 may be a single display device, and the normal symbol reservation second display 85 and the right-handed second display may be a single display device.

(Appearance frequency of production promotion production of production buttons and production levers)
Next, the appearance frequency of the operation promotion effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A will be described.
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing an example of distribution in which the variation pattern to be selected, and the effects of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A are selected in the low probability game state and the high probability game state.

Specifically, FIG. 101 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability gaming state variation pattern determination table, and FIG. 101 (A-2) is a low probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example. Moreover, FIG. 101 (B-1) is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table for high probability gaming states, and FIG. 101 (B-2) is an example of the operation promotion effect determination table for high probability gaming states. FIG.
Note that the low probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101 (A-1) and the high probability gaming state variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 101 (B-1) are stored in the main ROM 101b. In addition, the low-probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 101 (A-2) and the high-probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 101 (B-2) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. .

  As shown in FIG. 101 (A-1), in the case of a loss in the big hit lottery in the low probability gaming state, the variation pattern “01” or “02” is selected at a ratio of “80:20”. On the other hand, in the case of winning, the variation pattern “03” or “04” is selected at a ratio of “60:40”.

  As shown in FIG. 101 (A-2), when the variation pattern “01” (loss) is selected, an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at a ratio of “100: 0”, that is, Only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is selected. When the variation pattern “02” (losing) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “80:20”.

  Further, when the variation pattern “03” (winning) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “80:20”, and the variation pattern “04” (winning) is selected. In the case where the effect is made, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at the ratio of “70:30” is selected.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 101 (B-1), in the case of a loss in the big hit lottery in the high probability gaming state, the variation pattern “05” or “06” is selected at a ratio of “70:30”. On the other hand, in the case of winning, the variation pattern “07” or “08” is selected at a ratio of “50:50”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (B-2), when the variation pattern “05” (loss) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “80:20”. Is done. When the variation pattern “06” (losing) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “60:40”.

  Further, when the variation pattern “07” (winning) is selected, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “20:80”, and the variation pattern “08” (winning) is selected. In the case where the effect is made, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at the ratio of “10:90” is selected.

  Thus, in the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more easily selected than in the high-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)). It has become. In the low-probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), it is easier to select an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A than an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A.

Further, in the high probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)), it is easier to select an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the low probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)). Yes.
Therefore, in the low-probability gaming state, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to occur than in the high-probability gaming state, and the entertainment using the effect button 18A can be enhanced. In the low-probability gaming state, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more likely to occur than an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, and the entertainment can be enhanced by the characteristic effects in the low-probability gaming state. Furthermore, in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to generate an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the low-probability game state, and the effect using the effect lever 19A can be enhanced, and the effect lever 19A is used. Since the produced performance is a characteristic performance in the high-probability gaming state, it can be particularly interesting.

  In the present embodiment, in the low-probability gaming state, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more easily selected than in the high-probability gaming state, but in the low-probability gaming state, An effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be easily selected. In the low-probability gaming state, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is more easily selected than the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A. An effect that prompts the operation of 19A may be easily selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the high probability gaming state, it is easier to select the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A than in the low probability gaming state, but in the high probability gaming state, compared to the low probability gaming state, An effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 18A may be easily selected.

  Furthermore, in the low probability game state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected, and in the high probability game state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected. Furthermore, in the low probability game state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected, and in the high probability game state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, either an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected, but an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A, Also, there may be a case where neither of the effects prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

(Direction change mode at the time of production button production selection)
Next, a change in the effect mode of the effect button 18A when the effect by the effect button 18A is selected will be described.

FIG. 102 shows an example of the effect button effect change mode determination table. FIG. 102A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table, and FIG. 102B is an example of a high-probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table. FIG.
The low-probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 102 (A) and the high-probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 102 (B) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. .

The variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table are the same as the variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG.
The low probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when an effect related to the effect button 18A is selected in the low probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table. The high probability gaming state effect button effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when an effect related to the effect button 18A is selected in the high probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), when the variation pattern “01” (losing) is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, “no protrusion” at the rate of “100: 0”. Or, “with protrusion” is selected, that is, only “without protrusion” is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern “02” (losing) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the change pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “90:10”.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern “03” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, “no protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “30:70”. In addition, when the variation pattern “04” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”.
“No protrusion” is an effect that the effect ends with the effect button 18A being in a normal state (the state shown in FIG. 72A), and “with protrusion” is a state where the effect button 18A is protruded ( FIG. 72 (b)) shows an effect that changes during the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (B), when the variation pattern “05” (losing) is selected in the high-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the “protrusion” is set at the rate of “100: 0”. “None” or “With protrusions”, ie only “No protrusion” is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern “06” (losing) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the variation pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “95: 5”.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern “07” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, “no protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”. In addition, when the variation pattern “08” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect button 18A is selected, the change pattern “without protrusion” or “with protrusion” is selected at a ratio of “10:90”.

  As described above, the projecting effect of the effect button 18A is easy to be executed at the time of winning the win (see FIG. 102). As described above, in the low probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)), the effect related to the effect button 18A is selected more than in the high probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)). It has become easier. Therefore, in the low-probability gaming state, an effect related to the effect button 18A is more likely to occur than in the high-probability gaming state, and the projecting effect of the effect button 18A is easy to be executed at the time of winning, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can do.

(Direction change mode when effect lever effect is selected)
Next, a change in the effect mode of the effect lever 19A when the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected will be described.

FIG. 103 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect lever effect change mode determination table. FIG. 103 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table, and FIG. 103 (B) is an example of a high probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table. FIG.
The low probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 103 (A) and the high probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 103 (B) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. .

The variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table are the same as the variation pattern determination table and the operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG.
The low probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when an effect related to the effect lever 19A is selected in the low probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table. The high probability game state effect lever effect change mode determination table is a table that is referred to when an effect related to the effect lever 19A is selected in the high probability game state operation promotion effect determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the variation pattern “01” (losing) is selected in the low-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” at a rate of “100: 0”. Alternatively, “with vibration”, ie, only “without vibration” is selected. In addition, when the variation pattern “02” (losing) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “90:10”.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern “03” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “30:70”. When the variation pattern “04” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”.
“No vibration” is an effect in which the effect is ended while the effect lever 19A is in a normal state (non-vibrated state). It is a changing production.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (B), when the variation pattern “05” (losing) is selected in the high-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “vibration” is set at a rate of “100: 0”. “None” or “With vibration”, ie only “No vibration” is selected. Further, when the variation pattern “06” (losing) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “95: 5”.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern “07” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”. When the variation pattern “08” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “10:90”.

  Thus, at the time of winning, it is easy to execute the vibration effect of the effect lever 19A (see FIG. 103). As described above, in the high probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (B-2)), the effect related to the effect lever 19A is selected more than in the low probability gaming state (see FIG. 101 (A-2)). It has become easier. Therefore, in the high-probability gaming state, an effect related to the effect lever 19A is more likely to occur than in the low-probability gaming state, and the vibration effect of the effect lever 19A is easy to be executed at the time of winning, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can do.

(Frequency of appearance of operation buttons and production levers in the high-probability gaming state (production button <production lever) and production change mode when production lever production is selected)
Next, an effect when the appearance frequency of the operation promotion effect of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A in the high probability gaming state is different from the above embodiment will be described.

FIG. 104 shows a variation pattern determination table in the high probability gaming state. Specifically, FIG. 104 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for high probability gaming state, and FIG. 104 (A-2) is an operation promotion effect determination table for high probability gaming state. 104 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table.
Note that the variation pattern determination table for the high probability gaming state shown in FIG. 104 (A-1) is stored in the main ROM 101b. Further, the high probability gaming state operation promotion effect determination table shown in FIG. 104 (A-2) and the high probability gaming state effect lever effect change mode determination table shown in FIG. 104 (B) are stored in the sub ROM 102b. .

  As shown in FIG. 104 (A-1), in the case of a loss in the big hit lottery in the high probability gaming state, the variation pattern “05” or “06” is selected at a ratio of “70:30”. On the other hand, in the case of winning, the variation pattern “07” or “08” is selected at a ratio of “60:40”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 104 (A-2), when the variation pattern “05” (loss) is selected, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at the rate of “40:60”. Is done. When the variation pattern “06” (losing) is selected, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “30:70”.

  Further, when the variation pattern “07” (winning) is selected, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A is selected at a ratio of “20:80”, and the variation pattern “08” (winning) is selected. In the case where the effect is made, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A at the ratio of “10:90” is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (B), when the variation pattern “05” (losing) is selected in the high-probability gaming state and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “vibration” is set at a rate of “100: 0”. “None” or “With vibration”, ie only “No vibration” is selected. Further, when the variation pattern “06” (losing) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “95: 5”.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern “07” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “20:80”. When the variation pattern “08” (winning) is selected and the effect by the effect lever 19A is selected, the variation pattern “no vibration” or “with vibration” is selected at a ratio of “10:90”.

  Thus, in the high-probability gaming state, the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is more easily selected than the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A (see FIG. 104 (A-2)). Since the vibration effect of the lever 19A is easy to be executed (see FIG. 104B), the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the high-probability gaming state, it is easier to select the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A than the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A, but the operation of the effect lever 19A is prompted. An effect that prompts an operation of the effect button 18A may be selected more easily than an effect. Furthermore, in the high-probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be selected. Further, in the high probability gaming state, only the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, either an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A or an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected, but an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A, Also, there may be a case where neither of the effects prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

(Production that allows operation of multiple operation units (production buttons and production levers))
Next, the case where the operation of not only the effect lever 19A but also the effect button 18A is effective at the time of the lever promotion operation effect of the effect lever 19A will be described.

FIG. 105 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable effect determination table that enables operations of a plurality of operation units (the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A).
Specifically, FIG. 105 (A-1) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for high probability gaming state, and FIG. 105 (A-2) is an operation promotion effect determination table for high probability gaming state. FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an operation effective period of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 14 when a variable effect pattern that enables operation of a plurality of operation units (the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A) is selected.

  In the following, a case will be described in which a win is made in the jackpot lottery in the high probability gaming state, the variation pattern “07” is selected, and an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (A), when the sub CPU 102a selects a variation effect pattern in which operations of a plurality of operation units are effective, first, all three decorative symbols vary with respect to the image display device 14. As shown, the effect image is displayed to display the effect effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the sub CPU 102a temporarily stops and displays the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol with the same numeral, and only the central decorative symbol is changed. The effect is displayed on the image display device 14.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106C, the sub CPU 102a temporarily stops and displays the central decorative symbol with a symbol indicating a number different from the numbers of the left and right decorative symbols. Then, the sub CPU 102a stands by until a time that can be recognized by the player in this state has elapsed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106D, the sub CPU 102a moves, for example, the first decorative member 17A as a gimmick to appear on the front surface of the image display device 14. Note that the sub CPU 102a changes the display of the decorative symbol from approximately the center to the upper right, reduces the display range, and displays it in the reach effect state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106E, the sub CPU 102a retracts the first decorative member 17A from the front surface of the image display device 14 (for example, returns it to the initial position), and moves the effect lever 19A to the image display device 14. A lever promoting operation effect for operation is performed over a predetermined effective period. At this time, the sub CPU 102a shines in order to easily recognize that the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A can be operated. Further, the sub CPU 102a puts the effect button 18A in a projecting state in order to make it easier to operate. In addition, it is not necessary to dare the operation | movement which makes the production | presentation button 18A shine or makes it protrude.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the sub CPU 102a validates the operations of both the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A at the start of the lever promotion operation effect. The operations of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A are valid while the lever promotion operation effect is being performed. When the operation of the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A is detected, the lever promotion operation effect ends, and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A also ends. If neither the operation of the effect lever 19A nor the operation of the effect button 18A is detected within the operation effective period, the operation of the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A becomes invalid as the operation effective period ends.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), when the operation of the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A is detected, the sub CPU 102a displays an effect image indicating the lottery result on the image display device 14.

  In this way, even if only the lever promotion operation effect for operating the effect lever 19A is performed on the image display device 14, the operations of both the effect lever 19A and the effect button 18A are effective. Can play a game using the operation part which is easy to operate among the effect lever 19A or the effect button 18A, and can improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the two operation units of the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more operation units may be used.

(First specific example related to state transition and sixth specific example of distribution of operation means related to fluctuation pattern and fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, a first specific example related to state transition and a sixth specific example of the distribution of operation means related to the change pattern and the change pattern will be described. 107 will be described on the assumption that “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 107B-1 has been determined.

  First, FIG. 107 (A) is a diagram showing a transition (state transition) of effects displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, “change start” when the production symbol starts to fluctuate, “before reach” before the reach is performed after the production symbol starts to fluctuate, and “after reach” after the reach is formed And “development reach” performed after “after reach”. Note that the reach performed in the “after-reach” period is executed with a relatively low degree of expectation for the jackpot, and temporarily stops a symbol indicating a loss (for example, “767”). After that, the transition is made to reach performed during the period of “Development reach”. Reach (for example, “special reach”) during the “development reach” period has a higher expectation for jackpot than the reach (for example, “super reach”) for the period after “reach” High reach is implemented. Depending on the determined special symbol variation pattern, there is also a pattern that stops losing in the reach performed in the `` after reach '' period and ends the variation without transitioning to `` development reach ''. For example, when a symbol indicating a loss (for example, “767”) is temporarily stopped, the transition is made to “development reach”, or the temporary stop is confirmed and the change is made without transition to “development reach”. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the game ends.

  Then, the image display device 14 displays an image that imitates the effect button 18A and displays an image that prompts the user to operate the effect button 18A (press the button!) In “before reach” after “change start”. To do. The effect control board 102 sets the operation effective period of the effect button 18 </ b> A via the lamp control board 104. When the “operation valid period” is set, operation information is input to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104 when the player operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Thus, if the “operation valid period” is not set, even if the player operates the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, the operation information is not input to the effect control board 102. In addition, it is assumed that the operation valid period is set to be the same as or longer than the display time of the image imitating the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A. Then, when the effect button 18A is operated during the operation effective period, for example, a notice image for notifying that a reach is formed is displayed. Specifically, when the effect button 18A is operated, an effect is displayed in which a character image is displayed and the possibility that a reach is formed is determined by the character type, the character line, or the like. Such an effect does not need to be displayed when the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation effective period, and when the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation effective period, You may display automatically with progress of operation effective period. Before reaching, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed in addition to the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!). An image that prompts the operation of the lever 19A (draw the lever!) May be displayed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 (B-2).

  In the image display device 14, a reach is formed after displaying an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18 </ b> A in “before reach”. In the example of FIG. 107, in the display area 140 of the image display device 14, “7” symbols are displayed in the effect symbol display area (left), and “7” symbols are displayed in the effect symbol display area (right). The state where the effect symbol display area (medium) is variably displayed is shown. Then, a “reach!” Image indicating that a reach has been formed is displayed.

  In the image display device 14, for example, in “after reach” after the reach is formed, an effect corresponding to “super reach” is executed, and the degree of expectation for jackpot is higher than “super reach”. An effect or the like is performed to ask whether or not to transition to “special reach”. In “Super Reach”, it is possible to temporarily stop the lost symbol and then transition to “Special Reach”. You may comprise so that it may change to "reach".

  In the image display device 14, for example, an effect corresponding to “special reach” is executed in “development reach” after “reach”, and when the jackpot is determined, the symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed. Derived, and when the loss is determined, the symbol indicating the deviation is derived. It should be noted that when deriving either the big hit or the loss, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image for urging the operation of the effect lever 19A (lever pull!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation effective period of the effect lever 19 </ b> A via the lamp control board 104. It is assumed that the operation effective period is set to be the same as or longer than the display time of the image imitating the effect lever 19A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. That is, in deriving any of the symbols, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (draw the lever!) Is displayed, and the player operates the effect lever 19A so that the player operates the effect lever 19A. As a result of the operation, an effect is produced in which either the big hit or the loss is derived. It should be noted that the derivation of either the big hit or the loss is assumed to be automatically displayed as the operation effective period elapses when the effect lever 19A is not operated during the operation effective period. In the development reach, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed in addition to an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (lever pull!). An image prompting the operation of the button 18A (press the button!) May be displayed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 107 (B-2). In the example of FIG. 107, a symbol “777” indicating a jackpot is derived, and an image indicating that the jackpot has been won (jacket !!) is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 107 (B-1) is a figure which shows the variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) in a low probability game state, the content (effect content) corresponding to a variation pattern, and the distribution of a variation pattern. is there. Note that FIG. 107 (B-1) shows part of the variation pattern for convenience of explanation, and has a plurality of variation patterns in addition to this. The “variation pattern 01 (losing)” is a variation pattern that is selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the content of the effect is defined as transition from “normal reach” to “super reach”. It has been. The “variation pattern 02 (loss)” is a variation pattern that is selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, and the content of the effect is defined as a transition from “normal reach” to “special reach”. It has been. When the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the distribution for which “variation pattern 01 (loss)” is selected is “80/100”, and the distribution for which “variation pattern 02 (loss)” is selected is “20/100”, and the ratio of “variation pattern 01 (loss)” being selected is high. Note that any value can be set as the distribution value. The “variation pattern 03 (winning)” is a variation pattern that is selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a win, and the content of the effect is defined as a transition from “normal reach” to “super reach”. It has been. The “variation pattern 04 (hit)” is a variation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot determination is a win, and the content changes from “normal reach” to “super reach”. The contents of the transition from “Super Reach” to “Special Reach” are defined. If the result of the jackpot determination is a win, the distribution for which “variation pattern 03 (win)” is selected is “50/100”, and the distribution for which “variation pattern 04 (win)” is selected is “50/100”, and the selected ratio is uniform. Note that any value can be set as the distribution value.

  Next, FIG. 107 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A “before reach” and the operation of the effect lever 19A corresponding to the change pattern (special symbol change pattern) in the low probability gaming state. The relationship between the ratio of executing the effects and the ratio of executing the operation effects of the effect button 18A after the reach and the ratio of executing the operation effects of the effect lever 19A are shown. That is, in the image display device 14, the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18 </ b> A “before reach” and the ratio displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19 </ b> A, and the image display device 14. It can be said that the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A after the reach and the ratio displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is shown.

  “Before reach” of “Fluctuation pattern 01 (losing)” is “100/100” when the effect button 18A is selected, and “0/100” when the effect lever 19A is selected. Thus, the effect lever 19A is not selected. In addition, “Before reach” of “Fluctuation pattern 02 (losing)” is “90/100” for the selection of the effect button 18A, and “10/100” for the selection of the effect lever 19A. 100 ". In addition, “before reach” of “variation pattern 03 (winning)” is “100/100” for the selection of the effect button 18A, and “0/0” for the selection of the effect lever 19A. 100 "and the effect lever 19A is not selected. In addition, “Before reach” of “Fluctuation pattern 04 (winning)” is “90/100” for the selection of the effect button 18A, and “10/100” for the selection of the effect lever 19A. 100 ". That is, in “before reach”, it can be said that the ratio of the effect button 18A is higher than the effect lever 19A is selected as a whole of the variation pattern. Note that any value can be set as the distribution value.

  On the other hand, in “After reach” of “Fluctuation pattern 01 (losing)”, the distribution for selecting the effect button 18A is “90/100”, and the distribution for selecting the effect lever 19A is “10 / 100 ". In “Fluctuation pattern 02 (losing)”, “After reach”, the distribution of the effect button 18A is “0/100”, and the distribution of the effect lever 19A is “100/100”. 100 "and the production button 18A is not selected. Further, in “After reach” of “Fluctuation pattern 03 (winning)”, the distribution for which the effect button 18A is selected is “50/100”, and the distribution for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “50/100”. 100 ". Also, in “After reach” of “Fluctuation pattern 04 (winning)”, the allocation of the effect button 18A is “0/100”, and the allocation of the effect lever 19A is “100/100”. 100 ". That is, in “after reach”, it can be said that the ratio of the effect lever 19A being selected is higher than the effect button 18A being selected as a whole of the variation pattern. Note that any value can be set as the distribution value.

  Thus, in “Before reach”, the ratio of the effect button 18A is selected higher than the effect lever 19A is selected, and after “reach”, the effect button 18A is selected rather than selected. By increasing the ratio at which the lever 19A is selected, when a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operation means is being operated. In addition, when performing an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, it is possible to set the operation effective period of the effect button 18A and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A. However, in this case, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. In other words, the effect that prompts the operation only executes the effect that prompts the operation of any one of the operation means, but the operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed when the effect which urges operation of effect lever 19A is performed. By comprising in this way, when a several operation means is provided, since the player can also operate the operation means which a player wants to operate, the improvement of the game entertainment further can be aimed at.

  In the first specific example relating to the state transition, the following changes can also be made. That is, in FIG. 107, an image prompting the operation of the “before reach” effect button 18A after “start of variation” is displayed and the “operation valid period” is set, but at the timing of “change start” An image prompting the operation of 18A may be displayed, and the “operation valid period” may be set. In addition, in the “development reach”, an image that prompts the player to operate the effect lever 19A is displayed, and the player operates the effect lever 19A. As a result, the player operates the effect lever 19A. Although it is decided to perform an effect in which one of the symbols is derived, the timing for performing the effect may be any timing as long as it is between “reach” and the timing for deriving the symbol. Further, for the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Alternatively, only a meter image may be displayed and an image may be displayed in which the gauge image is changed according to the operation effective period. In this case, it can be said to display an image indicating that the operation means can be operated.

(Second specific example related to state transition and seventh specific example of distribution of operation means related to fluctuation pattern and fluctuation pattern)
Next, a second specific example relating to state transition and a seventh specific example relating to the change pattern and the operation means relating to the change pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 108 will be described on the assumption that “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 108B-1 has been determined.

  First, FIG. 108 (A) is a diagram showing a transition (state transition) of effects displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, the “change start” when the production symbol starts to change, “after reach (first reach)” after the reach is formed, and “development reach (first reach) performed after the“ reach ” 2 reach) ”. Note that the reach performed in the “after-reach” period is executed with a relatively low degree of expectation for the jackpot, and temporarily stops a symbol indicating a loss (for example, “767”). After that, the transition is made to reach performed during the period of “Development reach”. Reach (for example, “special reach”) during the “development reach” period has a higher expectation for jackpot than the reach (for example, “super reach”) for the period after “reach” High reach is implemented. Depending on the determined special symbol variation pattern, there is also a pattern that stops losing in the reach performed in the `` after reach '' period and ends the variation without transitioning to `` development reach ''. For example, when a symbol indicating a loss (for example, “767”) is temporarily stopped, the transition is made to “development reach”, or the temporary stop is confirmed and the change is made without transition to “development reach”. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the game ends.

  Then, the image display device 14 displays an image imitating the effect button 18A in “after reach” after the reach formation, and displays an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!). The effect control board 102 sets the operation effective period of the effect button 18 </ b> A via the lamp control board 104. The operation valid period is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 107, and is set at the same time as the display time of the image imitating the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, or longer than that. It is assumed that it is set. When the effect button 18A is operated during the operation effective period, for example, a notice image for notifying the possibility of transition to the development reach is displayed. Specifically, when the effect button 18A is operated, an effect is displayed in which a character image is displayed, and the possibility of transition to advanced reach is notified depending on the character type, character speech, and the like. Such an effect does not need to be displayed when the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation effective period, and when the effect button 18A is not operated during the operation effective period, You may display automatically with progress of operation effective period. After the reach, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed in addition to the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!). An image that prompts the operation of the lever 19A (draw the lever!) May be displayed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 (B-2).

  In “after reach”, an image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A may be displayed after temporarily suspending the symbol of the loss. For example, when it is determined to shift to the development reach, after “reach”, after temporarily suspending the symbol of the loss, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and the effect button 18A is displayed. When operated, the first decorative member 17A may be operated to make a transition to the development reach.

  In the image display device 14, for example, an effect corresponding to “special reach” is executed in “development reach”, and when the big hit is determined, a symbol indicating the big hit is derived and the loss is determined. If it is, the symbol indicating the deviation is derived. In deriving any of these symbols, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (with the lever pulled!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation effective period of the effect lever 19 </ b> A via the lamp control board 104. It is assumed that the operation effective period is set to be the same as or longer than the display time of the image imitating the effect lever 19A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A. In other words, when deriving the symbol of either a big hit or a loss, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (draw the lever!) Is displayed and the player operates the effect lever 19A, as if the player However, by operating the effect lever 19A, an effect is obtained in which either a big hit or a lost symbol is derived. It should be noted that the derivation of either the big hit or the loss is assumed to be automatically displayed as the operation effective period elapses when the effect lever 19A is not operated during the operation effective period. In the development reach, an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed in addition to an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (lever pull!). An image prompting the operation of the button 18A (press the button!) May be displayed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 108 (B-2). In the example of FIG. 108, the symbol “777” indicating the jackpot is derived, and an image indicating that the jackpot has been won (jacket !!) is displayed.

  Next, FIG. 108 (B-1) is the same as that described in the description of FIG. 107 (B-1); Next, FIG. 108 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the “first reach” corresponding to the change pattern (special symbol change pattern) in the low probability gaming state and the effect lever 19A. The relationship between the ratio of executing the operation effect and the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the “second reach” and the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect lever 19A are shown. That is, in the image display device 14, the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18 </ b> A in “first reach” and the ratio displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19 </ b> A, and the image display device 14, it can be said that the relationship between the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A in “second reach” is displayed and the ratio at which the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed.

  In the “first reach” of the “variation pattern 01 (losing)”, the allocation of the effect button 18A is “100/100”, and the allocation of the effect lever 19A is “0/100”. The production lever 19A is not selected. In the “first reach” of “variation pattern 02 (losing)”, the distribution of the effect button 18A is “90/100”, and the distribution of the effect lever 19A is “10”. / 100 ". In the “first reach” of the “variation pattern 03 (winning)”, the allocation of the effect button 18A is “100/100”, and the allocation of the effect lever 19A is “0”. / 100 ", and the effect lever 19A is not selected. In the “first reach” of the “variation pattern 04 (win)”, the distribution of the effect button 18A is “90/100”, and the distribution of the effect lever 19A is “10”. / 100 ". That is, in the “first reach”, it can be said that the ratio of the effect button 18A being selected is higher than the effect lever 19A being selected as a whole of the variation pattern. Note that any value can be set as the distribution value.

  On the other hand, in the “second reach” of the “variation pattern 01 (losing)”, the allocation of the effect button 18A is “80/100”, and the allocation of the effect lever 19A is “20”. / 100 ". In the “second reach” of the “variation pattern 02 (losing)”, the distribution of the effect button 18A is “10/100”, and the distribution of the effect lever 19A is “90”. / 100 "and the production button 18A is not selected. Further, in the “second reach” of the “variation pattern 03 (winning)”, the distribution for selecting the effect button 18A is “50/100”, and the distribution for selecting the effect lever 19A is “50”. / 100 ". In the “second reach” of the “variation pattern 04 (hit)”, the distribution for selecting the effect button 18A is “0/100”, and the distribution for selecting the effect lever 19A is “100”. / 100 ". That is, in the “second reach”, it can be said that the ratio of selecting the effect lever 19A is higher than the effect button 18A is selected as a whole of the variation pattern. Note that any value can be set as the distribution value.

  As described above, in the “first reach”, the ratio of selecting the effect button 18A is higher than in the case where the effect lever 19A is selected, and in the “second reach”, the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the effect lever 19A is selected, when a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operation means is being operated. In addition, when performing an effect prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, it is possible to set the operation effective period of the effect button 18A and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A. However, in this case, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. In other words, the effect that prompts the operation only executes the effect that prompts the operation of any one of the operation means, but the operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed when the effect which urges operation of effect lever 19A is performed. By comprising in this way, when a several operation means is provided, since the player can also operate the operation means which a player wants to operate, the improvement of the game entertainment further can be aimed at.

  In the second specific example relating to the state transition, the following changes can also be made. That is, in FIG. 108, in “first reach”, an image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the “operation valid period” is set. However, if “first reach” is being performed. The timing for displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and setting the “operation valid period” may be any timing. In the “second reach”, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed and the player operates the effect lever 19A. As a result, the player operates the effect lever 19A. However, the timing for performing the performance may be any timing as long as the “second reach” is being performed. . Further, for the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Alternatively, only a meter image may be displayed and an image may be displayed in which the gauge image is changed according to the operation effective period. In this case, it can be said to display an image indicating that the operation means can be operated.

(Third specific example related to state transition, and eighth specific example of distribution of operation means related to fluctuation pattern and fluctuation pattern)
Next, a third specific example relating to state transition and an eighth specific example relating to the change pattern and operation means relating to the change pattern will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 109, description will be made assuming that “variation pattern 02” and “variation pattern 04” shown in FIG. 109 (B-1) have been determined.

  First, FIG. 109 (A) is a diagram showing a transition (state transition) of effects displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, it is composed of “change start” in which the production symbol starts changing, “reach” in which the reach is formed, and “development reach” that transitions from “reach”. Note that the reach performed during the “reach” period is executed with a relatively low degree of expectation for the jackpot, and temporarily stops a symbol indicating a loss (for example, “767”). After that, the transition is made to reach performed during the period of “Development reach”. It should be noted that the reach (for example, “special reach”) performed during the “development reach” period has a higher expectation for jackpot than the reach (for example, “super reach”) performed during the “reach” period. Reach is executed. Depending on the determined special symbol variation pattern, there is also a pattern that stops losing at the reach performed during the `` reach '' period and ends the variation without transitioning to `` development reach ''. When the symbol indicating the loss (for example, “767”) is temporarily stopped, the transition is made to “development reach” or from the temporary stop to the fixed stop, and the change is made without transitioning to “development reach”. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not to end.

  In the image display device 14, for example, in the “development reach” after “reach”, an effect corresponding to “special reach” is executed. Derived, and when the loss is determined, the symbol indicating the deviation is derived. In deriving any of these symbols, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed according to the variation pattern, and an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!) Is displayed. There is a case where an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed and an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A (the lever is pulled!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation valid period of the operating means to be operated via the lamp control board 104. The operation valid period is the same as that described in FIG. 107, and is set to be the same as or longer than the display time of the image imitating the operating means to be operated and the image prompting the operation. It is assumed that In other words, in deriving either the big hit or the lost design, an image prompting one of the operations is displayed and the operation means corresponding to the player is operated so that the player operates the operation means. As a result, an effect in which a symbol of either a big hit or a loss is derived is performed (hereinafter referred to as “decision effect”). Note that it is assumed that one of the symbols is automatically displayed as the operation effective period elapses when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. In the example of FIG. 109, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and then an image (unfortunately!) Indicating that the game has been lost is displayed ( “Fluctuation pattern 02”), an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and then an image (hit! 1 shows a state in which the decorative member 17A is operated ("variation pattern 04").

  Next, FIG. 109 (B-1) is basically the same as (B-1) in FIGS. 107 and 108, and only a part of the distribution is different. Next, FIG. 109 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the determined effect and the operation effect of the effect lever 19A corresponding to the change pattern (special symbol change pattern) in the low probability gaming state. The relationship with the ratio to perform and the relationship of the action | operation of a movable body corresponding to a fluctuation pattern and a non-operation are shown. That is, it can be said that the image display device 14 shows the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the ratio displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the determined effect. Note that the movable body refers to the first decorative member 17A.

  The “variation pattern 01 (losing)” is “100/100” in which the effect button 18A is selected, and “0/100” in which the effect lever 19A is selected. The production lever 19A is not selected. Moreover, since it is a variation pattern of loss, the movable body remains inactive. In addition, in “variation pattern 02 (losing)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “70/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “30/100”. Yes. Moreover, since it is a variation pattern of loss, the movable body remains inactive. In addition, in the “variation pattern 03 (winning)”, the distribution in which the effect button 18A is selected is “70/100”, and the distribution in which the effect lever 19A is selected is “30/100”. Yes. In addition, since it is a hit variation pattern, the movable body operates to the front side of the image display device 14 as shown by the big hit in FIG. Further, in the “variation pattern 04 (winning)”, the allocation for which the effect button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the allocation for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “100/100”. The effect button 18A is not selected. In addition, since it is a hit variation pattern, the movable body operates to the front side of the image display device 14 as shown by the big hit in FIG. That is, in the determined effect, an image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the image that prompts the operation of the effect button 19A is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated as compared to the case where the effect button 18A is operated. It can be said that the rate at which the movable body operates is higher. Note that any value can be set as the distribution value.

  In this way, in the decision effect, an image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and an image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated as compared with the case where the effect button 18A is operated. In this case, by increasing the rate at which the movable body is actuated, it is possible to focus on which operation means an image prompting for operation is displayed in the decision effect. It should be noted that, in the determined effect, when the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is being performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A can be set and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can be set. However, in this case, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. In other words, the effect that prompts the operation only executes the effect that prompts the operation of any one of the operation means, but the operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed when the effect which urges operation of effect lever 19A is performed. By comprising in this way, when a several operation means is provided, since the player can also operate the operation means which a player wants to operate, the improvement of the game entertainment further can be aimed at.

  In the third specific example related to the state transition, the following changes can be made. That is, in FIG. 109, images that prompt the operation are displayed between “change start” and “reach” and between “reach” and “development reach”, and the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A are operated. Good. Further, in this case, when the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, compared to the case where the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, the “determination effect” of the effect lever 19A is displayed. The ratio at which the image prompting the operation is displayed may be increased. Further, for the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Alternatively, only a meter image may be displayed and an image may be displayed in which the gauge image is changed according to the operation effective period. In this case, it can be said to display an image indicating that the operation means can be operated.

(Fourth specific example related to state transition and ninth specific example of distribution of operation means related to fluctuation pattern and fluctuation pattern)
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, a fourth specific example relating to state transition and a ninth specific example of distribution of operation means relating to the change pattern and the change pattern will be described. 110 will be described assuming that “variation pattern 01” and “variation pattern 03” shown in FIG. 110 (B-1) have been determined.

  First, FIG. 110A is a diagram illustrating a transition (state transition) of effects displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, the “change start” where the design starts to change, the “reach” where the reach is formed, the “super reach” that transitions from the “reach”, and the “decision effect” performed at the “super reach” It is composed of. The “decision effect” is the same as in FIG. In FIG. 110A, the movable body (first decorative member 17A) is operated at the timing of transition from “reach” to “super reach”, and the movable body (first decorative member 17A) is operated. It is composed of the case where it is not allowed. Therefore, the operation and non-operation of the movable body shown in FIG. 110 (B-2) to be described later, unlike FIG. 109, represents the operation and non-operation at the timing of transition from the above-mentioned “reach” to “super reach”. ing. That is, in FIG. 110, as shown in FIG. 109, the operation of the movable body does not notify the jackpot but notifies the transition from “reach” to “super reach”. Even if it exists, a movable body may operate | move, and even if it is a hit fluctuation pattern, a movable body may become inactive. Basically, the expectation for jackpot is set higher when the movable body operates.

  Then, the image display device 14 displays an image (development!) Indicating the transition to “super reach” at the timing of transition from “reach” to “super reach”. When the “Super Reach” is executed and the jackpot is determined, the symbol indicating the jackpot is derived and the loss is determined. In this case, a symbol indicating the dislocation is derived. It should be noted that when deriving either the big hit or the loss, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed according to the variation pattern, and an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A (press the button!) Is displayed. There is a case where an image imitating the effect lever 19A is displayed, and an image urging the operation of the effect lever 19A (retracting the lever!) Is displayed. The effect control board 102 sets the operation valid period of the operating means to be operated via the lamp control board 104. The operation valid period is the same as that described in FIG. 107, and is set to be the same as or longer than the display time of the image imitating the operating means to be operated and the image prompting the operation. It is assumed that In other words, when deriving any symbol, displaying an image prompting any operation and operating the operation means corresponding to the player, it seems as if the player has operated the operation means. An effect in which one of the symbols of losing is derived is performed (similar to FIG. 109, “decision effect”). Note that it is assumed that one of the symbols is automatically displayed as the operation effective period elapses when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. In the example of FIG. 110, an image imitating the effect button 18A is displayed, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed, and then an image (unfortunately!) Indicating that a loss has occurred is displayed ( “Fluctuation pattern 01”), an image that imitates the effect lever 19A is displayed, an image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed, and then an image that indicates that the game is a big win (hit! 1 shows a state in which the decorative member 17A is operated ("variation pattern 03").

  Next, FIG. 110 (B-1) is basically the same as (B-1) in FIGS. 107 to 109, and only the distribution is partially different, so that the description thereof is omitted. Next, FIG. 110 (B-2) shows the ratio of executing the operation effect of the effect button 18A in the “decision effect” and the operation of the effect lever 19A corresponding to the change pattern (special symbol change pattern) in the low probability gaming state. The relationship between the ratio of executing the effects and the relationship between the operation and non-operation of the movable body at the timing of transition from “reach” to “super reach” corresponding to the variation pattern is shown. That is, it can be said that the image display device 14 shows the relationship between the ratio of displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the ratio displaying the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A in the “decision effect”. . Note that the movable body refers to the first decorative member 17A.

  The “variation pattern 01 (losing)” is “100/100” in which the effect button 18A is selected, and “0/100” in which the effect lever 19A is selected. The production lever 19A is not selected. Moreover, the movable body at the time of reach transition is inactive. In addition, in “variation pattern 02 (losing)”, the allocation of the effect button 18A is “0/100”, and the allocation of the effect lever 19A is “100/100”. The effect button 18A is not selected. The movable body at the time of reach transition is in operation. In addition, in the “variation pattern 03 (winning)”, the allocation for which the effect button 18A is selected is “100/100”, and the allocation for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “0/100”. Therefore, the effect lever 19A is not selected. Moreover, the movable body at the time of reach transition is inactive. Further, in the “variation pattern 04 (winning)”, the allocation for which the effect button 18A is selected is “0/100”, and the allocation for which the effect lever 19A is selected is “100/100”. The effect button 18A is not selected. The movable body at the time of reach transition is in operation. That is, in the “decision effect”, when an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect button 18A is operated. Compared to the above, it can be said that the movable body operates at a higher rate during reach transition. Note that any value can be set as the distribution value.

  As described above, in the “decision effect”, when an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect button 18A is operated. Compared to the case where the movable body is operated at the time of reach transition, it is expected that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent “decision effect” when the movable body is operated at the time of reach transition. Can be made. In the “decision effect”, when the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is being performed, the operation effective period of the effect button 18A can be set and the operation effective period of the effect lever 19A can be set. However, in this case, an effect that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is not performed. In other words, the effect that prompts the operation only executes the effect that prompts the operation of any one of the operation means, but the operation means is configured to be operable. Of course, the same thing may be performed when the effect which urges operation of effect lever 19A is performed. By comprising in this way, when a several operation means is provided, since the player can also operate the operation means which a player wants to operate, the improvement of the game entertainment further can be aimed at.

  In the fourth specific example relating to the state transition, the following changes can also be made. That is, in FIG. 110, even if the images prompting the operation are displayed between “start of change” and “reach” and between “reach” and “development reach”, the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A are operated. Good. Further, when the transition from “reach” to “super reach” is performed, the movable body may be operated by operating the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A. Further, the first decorative member 17A may be configured to be able to be operated in a plurality of stages. For example, it is possible to operate from the “1” stage to the “3” stage. The operation means operable in "" may indicate whether it is the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. For example, when it is decided to operate the effect button 18A in the “decision effect”, it is easy to select the operation up to the “1” stage, and the effect lever 19A is operated in the “decision effect”. When it is determined, the operation up to the “3” stage may be easily selected. In such a case, at the time of reach transition, it can be predicted that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent “decision effect” depending on to what level the first decorative member 17A operates. In addition, a movable body different from the first decorative member 17A is provided, and the “decision effect” is determined depending on whether the operation is only the first decorative member 17A, the operation of only another movable body, or the other. It may be suggested whether the operating means that can be operated at is the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A. Even if it is such a structure, the same effect is acquired.

  Further, for the image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A and the image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, only the image of the operation means may be displayed, and the message image may not be displayed. Alternatively, only a meter image may be displayed and an image may be displayed in which the gauge image is changed according to the operation effective period. In this case, it can be said to display an image indicating that the operation means can be operated.

(Fifth specific example related to state transition)
Next, a fifth specific example relating to state transition will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 111, the description will be made assuming that “variation pattern 03” shown in FIG. 109 (B-1) has been determined. Note that both FIG. 111A and FIG. 111B show state transitions in “variation pattern 03”. The contents shown in FIG. 111 are not limited to “variation pattern 03”, but can also be applied to other variation patterns (for example, a variation pattern in which the effect button 18A is operated in the “operation effective period”). Further, the following contents shown in FIGS. 111 to 113 can be applied to FIGS. 107 to 110.

  First, in case 1 of FIG. 111 (A), for example, when the player operates the effect lever 19A when “3S” of the operation effective period set in the “decision effect” in “super reach” has elapsed. Represents. In other words, the effect design starts to change at “start of change”, and “reach” is formed after “being changed”. Then, a transition is made from “reach” to “super reach”, and during “super reach”, an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed on the image display device 14, and together with the display of the image, the effect lever 19A is displayed. “Operation valid period” (for example, “5S”) is set. That is, the effect control board 102 displays an image prompting the user to operate the effect lever 19A on the image display device 14 via the image control board 105 during the “super reach”. During the “reach”, the effect lever 19A is activated via the lamp control board 104. Note that “validation” means that operation information is input to the effect control board 102 via the lamp control board 104 when the player operates the effect lever 19A. Then, when “3S” elapses during “5S” of the “operation valid period”, the player operates the effect lever 19A, and the first decorative member 17A operates on the front side of the image display device 14, In the image display device 14, an image showing that the jackpot is won (a jackpot !!) is displayed. In other words, the effect control board 102 receives the first decorative member via the lamp control board 104 based on the input of the operation information via the lamp control board 104 when the effect lever 19A is activated. The effect control board 102 performs control for operating 17A, and the image control board 105 is based on the operation information input via the lamp control board 104 when the effect lever 19A is activated. The control which displays the image which shows that it is a big hit is performed via. For example, in the “decision effect”, the effect control board 102 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, and when the effect lever 19A is activated, the effect button 18A is activated together with the effect lever 19A being activated. May be used. Further, for example, in the “decision effect”, when an image that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect button 18A is activated, the effect lever 19A may be activated along with the activation of the effect button 18A.

  Then, after the “operation effective period” elapses, the state transits to the “waiting period”. The “standby period” is, for example, when the operation is performed at “1S” of the “operation effective period” and when the operation is performed at “3S” of the “operation effective period”. Therefore, the display timing of the image indicating that it is a big hit will be different, and this is a period in which the time until the “determined display” described later is performed is adjusted. For example, the length of the “waiting period” is different between the case where the operation is performed with “1S” of the “operation effective period” and the case where the operation is performed with “3S” of the “operation effective period”. The “standby period” when the operation is performed in “1S” of the “valid period” is longer. In addition, as shown in FIG. 111B described later, when the operation is not performed in the “operation effective period”, the operation of the first decorative member 17A and the big hit are made with the passage of the “operation effective period”. Since the image indicating this is displayed, the “waiting period” after the “operation effective period” has elapsed is the shortest compared to the case where the operation is performed in the “operation effective period”. In this “standby period”, the image display device 14 displays the fluctuation variation of the effect symbol (for example, “777”) and displays an image or the like indicating that it is a big hit. Therefore, when the operation is performed during the “operation effective period” and when the operation is not performed during the “operation effective period”, the effect design (for example, “777”) displayed on the image display device 14 varies. The period during which the variable display is performed is different from the period during which an image or the like indicating that the jackpot has been won. In addition, when an operation is performed during the “operation effective period”, a predetermined effect is performed during the “standby period”, and when no operation is performed during the “operation effective period”, a predetermined effect is performed during the “standby period”. It may not be possible. In addition, after the “standby period”, a “revariation period” of the effect symbol is provided, and as a predetermined effect in the “waiting period”, an effect of informing the degree of expectation of promotion of the effect symbol in the “revariation period” is performed. Also good. Here, the “revariation period” refers to, for example, when the probability variation jackpot is determined, the “444” symbol or the like that does not correspond to the probability variation jackpot is temporarily displayed in the production symbol, and the probability variation from the “444” symbol is displayed. This is a period in which the effect of whether or not to promote to the “777” symbol corresponding to the jackpot is performed. In this way, by providing the “revariation period” after the “standby period” and performing the effect of informing the expected degree of promotion of the effect symbol in the “revariation period” as the predetermined effect in the “waiting period” In the “valid period”, the player can be motivated to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A. When the “waiting period” elapses, the “confirmed display” is displayed, and the effect symbol “777” is changed from the shaking fluctuation display to the stop display in which it is completely stopped.

  Next, Case 2 in FIG. 111 (B) differs from Case 1 in FIG. 111 (A) in the manner of notifying that the player has not operated the effect lever 19A in the “operation effective period”. The other points are common. That is, in FIG. 111 (B), as in FIG. 111 (A), the image display device 14 displays an image prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A, and together with the display of the image, the “operation effective period” of the effect lever 19A. This indicates that the player has not operated the effect lever 19A despite the fact that the “.” Is set. In this case, when the “operation effective period” has elapsed, the first decoration member 17A is actuated and an image indicating that the jackpot has been won is displayed. When the operation is performed during the “operation effective period” Compared to the above, although the operation timing of the first decorative member 17A and the display timing of the image indicating that the jackpot is different, the jackpot notification mode is the same as when the operation is performed in the “operation effective period”. . However, when the player does not operate the effect lever 19A in the “operation effective period”, the “standby period” is shortened as described above, and thus the predetermined effect in the above “standby period” is not executed. It is like that. Therefore, in case 1 in FIG. 111A and case 2 in FIG. 111B, both of the effects are based on the “variation pattern 03”, and therefore the effects and the like basically performed by the image display device 14 and the like. Are common, but the production in the “waiting period” after the “operation effective period” is the same when the operation is performed during the “operation effective period” and when the operation is not performed during the “operation effective period”. The parts are different.

(Sixth specific example related to state transition)
Next, a sixth specific example related to state transition will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 112, description will be made on the assumption that “variation pattern 01” shown in FIG. 108 (B-1) has been determined. Note that both FIG. 112C and FIG. 112D show state transitions in the “variation pattern 01”. The contents shown in FIG. 112 are not limited to “variation pattern 01”, but can also be applied to other variation patterns (for example, a variation pattern in which the effect button 18A is operated in the “operation effective period”). Also, FIG. 112 differs from FIG. 111 in whether it is a big hit or a loss, and since other points are common, detailed description is omitted.

  That is, in FIG. 112 (C), when “3S” has elapsed in the “operation effective period”, the first lever 17A is activated and the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed is displayed while the effect lever 19A is operated. An image (unfortunately!) Showing that it was lost is displayed. In FIG. 112D, since no operation was performed during the “operation effective period”, an image (unfortunately!) Indicating that a loss has occurred is displayed as the “operation effective period” elapses. Yes. Then, after the “waiting period”, the “designated display” of the production symbol “767” is performed. In the case of FIG. 112, as a predetermined effect in the “standby period”, an effect of notifying the possibility of a big hit in reverse may be performed. Here, “reversal jackpot” means that if a jackpot is determined in advance, it is changed from a display mode that shows a loss to a display mode that shows a jackpot before the “definite display” after the “waiting period”. It is. With this configuration, the player can be motivated to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A during the “operation effective period” as in FIG.

(Seventh specific example related to state transition)
Next, a seventh specific example relating to state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the predetermined effect performed in the “standby period” in FIG. 111A, and therefore, only points different from FIG. 111A will be described.

  That is, in FIG. 113 (E), when “3S” in the “operation effective period” has elapsed, the effect lever 19A is operated, the first decoration member 17A is actuated, and an image indicating that the jackpot has been reached is displayed. The premier character image (a character image that is displayed only when the jackpot is determined) is displayed. The predetermined premier character image can be displayed only for the “operation valid period”, can be continuously displayed from the “operation valid period” to the “standby period”, and becomes the “standby period”. The display can be started later. In this way, the player's willingness to operate the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A during the “operation effective period” by displaying the predetermined premier character image only when the operation is performed during the “operation effective period”. Can be aroused. Such a predetermined premier character image may be displayed with a probability of “½”, for example, when the operation is performed in the “operation effective period”, or in the “operation effective period”. When an operation is performed, it may be displayed. Further, when no operation is performed during the “operation valid period”, it may not be displayed. In addition to the display of a predetermined premier character image, a premier sound (sound that is output only when a jackpot is determined) may be output from the sound output device 15. If comprised in this way, in the "operation effective period", the player's willingness to operate the production button 18A and the production lever 19A can be further aroused.

(Eighth specific example related to state transition)
Next, an eighth specific example relating to state transition will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 (A) shows an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern performed in the low probability game state, and FIG. 114 (B) shows an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern performed in the high probability game state. Yes. FIG. 114 (A) shows an aspect of the effects performed in the low-probability gaming state described in FIGS. 107 to 110, and FIG. 114 (B) is not mentioned in FIGS. 107 to 110 and the like. An aspect of the effect performed in the high probability gaming state is shown.

  That is, in FIG. 114 (A), as the effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern in the low-probability gaming state, after the effect symbol “change start”, a reach is formed through “change in progress”, and thereafter “super reach”. It shows that it has developed. This “super reach” indicates that the symbol indicating the loss is temporarily stopped (“767”), and then the first decorative member 17A is operated to develop “special reach”. Then, in “Special Reach”, it is shown that an effect in which the characters confront each other is performed, and after operating the effect button 18A or the effect lever 19A, the jackpot symbol is derived.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 114 (B), as an effect mode corresponding to the variation pattern in the high probability gaming state, “super reach” in the low probability gaming state is not performed, and after reaching reach, the transition is made to “special reach”. It is configured. That is, FIG. 114 (A) and FIG. 114 (B) differ only in part in whether or not an intermediate “super reach” (including development effects) is performed, and the other effects are the same. In the high-probability gaming state, it is desired that the so-called right-handed game is performed and the time from the start of symbol variation until the result of whether or not the big hit is derived is shorter than that in the low-probability gaming state. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 114 (B), the middle “super reach” is omitted, and after reaching the reach, it is directly developed into “special reach”, thereby shortening the digestion of the game in the high-probability gaming state. be able to.

(Other changes)
In the example of FIGS. 101 to 114 described above, the operation means has been described in relation to the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A, but can be changed as follows.

  For example, the effect button 18A is in a position where it can be operated at all times, but the effect lever 19A may be configured to be operable when the effect lever 19A moves to an operable position. Specifically, the effect lever 19A is housed in the gaming machine frame at the initial position. For example, when the jackpot is determined, the probability is high (on the other hand, when the loss is determined). The player can operate the effect lever 19A by moving the effect lever 19A from the initial position to the operable position in a determined effect such as special reach with a low probability. When the big hit is determined, the effect lever 19A may be moved from the initial position to the operable position, and when the operation by the player is detected, the effect lever 19A may be vibrated. Further, instead of the vibration of the effect lever 19A, or together with the vibration of the effect lever 19A, a sound for notifying the jackpot may be output. That is, when the jackpot is determined, the effect lever 19A can be easily moved to the operable position (when the jackpot is determined) (change from the first mode to the second mode), When the jackpot is determined and the effect lever 19A at the operable position is operated by the player, the effect lever 19A is likely to vibrate (e.g., easily change from the second mode to the third mode). It can be said. The third aspect may be, for example, an aspect in which the light emitting part provided in the effect lever 19A emits light, or an aspect in which the decoration part is driven to change. It is assumed that these controls are performed by the lamp CPU 104a. Further, the effect button 18A and the effect lever 19A may be provided on the same member, or each may be provided on a separate and independent member.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that only either one of presentation button 18A or presentation lever 19A may be provided. For example, when only the effect button 18A is provided, the effect button 18A can be switched between the first mode and the second mode. For example, when a jackpot is determined, a high probability (on the other hand, a loss is determined). In the case of a special effect such as a special reach, the operation button 18A is switched from the first mode to the second mode, and the operation when the production button 18A is in the first mode, It can be operated by the operation in the second mode. The effect button 18A may be vibrated when the jackpot is determined. Further, instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A, or together with the vibration of the effect button 18A, a sound for notifying the jackpot may be output. That is, when the jackpot is determined, the effect button 18A is more easily changed to the second mode than when the loss is determined, and when the jackpot is determined, the second mode is changed. When a certain effect button 18A is operated by the player, it can be said that the effect button 18A is likely to vibrate (easily change from the second mode to the third mode). Note that, for example, the operation mode, the light emission mode, or the visual mode performed in the second mode may be changed to a third mode. Specifically, the vibration mode of the effect button 18A changes stepwise according to the gaming state, such as the first mode, the second mode, the third mode, the fourth mode, and so on. The changeable means such as its shape, light emission, rotation, and driving method may be changed stepwise according to the gaming state. Thus, the interest of the player can be improved by changing the effect in stages according to the gaming state. It is assumed that these controls are performed by the lamp CPU 104a.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and the first state (non-protruding (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and the second state different from the first state The operation means (effect button (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed to (protrusion (or vibration, red, etc.)), and this operation means is operated during the operation valid state that enables the operation on the operation means. And an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on the effect control means, in which the effect control means is in an operation-effective state in which an operation promotion notification is made to prompt the player to operate the operation means. In the first operation valid state, the operation means is in the first state or the second state, and in the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed, the operation means is set in the first state. The second state is not set

  As described above, the gaming machine Y changes the state of the operation means between the first operation effective state in which the operation promotion notification is made to prompt the player to operate the operation means and the second operation effective state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. It offers a variety of different productions.

  Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player with respect to the first operating means, the second operating means different from the first operating means, and the first operating means or the second operating means. A gaming machine comprising: an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on an operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during an operation enabled state in which an operation is enabled. The control means controls the first operation means or the second operation means in the first operation valid state, which is an operation valid state in which an operation promotion notification is made to prompt the player to operate the first operation means or the second operation means. Based on the operation, the first operation means is operated in the second operation valid state, which is a valid operation state in which a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed and the operation promotion notification is not performed. Based on the predetermined operation according to the operation Run the effect, be operated for the second operating means is not to perform a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y executes a predetermined effect in the first operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means is performed and in the second operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. It provides a variety of effects with different operation means.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player, and the first state (non-protruding (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) is different from the first state (protruding). (Or vibration, red, etc.)) and an effect control means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation means being operated during an operation valid state in which an operation on the operation means is enabled. The effect control means is a first operation effective state in which an operation promotion notification is made to prompt the player to operate the operation means during execution of the game effect related to the game. In the operation effective state, the operation means is in the first state or the second state, and in the second operation effective state that is the operation effective state in the standby state in which no game effect is being executed, the operation means is in the first state. The second state is limited.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game, and the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. A variety of effects are provided in which the state of the operation means is different between the second operation effective state and the inside.

  Further, as described above, the gaming machine Y can be operated by the player with respect to the first operating means, the second operating means different from the first operating means, and the first operating means or the second operating means. A gaming machine including an effect control means (sub CPU) for executing a predetermined effect based on an operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during an operation valid state for validating an operation, In the first operation effective state, the effect control means is an operation effective state in which an operation promotion notification is made to prompt the player to operate the first operation means or the second operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game. Based on the operation on the first operation means or the second operation means, the second operation which is the operation effective state in the standby state in which a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is executed and the game effect is not executed. In the operation valid state, the first operation means Based on that the operation against executes a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation, be operated for the second operating means, limits to perform a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y is in the first operation valid state in which the operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means during the execution of the game effect related to the game, and the standby state in which the game effect is not executed. A variety of effects are provided in which the operation means used for executing a predetermined effect is different from the second operation effective state in the middle.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y has a determination means (main CPU) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and the special game by the determination means. Is determined to execute the special game control means (main CPU) for executing the special game, and can be operated by the player, and the first state (non-protruding (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) Based on the operation means (effect button (or operation lever, etc.)) that can be changed to a second state (protrusion (or vibration, red, etc.)) different from the first state, and the determination result by the determination means, An effect control means (sub CPU) that performs a change effect using an effect symbol for notification, wherein the effect control means is predetermined based on the operation means being operated in the change effect. Can be performed The predetermined effects include a first effect executed by an operation on the operation means in the first state, a second effect executed by an operation on the operation means in the second state, and the operation in the first state or the second state. A third effect that is executed by an operation on the means is included, and in the third effect in the variable effect that is executed based on the determination that the special game is executed by the determination unit, the operation unit is set to the first state. The second state is set at a higher rate.

  Thus, the gaming machine Y can increase the player's interest in the game by changing the state of the operation means used when executing the third effect at a rate corresponding to the determination result by the determination means. .

  In addition, as described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and determines whether the special game is played by the determination unit. A special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game by being determined to be executed; a first operation means operable by a player; and a second operation means different from the first operation means The gaming machine includes an effect control means (sub CPU) that performs a change effect using an effect symbol for notifying the determination result based on the determination result by the determination means. The predetermined effect can be executed based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means. The predetermined effect includes a first effect executed based on an operation on the first operation means, and a first effect. 2 operator A second effect that is executed based on an operation on the first operation means and a third effect that is executed by an operation on the first operation means or the second operation means, and the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed. In the third effect in the variation effect to be executed, the second operation means is selected at a higher rate than the first operation means.

  Thus, the gaming machine Y can increase the player's interest in the game by changing the selection ratio of the operation means used when executing the third effect according to the determination result by the determination means. it can.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y has a determination means (main CPU) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and the special game by the determination means. Is determined to be executed, the special game control means (main CPU) for executing the special game, the first operation means that can be operated by the player, and the second operation means different from the first operation means. And an effect control means (sub CPU) that performs a change effect using an effect symbol for informing the determination result based on the determination result by the determination means, wherein the effect control means A predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the operation promotion effect. The operation of the first operation type or the operation of the second operation type different from the first operation type is urged as the operation on the means, and the operation of the third operation type or the third operation is operated as the operation on the second operation means. A ratio that prompts an operation of the fourth operation type different from the operation of the type, and a ratio that prompts an operation of the first operation type differs from a ratio that prompts an operation of the second operation type, and a ratio that prompts an operation of the third operation type The ratio of prompting the operation of the fourth operation type is different.

  Thus, when the gaming machine Y executes a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means in the operation promotion effect, the operation on the first operation means is performed in the operation promotion effect. The operation of the first operation type and the operation of the second operation type are urged at different ratios, and the operation of the third operation type and the operation of the fourth operation type are urged at different ratios as operations for the second operation means. Provides a variety of operational promotion effects.

  The operation promotion effect includes an operation promotion effect that prompts only an operation of the first operation type as an operation for the first operation means and prompts only an operation of the fourth operation type as an operation for the second operation means.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition, and determines whether the special game is executed by the determination means. A special game control means (main CPU) for executing a special game by determining to execute, and a specific game for setting a specific game state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal game state after the special game is finished Based on the state setting means (main CPU), operation means (for example, an effect button) that can be operated by the player, and the determination result by the determination means, a variable effect is performed using an effect symbol for informing the determination result. It is a gaming machine provided with production control means (sub CPU), and the production control means that the operation means is operated during the operation valid state in which the operation with respect to the operation means in the variable production is valid. Then, a predetermined effect is executed, and a variable effect is being performed in a second period after the first period in the specific gaming state at a higher rate than the first period in the specific gaming state after the end of the special game. Set the operation valid state to.

  In this way, the gaming machine Y can provide a highly interesting production such that the production using the operating means increases as the specific gaming state after the special game ends.

  This operation means can change between a first state (non-protruding (or non-vibration, blue, etc.)) and a second state (protruding (or vibration, red, etc.)) different from the first state, The means sets the operation valid state in which the operation means is in the second state in the second period at a higher rate than the first period.

  As described above, the gaming machine Y can provide a highly interesting production such that the production using the operation means that becomes the second state increases as the specific gaming state after the end of the special game continues.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of a specific effect is determined using the specific effect determination tables of FIGS. In this determination, it is easier to determine that the specific effect is executed in the case of the jackpot than in the case of losing, and it is easier to determine that the specific effect is executed in the reach effect having a higher degree of jackpot expectation. When the specific effect is executed, the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of pseudo sound output of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A, and the presence / absence of the output of the image of the effect button 18A are determined.

  The vibration speed of the effect button 18A in the specific effect determines whether the effect button 18A is vibrated at a high speed or at a low speed using the specific effect vibration speed determination table of FIGS. It is easier to determine that the effect button 18A is vibrated at a higher speed in the case of a big hit than in the case of losing, and it is easier to determine if the effect button 18A is vibrated at a higher speed for a reach effect that has a higher expectation level of the big hit. Moreover, the presence or absence of the pseudo sound output of the vibration sound of the effect button 18A in the specific effect is determined using the specific effect sound output determination table of FIGS. It is easier to decide that the pseudo sound of the vibration sound of the production button 18A is output in the case of the big hit than the case of the loss, and the pseudo production of the vibration sound of the production button 18A is higher in the reach production having a higher expectation level of the big hit. It is easier to be determined when outputting. Further, the presence / absence of the output of the image of the effect button 18A in the specific effect is determined using the specific effect image output determination table of FIGS. It is easier to determine that the image of the effect button 18A is output in the case of the big hit than in the case of losing, and it is easier to determine that the image of the effect button 18A is output for the reach effect having a higher expectation level of the big hit.

  Thus, when performing a specific effect, the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence or absence of pseudo sound output of the effect button 18A that vibrates, the presence or absence of the display of the image of the effect button 18A, and FIG. As shown, the jackpot expectation varies depending on the combination. Thereby, a jackpot expectation degree can be alert | reported to a player in multiple steps, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the specific effect, the jackpot expectation is calculated using the vibration speed of the effect button 18A, the presence / absence of pseudo sound output of the effect button 18A that vibrates, and the presence / absence of the image display of the effect button 18A. Although it is suggested, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the size of the image of the effect button 18A to be displayed, the difference between 2D and 3D, the difference in color, the difference in the size of sound to be output, and the like may be used. Further, the sound output in the specific effect may not be a pseudo sound of the effect button 18A that vibrates, but may be a sound effect specific to the specific effect, a specific speech, or the like. When performing a specific effect, a plurality of types of sounds may be output, and the jackpot expectation may be suggested depending on the type of sound to be output.

  In addition, the specific effect may be performed not by the vibration of the effect button 18A but by the vibration of the effect lever 19A, or by the lighting or flashing of the LED incorporated in the effect button 18A, instead of the vibration of the effect button 18A. The effect may be shown as if 18A is operating. Further, a specific effect may be performed by moving an object provided inside the effect button 18A, and the expectation of jackpot may be suggested based on the presence / absence of the operation of the object and the speed of the operation. Moreover, a specific effect may be performed by rotating the effect button 18A, and the degree of expectation of jackpot may be suggested depending on the presence / absence of rotation, the rotation speed, and the rotation direction. Further, a specific effect may be performed by projecting the effect button 18A.

  In the present embodiment, in the low-probability gaming state that is the normal gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state (when in the presentation mode A), as shown in FIGS. 44 to 45, the presentation is the first operation means. The ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the button 18A is higher than the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means. On the other hand, in the case of the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state (when the production modes are B to D) that are the specific gaming state, as shown in FIGS. 46 to 51, the operation of the effect lever 19A as the second operation means is performed. The ratio of performing the prompting operation notification is higher than the ratio of performing the prompting operation prompting the operation of the effect button 18A as the first operation means. Therefore, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A, and in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the player frequently uses the effect lever 19A. . Thereby, the pleasure which the operation means selects according to the game state can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is different from the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the performance lever 19A. For example, in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, only the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is performed without performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A, or the high-probability game. In the state and the short-time gaming state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed without performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A. In addition, for example, in the low probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A and the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A are performed, but in the high-probability gaming state and the time-short gaming state. Instead of performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, only the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect lever 19A may be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 18A is used as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A is used as the second operation means. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the effect lever 19A is used as the first operation means. The effect button 18A may be used as the operation means. Further, as the first operation means and the second operation means, an effect button different from the effect button 18A, a touch panel, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a proximity sensor, a motion sensor, or the like may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the player frequently uses the effect button 18A in the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, and the player uses the effect lever 19A in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state. The frequency of doing is increasing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect button 18A and the appearance frequency of the effect using the effect lever 19A are different in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, for example, in the first half period and the second half period. You may make it let. In the present embodiment, for example, in the production mode B, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification for urging the operation of the production button 18A as the first operation means is urged to operate the production lever 19A as the second operation means. It is higher than the ratio for performing the operation promotion notification, and when in the production mode C, the ratio for performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the performance lever 19A is higher than the ratio for performing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the performance button 18A. To do. Further, in the effect mode D, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is made higher than that in the effect mode C. Thereby, the interest of the game when it is a high probability game state and a short time game state can be improved.

  Further, it is possible to execute a reach effect using only the effect button 18A and a reach effect using only the effect lever 19A, and the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect button 18A is low in the low probability game state and the non-short-time game state. In a high and high-probability gaming state and a short-time gaming state, the execution frequency of the reach effect using only the effect lever 19A may be increased. In addition, the production includes a production dedicated to the production button 18A and a production dedicated to the production lever 19A. In the low-probability gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state, the production frequency of the production button 18A-specific production is high, and the high-probability gaming state and In the short-time gaming state, the appearance frequency of the effect dedicated to the effect lever 19A may be increased.

  In addition, in the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the effect button 18A, it is possible to execute an effect that prompts a plurality of operations of the effect button 18A, such as “Please press the button repeatedly”. Count once. For example, even if there is one operation promotion notification that prompts the player to operate the effect button 18A five times, if there is two operation promotion notifications that prompt the user to operate the effect lever 19A, the player uses the effect button 18A. It can be said that the frequency of using the effect lever 19A is higher than the frequency of performing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are two operation means, that is, the effect button 18A as the first operation means and the effect lever 19A as the second operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may have a kind of operation means. In the case of having three or more types of operation means, the frequency of use of each operation means (appearance ratio of the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of each operation means) may be varied depending on the gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the low probability gaming state and non-time saving gaming state as the normal gaming state and the high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state as the specific gaming state. A gaming state such as a stochastic gaming state and a short-time gaming state, or a high-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state may correspond to the specific gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification that prompts the user to operate the effect button 18A is a low-probability gaming state that is a normal gaming state and a non-probable gaming state that is not a high-probability gaming state that is a specific gaming state and a short-time gaming state. The rate of execution is higher in the short-time gaming state. That is, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect button 18A is lower than in the low-probability gaming state that is the normal gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state. . Thereby, it is possible to improve the production effect of the production using the production button 18A.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than the low probability gaming state that is the normal gaming state and the non-temporary gaming state, and the high probability gaming state that is the specific gaming state and The rate of execution is higher in the short-time gaming state. That is, in the high-probability gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the ratio of performing the operation promotion notification that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is higher than in the low-probability gaming state that is the normal gaming state and the non-short-time gaming state. . Thereby, it is possible to improve the production effect of the production using the production lever 19A.

  In the gaming machine Y, when the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over, the specific game advantageous to the player as compared to the normal game state (low probability game state and non-time-short game state). A state (high probability gaming state and short-time gaming state) is set, and in the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state is terminated when the number of jackpot determinations (the number of times that the special symbol display can be executed) reaches 84 times. It was described as “ST machine”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the “ST machine”, and the high probability state continues until the next jackpot is won (or the high probability gaming state continues, for example, 10,000 times). It may be a gaming machine having a “big hit” and a “normal jackpot” in which the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a low probability gaming state.

  When the gaming machine Y is such a gaming machine, the period during which the special symbol after the jackpot game is fluctuated from 1 to 99 times is referred to as the “first period” described above, and the jackpot game The period in which the number of subsequent changes in the special symbol is 100 times or more may be set as the “second period”. In this case, the sub CPU 102a sets the operation effective period during the variation effect in the “second period” at a higher rate than the “first period”.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a jigyan ball gaming machine and an arrangement ball gaming machine.

<About other inventions described in the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, other inventions described in the above embodiment will be described.
The other inventions described below include those that can be independently established as inventions, and those that can be combined with other inventions.

  (A) An operation means that can be operated by a player and can be changed between a first state and a second state different from the first state, and an operation that enables an operation on the operation means. An effect control means for executing a predetermined effect based on an operation of the operation means during a state, wherein the effect control means is an operation for prompting a player to operate the operation means. In the first operation effective state that is the operation effective state in which the promotion notification is performed, the operation means is set to the first state or the second state, and the second operation in the operation effective state in which the operation promotion notification is not performed. A gaming machine, wherein in an effective state, the operating means is in the first state, but not in the second state.

  (B) The first operation means that can be operated by the player, the second operation means different from the first operation means, and the operation that validates the operation on the first operation means or the second operation means. A gaming machine comprising an effect control means for executing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the first operation means or the second operation means during an effective state, wherein the effect control means In the first operation effective state, which is the operation effective state for performing an operation promotion notification for prompting an operation to the first operation means or the second operation means, an operation is performed on the first operation means or the second operation means. The first operation means is operated in the second operation effective state, which is the operation effective state in which a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the operation promotion notification is not performed. To the operation based on Run the predetermined effect Flip was the be the operation on the second operation means, gaming machine characterized in that it does not perform a predetermined effect corresponding to the operation.

  (C) When the starting condition is satisfied, it is determined that special game determination means for determining whether or not to control special game advantageous to the player, and that the special game control is performed by the special game determination means. A special game control means for controlling the special game; a first operation means operable by the player; a second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means; , An operation effect control means for controlling an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, and a game in a normal game state or a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A game state control means for controlling the operation, and the operation effect control means is an operation for prompting an operation of the first operation means when the game state control means controls a game in the normal game state. The ratio of production is When the game state control means is controlling a game in the specific game state, the operation effect prompting the operation of the second operation means is higher than the ratio of performing the operation effect urging the operation of the second operation means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the ratio of performing is higher than the ratio of performing the operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means.

  (D) When the start condition is satisfied, it is determined that special game determination means for determining whether or not to control special game advantageous to the player, and that the special game control is performed by the special game determination means. A special game control means for controlling the special game; a first operation means operable by the player; a second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means; , An operation effect control means for controlling an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, and a game in a normal game state or a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A game state control means for controlling the game state control means, and when the game state control means is controlling the game in the specific game state, the operation state control means is the normal game state. Control the game at And than is, in the ratio to perform an operation effect to promote the operation of the first operating means is low, the gaming machine, characterized in that.

  (E) When the starting condition is satisfied, it is determined that special game determination means for determining whether or not to control special game advantageous to the player, and that the special game control is performed by the special game determination means. A special game control means for controlling the special game; a first operation means operable by the player; a second operation means operable by the player and different from the first operation means; , An operation effect control means for controlling an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means and the second operation means, and a game in a normal game state or a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A game state control means for controlling the game state control means, and when the game state control means is controlling a game in the specific game state, the effect state control means is in the normal game state. Control the game Than when you are, game machines proportion to operate effect urging operation of the second operating means is high, characterized in that.

<The technical idea which can be grasped | ascertained from the said embodiment is as follows. >

  (A) The first operation means that can be operated by the player, the second operation means that can be operated by the player and that is different from the first operation means, the normal game state, and the normal game state are different A game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for prompting an operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, The first variation effect can be executed when controlled to the normal gaming state, and the second variation effect different from the first variation effect can be performed when controlled to the specific gaming state. Control means, and the effect control means, when executing the first variation effect in the normal gaming state, than when executing the second variation effect in the specific gaming state, Encourage operation of the first operating means Easy to create production is performed, characterized in that. As described above, in the normal gaming state (for example, the low probability gaming state), the effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means (for example, the rendering button 18A) is selected rather than the specific gaming state (for example, the high probability gaming state). Since it is easy to be done, interest can be improved.

  (B) The first operation means that can be operated by the player, the second operation means that can be operated by the player and that is different from the first operation means, the normal game state, and the normal game state are different A game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for prompting an operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, The first variation effect can be executed when controlled to the normal gaming state, and the second variation effect different from the first variation effect can be performed when controlled to the specific gaming state. Control means, and the effect control means, when executing the second variation effect in the specific gaming state, than when executing the first variation effect in the normal gaming state, Encourage operation of the first operating means It may be a high frequency of execution of work performance, characterized in that. In this way, in a specific gaming state (for example, high probability gaming state), there is an effect that prompts the operation of the first operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A) more than in the normal gaming state (for example, low probability gaming state). Since it is easy to be selected, interest can be improved, and since the effect using the first operation means is a characteristic effect in the specific game state, the interest can be particularly enhanced.

  ◆ (c) When the starting condition is satisfied, the player can operate the special game determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player, the first operation means that can be operated by the player, and the player A game state control means for controlling a game state having a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state; An effect control means capable of executing an operation effect for prompting an operation of the operation means and an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, wherein the first operation means is the first mode to the first The aspect control means can change to the second aspect different from the aspect of the above, and when the effect control means is controlled to the normal gaming state, the effect control means is more than the case of being controlled to the specific gaming state. The frequency of execution of operation effects that prompt the operation of one operation means is high It may, when executing the special game may be the first operating means from the first embodiment tends to change to the second aspect, characterized in that. As described above, in the normal gaming state (for example, the low probability gaming state), the effect related to the first operation means (the effect button 18A) is more likely to occur than in the specific gaming state (for example, the high probability gaming state). When it is determined to control the game (during a win), the first operating means can be easily changed from the first mode (for example, the normal state) to the second mode (for example, the protruding state). The interest of the game can be improved.

  ◆ (d) When the starting condition is satisfied, the special game determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player, the first operation means that can be operated by the player, and the player can operate A game state control means for controlling a game state having a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state; An effect control means capable of executing an operation effect for prompting an operation of the operation means and an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, wherein the second operation means is the first mode to the first mode. It is possible to change to a second mode different from the above mode, and the effect control means is more controlled when controlled to the specific gaming state than when controlled in the normal gaming state. An operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means is executed Ku, wherein when it is determined to perform the special game is the second operating means easily varied in the second embodiment from the first embodiment, wherein the. Thus, in a specific gaming state (for example, a high probability gaming state), an effect related to the second operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is more likely to occur than in a normal gaming state (for example, a low probability gaming state). When it is determined that the special game is to be controlled (for example, at the time of winning a win), the second operation means is changed from the first mode (for example, the normal state) to the second mode (for example, the vibration state). Because it is easy to play, the interest of the game can be improved.

  ◆ (e) When the start condition is satisfied, the player can operate the special game determination means for determining whether or not to play a special game advantageous to the player, the first operation means that can be operated by the player, and the player A game state control means for controlling a game state having a second operation means different from the first operation means, a normal game state, and a specific game state different from the normal game state; An effect control means capable of executing an operation effect for prompting an operation of the operation means and an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, wherein the second operation means is the first mode to the first mode. The production control means can be changed to a second aspect different from the aspect of the above, rather than the operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means when controlled to the specific gaming state. An operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means is easily performed. , If the it is determined to perform the special game, the second operation means from the first embodiment tends to change to the second aspect, characterized in that. Thus, in a specific gaming state (for example, high probability gaming state), the operation of the second operating means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is performed rather than the effect that prompts the operation of the first operating means (for example, the effect button 18A). If it is determined that the special game is controlled (for example, at the time of winning a win), the second operating means is changed from the first mode (for example, the normal state) to the second mode ( For example, since it is easy to change to a vibration state), the interest of the game can be improved.

  ◆ (f) The first operation means that can be operated by the player, the second operation means that can be operated by the player and that is different from the first operation means, the normal game state, and the normal game state are different A game state control means for controlling a game state having a specific game state, an operation effect for prompting an operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, The first variation effect can be executed when controlled to the normal gaming state, and the second variation effect different from the first variation effect can be performed when controlled to the specific gaming state. Control means, and the effect control means, when executing the second variation effect in the specific gaming state, than when executing the first variation effect in the normal gaming state, Encourage operation of the second operating means The execution frequency of the production effects may be high, and when performing an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, any operation of the first operation means and the second operation means can be enabled. It is characterized by that. Thus, even if only the operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means (for example, the effect lever 19A) is performed, in addition to the second operation means, the operation of the first operation means (for example, the effect button 18A) is performed. Since it becomes effective, the player can play a game using the operation means that is easy to operate among the plurality of operation means, and can improve the interest of the game.

  (G) When the start condition is satisfied, special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a first operation means that can be operated by the player ( For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means that can be operated by the player and different from the first operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A), and an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, An operation effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 102a) that controls an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, a change display means (for example, the image display device 14) that performs change display based on the result of the determination, Reach effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 102a) for controlling reach effect based on the result of the determination, the operation effect control means after the execution of the variable display. Before running the Chi effect, compared after execution of the reach demonstration, the first operating means is constructed easy to perform an operation effect to promote operation, characterized in that. In this way, before the reach effect is executed, the effect button 18A is selected at a higher ratio than when the effect lever 19A is selected, and after the reach effect is executed, the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the effect lever 19A is selected, when a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operation means is being operated.

  ◆ (h) When the starting condition is satisfied, special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and first operation means that can be operated by the player ( For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means that can be operated by the player and different from the first operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A), and an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, An effect control means for controlling an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means (for example, the sub CPU 102a), and the effect control means can execute a specific effect based on the result of the determination, and After the performance is performed, it may be easier to execute the operation performance that prompts the operation of the second operation means than before the execution of the specific performance. As described above, before the specific effect is performed, the ratio of the effect button 18A is set higher than when the effect lever 19A is selected, and after the specific effect is performed, the effect button 18A is selected. By increasing the ratio at which the effect lever 19A is selected, when a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operation means is being operated.

  ◆ (L) When the start condition is satisfied, special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and first operation means that can be operated by the player ( For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means that can be operated by the player and different from the first operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A), and an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, Effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, and the effect control means can execute a specific effect based on the result of the determination, and As an effect, the first specific effect and the second specific effect that is performed after the execution of the first specific effect can be executed. When the first specific effect is being executed, the second specific effect is executed. Have When compared with, it may easily perform an operation effect to promote the operation of the first operating means, characterized in that. In this way, in the first specific effect, the ratio of the effect button 18A being selected is higher than that in the effect lever 19A being selected, and in the second specific effect, the effect button 18A is selected rather than being selected. By increasing the ratio at which the lever 19A is selected, when a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operation means is being operated.

  ◆ (nu) When the starting condition is satisfied, special game determination means (for example, the main CPU 101a) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and first operation means that can be operated by the player ( For example, an effect button 18A), a second operation means that can be operated by the player and different from the first operation means (for example, an effect lever 19A), and an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, Effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, and the effect control means can execute a specific effect based on the result of the determination, and As an effect, the first specific effect and the second specific effect that is performed after the execution of the first specific effect can be executed. When the second specific effect is being executed, the first specific effect is executed. Have As compared to the case, there may easily perform the operation effect urging operation of the second operating means, characterized in that. In this way, in the first specific effect, the ratio of the effect button 18A being selected is higher than that in the effect lever 19A being selected, and in the second specific effect, the effect button 18A is selected rather than being selected. By increasing the ratio at which the lever 19A is selected, when a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know which operation means is being operated.

  (Le) First operation means (for example, effect button 18A) that can be operated by the player, and first operation detection means (for example, operation detection switch 18a) for detecting that the first operation means has been operated. The player can operate the second operation means (for example, the effect lever 19A) different from the first operation means, and the second operation detection means (for example, detecting that the second operation means has been operated). , An operation detection switch 19a), an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, and an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, Based on the detection by the movable means (for example, the first decorative member 17A) movable from the position to the second position, and the first operation detection means or the second operation detection means, the movable means is First Movable control means (for example, a lamp CPU 104a) capable of moving from the position to the second position, and the movable control means controls an operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means and performs the detection. In this case, compared with the case where the operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is controlled and the detection is performed, the movable means is controlled to be easily moved from the first position to the second position. It is characterized by that. In this way, in the decision effect in which the jackpot determination result is derived by operating the operation means, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 18A is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated as compared with the case where the effect button 18A is operated. In the case of displaying an image prompting an operation and operating the effect lever 19A, by increasing the rate at which the movable body operates, which operation means the image prompting the operation to be displayed in the determined effect is displayed. Can be noticed.

  ◇ (W) First operation means (for example, effect button 18A) that can be operated by the player, and second operation means (for example, effect lever 19A) that can be operated by the player and that is different from the first operation means. And an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 102a) for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the first operation means and an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means, and a second position from the first position. Movable means (for example, the first decorative member 17A), and movable control means (for example, the lamp CPU 104a) capable of controlling the movement of the movable means from the first position to the second position, The movable control means is more effective when the operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is controlled when the operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means is controlled by the effect control means. Control means Before control is carried out that, the controlled movable device tends to move to the second position from said first position, characterized in that. In this way, in the determined effect in which the determination result of the jackpot is derived by operating the operation means, when the image that prompts the operation of the effect lever 19A is displayed and the effect lever 19A is operated, the operation of the effect button 18A is performed. Compared to the case where an image prompting the user is displayed and the effect button 18A is operated, by increasing the rate at which the movable body operates before the control by the effect control means, the control by the effect control means is performed. When the movable body is actuated, it can be predicted that the effect lever 19A can be operated in the subsequent “decision effect”.

  The “first operation means” may be any operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, buttons, levers, touch panels, handles, etc. can be applied.

  The “second operation means” may be any operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, buttons, levers, touch panels, handles, etc. can be applied.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine used for the pachinko gaming machine has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a swing-type gaming machine (slot machine), a sparrow ball gaming machine, and an arrange ball gaming machine.

Y gaming machine 6 first start opening 6a first start opening detection sensor 7 second start opening 7a second start opening detection sensor 8 big winning opening 9 first winning gate 10 second winning gate 14 image display device 17A first decorative member (Movable member)
17B Second decorative member (movable member)
17C Third decorative member (movable member)
18A effect button (first operation means)
19A Production lever (second operating means)
70 Second starting port control device 80 Big prize opening control device 101 Main control board 101a Main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 Production control board 102a Sub CPU
102b Sub ROM
102c Sub RAM

Claims (1)

A first operating means operable by a player;
A second operating means that is operable by the player and is different from the first operating means;
An effect control means for controlling an operation effect for prompting an operation of the first operation means and an operation effect for prompting an operation of the second operation means;
Movable means movable from a first position to a second position;
Movable control means capable of controlling movement of the movable means from the first position to the second position;
With
The movable control means includes
When the operation effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means is controlled by the effect control means, the control by the effect control means is performed compared to the case where the operation effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is controlled. The game machine is controlled so that the movable means is easily moved from the first position to the second position before being moved.